1% texinfo.tex -- TeX macros to handle Texinfo files. 2% 3% Load plain if necessary, i.e., if running under initex. 4\expandafter\ifx\csname fmtname\endcsname\relax\input plain\fi 5% 6\def\texinfoversion{2018-02-12.17} 7% 8% Copyright 1985, 1986, 1988, 1990, 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 9% 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 10% 2007, 2008, 2009, 2010, 2011, 2012, 2013, 2014, 2015, 2016, 2017, 2018 11% Free Software Foundation, Inc. 12% 13% This texinfo.tex file is free software: you can redistribute it and/or 14% modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as 15% published by the Free Software Foundation, either version 3 of the 16% License, or (at your option) any later version. 17% 18% This texinfo.tex file is distributed in the hope that it will be 19% useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty 20% of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU 21% General Public License for more details. 22% 23% You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License 24% along with this program. If not, see <https://www.gnu.org/licenses/>. 25% 26% As a special exception, when this file is read by TeX when processing 27% a Texinfo source document, you may use the result without 28% restriction. This Exception is an additional permission under section 7 29% of the GNU General Public License, version 3 ("GPLv3"). 30% 31% Please try the latest version of texinfo.tex before submitting bug 32% reports; you can get the latest version from: 33% https://ftp.gnu.org/gnu/texinfo/ (the Texinfo release area), or 34% https://ftpmirror.gnu.org/texinfo/ (same, via a mirror), or 35% https://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo/ (the Texinfo home page) 36% The texinfo.tex in any given distribution could well be out 37% of date, so if that's what you're using, please check. 38% 39% Send bug reports to bug-texinfo@gnu.org. Please include including a 40% complete document in each bug report with which we can reproduce the 41% problem. Patches are, of course, greatly appreciated. 42% 43% To process a Texinfo manual with TeX, it's most reliable to use the 44% texi2dvi shell script that comes with the distribution. For a simple 45% manual foo.texi, however, you can get away with this: 46% tex foo.texi 47% texindex foo.?? 48% tex foo.texi 49% tex foo.texi 50% dvips foo.dvi -o # or whatever; this makes foo.ps. 51% The extra TeX runs get the cross-reference information correct. 52% Sometimes one run after texindex suffices, and sometimes you need more 53% than two; texi2dvi does it as many times as necessary. 54% 55% It is possible to adapt texinfo.tex for other languages, to some 56% extent. You can get the existing language-specific files from the 57% full Texinfo distribution. 58% 59% The GNU Texinfo home page is https://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo. 60 61 62\message{Loading texinfo [version \texinfoversion]:} 63 64% If in a .fmt file, print the version number 65% and turn on active characters that we couldn't do earlier because 66% they might have appeared in the input file name. 67\everyjob{\message{[Texinfo version \texinfoversion]}% 68 \catcode`+=\active \catcode`\_=\active} 69 70% LaTeX's \typeout. This ensures that the messages it is used for 71% are identical in format to the corresponding ones from latex/pdflatex. 72\def\typeout{\immediate\write17}% 73 74\chardef\other=12 75 76% We never want plain's \outer definition of \+ in Texinfo. 77% For @tex, we can use \tabalign. 78\let\+ = \relax 79 80% Save some plain tex macros whose names we will redefine. 81\let\ptexb=\b 82\let\ptexbullet=\bullet 83\let\ptexc=\c 84\let\ptexcomma=\, 85\let\ptexdot=\. 86\let\ptexdots=\dots 87\let\ptexend=\end 88\let\ptexequiv=\equiv 89\let\ptexexclam=\! 90\let\ptexfootnote=\footnote 91\let\ptexgtr=> 92\let\ptexhat=^ 93\let\ptexi=\i 94\let\ptexindent=\indent 95\let\ptexinsert=\insert 96\let\ptexlbrace=\{ 97\let\ptexless=< 98\let\ptexnewwrite\newwrite 99\let\ptexnoindent=\noindent 100\let\ptexplus=+ 101\let\ptexraggedright=\raggedright 102\let\ptexrbrace=\} 103\let\ptexslash=\/ 104\let\ptexsp=\sp 105\let\ptexstar=\* 106\let\ptexsup=\sup 107\let\ptext=\t 108\let\ptextop=\top 109{\catcode`\'=\active \global\let\ptexquoteright'}% active in plain's math mode 110 111% If this character appears in an error message or help string, it 112% starts a new line in the output. 113\newlinechar = `^^J 114 115% Use TeX 3.0's \inputlineno to get the line number, for better error 116% messages, but if we're using an old version of TeX, don't do anything. 117% 118\ifx\inputlineno\thisisundefined 119 \let\linenumber = \empty % Pre-3.0. 120\else 121 \def\linenumber{l.\the\inputlineno:\space} 122\fi 123 124% Set up fixed words for English if not already set. 125\ifx\putwordAppendix\undefined \gdef\putwordAppendix{Appendix}\fi 126\ifx\putwordChapter\undefined \gdef\putwordChapter{Chapter}\fi 127\ifx\putworderror\undefined \gdef\putworderror{error}\fi 128\ifx\putwordfile\undefined \gdef\putwordfile{file}\fi 129\ifx\putwordin\undefined \gdef\putwordin{in}\fi 130\ifx\putwordIndexIsEmpty\undefined \gdef\putwordIndexIsEmpty{(Index is empty)}\fi 131\ifx\putwordIndexNonexistent\undefined \gdef\putwordIndexNonexistent{(Index is nonexistent)}\fi 132\ifx\putwordInfo\undefined \gdef\putwordInfo{Info}\fi 133\ifx\putwordInstanceVariableof\undefined \gdef\putwordInstanceVariableof{Instance Variable of}\fi 134\ifx\putwordMethodon\undefined \gdef\putwordMethodon{Method on}\fi 135\ifx\putwordNoTitle\undefined \gdef\putwordNoTitle{No Title}\fi 136\ifx\putwordof\undefined \gdef\putwordof{of}\fi 137\ifx\putwordon\undefined \gdef\putwordon{on}\fi 138\ifx\putwordpage\undefined \gdef\putwordpage{page}\fi 139\ifx\putwordsection\undefined \gdef\putwordsection{section}\fi 140\ifx\putwordSection\undefined \gdef\putwordSection{Section}\fi 141\ifx\putwordsee\undefined \gdef\putwordsee{see}\fi 142\ifx\putwordSee\undefined \gdef\putwordSee{See}\fi 143\ifx\putwordShortTOC\undefined \gdef\putwordShortTOC{Short Contents}\fi 144\ifx\putwordTOC\undefined \gdef\putwordTOC{Table of Contents}\fi 145% 146\ifx\putwordMJan\undefined \gdef\putwordMJan{January}\fi 147\ifx\putwordMFeb\undefined \gdef\putwordMFeb{February}\fi 148\ifx\putwordMMar\undefined \gdef\putwordMMar{March}\fi 149\ifx\putwordMApr\undefined \gdef\putwordMApr{April}\fi 150\ifx\putwordMMay\undefined \gdef\putwordMMay{May}\fi 151\ifx\putwordMJun\undefined \gdef\putwordMJun{June}\fi 152\ifx\putwordMJul\undefined \gdef\putwordMJul{July}\fi 153\ifx\putwordMAug\undefined \gdef\putwordMAug{August}\fi 154\ifx\putwordMSep\undefined \gdef\putwordMSep{September}\fi 155\ifx\putwordMOct\undefined \gdef\putwordMOct{October}\fi 156\ifx\putwordMNov\undefined \gdef\putwordMNov{November}\fi 157\ifx\putwordMDec\undefined \gdef\putwordMDec{December}\fi 158% 159\ifx\putwordDefmac\undefined \gdef\putwordDefmac{Macro}\fi 160\ifx\putwordDefspec\undefined \gdef\putwordDefspec{Special Form}\fi 161\ifx\putwordDefvar\undefined \gdef\putwordDefvar{Variable}\fi 162\ifx\putwordDefopt\undefined \gdef\putwordDefopt{User Option}\fi 163\ifx\putwordDeffunc\undefined \gdef\putwordDeffunc{Function}\fi 164 165% Give the space character the catcode for a space. 166\def\spaceisspace{\catcode`\ =10\relax} 167 168% Likewise for ^^M, the end of line character. 169\def\endlineisspace{\catcode13=10\relax} 170 171\chardef\dashChar = `\- 172\chardef\slashChar = `\/ 173\chardef\underChar = `\_ 174 175% Ignore a token. 176% 177\def\gobble#1{} 178 179% The following is used inside several \edef's. 180\def\makecsname#1{\expandafter\noexpand\csname#1\endcsname} 181 182% Hyphenation fixes. 183\hyphenation{ 184 Flor-i-da Ghost-script Ghost-view Mac-OS Post-Script 185 auto-ma-ti-cal-ly ap-pen-dix bit-map bit-maps 186 data-base data-bases eshell fall-ing half-way long-est man-u-script 187 man-u-scripts mini-buf-fer mini-buf-fers over-view par-a-digm 188 par-a-digms rath-er rec-tan-gu-lar ro-bot-ics se-vere-ly set-up spa-ces 189 spell-ing spell-ings 190 stand-alone strong-est time-stamp time-stamps which-ever white-space 191 wide-spread wrap-around 192} 193 194% Sometimes it is convenient to have everything in the transcript file 195% and nothing on the terminal. We don't just call \tracingall here, 196% since that produces some useless output on the terminal. We also make 197% some effort to order the tracing commands to reduce output in the log 198% file; cf. trace.sty in LaTeX. 199% 200\def\gloggingall{\begingroup \globaldefs = 1 \loggingall \endgroup}% 201\def\loggingall{% 202 \tracingstats2 203 \tracingpages1 204 \tracinglostchars2 % 2 gives us more in etex 205 \tracingparagraphs1 206 \tracingoutput1 207 \tracingmacros2 208 \tracingrestores1 209 \showboxbreadth\maxdimen \showboxdepth\maxdimen 210 \ifx\eTeXversion\thisisundefined\else % etex gives us more logging 211 \tracingscantokens1 212 \tracingifs1 213 \tracinggroups1 214 \tracingnesting2 215 \tracingassigns1 216 \fi 217 \tracingcommands3 % 3 gives us more in etex 218 \errorcontextlines16 219}% 220 221% @errormsg{MSG}. Do the index-like expansions on MSG, but if things 222% aren't perfect, it's not the end of the world, being an error message, 223% after all. 224% 225\def\errormsg{\begingroup \indexnofonts \doerrormsg} 226\def\doerrormsg#1{\errmessage{#1}} 227 228% add check for \lastpenalty to plain's definitions. If the last thing 229% we did was a \nobreak, we don't want to insert more space. 230% 231\def\smallbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\smallskipamount 232 \removelastskip\penalty-50\smallskip\fi\fi} 233\def\medbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\medskipamount 234 \removelastskip\penalty-100\medskip\fi\fi} 235\def\bigbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\bigskipamount 236 \removelastskip\penalty-200\bigskip\fi\fi} 237 238% Output routine 239% 240 241% For a final copy, take out the rectangles 242% that mark overfull boxes (in case you have decided 243% that the text looks ok even though it passes the margin). 244% 245\def\finalout{\overfullrule=0pt } 246 247% Do @cropmarks to get crop marks. 248% 249\newif\ifcropmarks 250\let\cropmarks = \cropmarkstrue 251% 252% Dimensions to add cropmarks at corners. 253% Added by P. A. MacKay, 12 Nov. 1986 254% 255\newdimen\outerhsize \newdimen\outervsize % set by the paper size routines 256\newdimen\cornerlong \cornerlong=1pc 257\newdimen\cornerthick \cornerthick=.3pt 258\newdimen\topandbottommargin \topandbottommargin=.75in 259 260% Output a mark which sets \thischapter, \thissection and \thiscolor. 261% We dump everything together because we only have one kind of mark. 262% This works because we only use \botmark / \topmark, not \firstmark. 263% 264% A mark contains a subexpression of the \ifcase ... \fi construct. 265% \get*marks macros below extract the needed part using \ifcase. 266% 267% Another complication is to let the user choose whether \thischapter 268% (\thissection) refers to the chapter (section) in effect at the top 269% of a page, or that at the bottom of a page. 270 271% \domark is called twice inside \chapmacro, to add one 272% mark before the section break, and one after. 273% In the second call \prevchapterdefs is the same as \lastchapterdefs, 274% and \prevsectiondefs is the same as \lastsectiondefs. 275% Then if the page is not broken at the mark, some of the previous 276% section appears on the page, and we can get the name of this section 277% from \firstmark for @everyheadingmarks top. 278% @everyheadingmarks bottom uses \botmark. 279% 280% See page 260 of The TeXbook. 281\def\domark{% 282 \toks0=\expandafter{\lastchapterdefs}% 283 \toks2=\expandafter{\lastsectiondefs}% 284 \toks4=\expandafter{\prevchapterdefs}% 285 \toks6=\expandafter{\prevsectiondefs}% 286 \toks8=\expandafter{\lastcolordefs}% 287 \mark{% 288 \the\toks0 \the\toks2 % 0: marks for @everyheadingmarks top 289 \noexpand\or \the\toks4 \the\toks6 % 1: for @everyheadingmarks bottom 290 \noexpand\else \the\toks8 % 2: color marks 291 }% 292} 293 294% \gettopheadingmarks, \getbottomheadingmarks, 295% \getcolormarks - extract needed part of mark. 296% 297% \topmark doesn't work for the very first chapter (after the title 298% page or the contents), so we use \firstmark there -- this gets us 299% the mark with the chapter defs, unless the user sneaks in, e.g., 300% @setcolor (or @url, or @link, etc.) between @contents and the very 301% first @chapter. 302\def\gettopheadingmarks{% 303 \ifcase0\topmark\fi 304 \ifx\thischapter\empty \ifcase0\firstmark\fi \fi 305} 306\def\getbottomheadingmarks{\ifcase1\botmark\fi} 307\def\getcolormarks{\ifcase2\topmark\fi} 308 309% Avoid "undefined control sequence" errors. 310\def\lastchapterdefs{} 311\def\lastsectiondefs{} 312\def\lastsection{} 313\def\prevchapterdefs{} 314\def\prevsectiondefs{} 315\def\lastcolordefs{} 316 317% Margin to add to right of even pages, to left of odd pages. 318\newdimen\bindingoffset 319\newdimen\normaloffset 320\newdimen\txipagewidth \newdimen\txipageheight 321 322% Main output routine. 323% 324\chardef\PAGE = 255 325\output = {\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}} 326 327\newbox\headlinebox 328\newbox\footlinebox 329 330% \onepageout takes a vbox as an argument. 331% \shipout a vbox for a single page, adding an optional header, footer, 332% cropmarks, and footnote. This also causes index entries for this page 333% to be written to the auxiliary files. 334% 335\def\onepageout#1{% 336 \ifcropmarks \hoffset=0pt \else \hoffset=\normaloffset \fi 337 % 338 \ifodd\pageno \advance\hoffset by \bindingoffset 339 \else \advance\hoffset by -\bindingoffset\fi 340 % 341 % Common context changes for both heading and footing. 342 % Do this outside of the \shipout so @code etc. will be expanded in 343 % the headline as they should be, not taken literally (outputting ''code). 344 \def\commmonheadfootline{\let\hsize=\txipagewidth \texinfochars} 345 % 346 % Retrieve the information for the headings from the marks in the page, 347 % and call Plain TeX's \makeheadline and \makefootline, which use the 348 % values in \headline and \footline. 349 % 350 % This is used to check if we are on the first page of a chapter. 351 \ifcase1\topmark\fi 352 \let\prevchaptername\thischaptername 353 \ifcase0\firstmark\fi 354 \let\curchaptername\thischaptername 355 % 356 \ifodd\pageno \getoddheadingmarks \else \getevenheadingmarks \fi 357 \ifodd\pageno \getoddfootingmarks \else \getevenfootingmarks \fi 358 % 359 \ifx\curchaptername\prevchaptername 360 \let\thischapterheading\thischapter 361 \else 362 % \thischapterheading is the same as \thischapter except it is blank 363 % for the first page of a chapter. This is to prevent the chapter name 364 % being shown twice. 365 \def\thischapterheading{}% 366 \fi 367 % 368 \global\setbox\headlinebox = \vbox{\commmonheadfootline \makeheadline}% 369 \global\setbox\footlinebox = \vbox{\commmonheadfootline \makefootline}% 370 % 371 {% 372 % Set context for writing to auxiliary files like index files. 373 % Have to do this stuff outside the \shipout because we want it to 374 % take effect in \write's, yet the group defined by the \vbox ends 375 % before the \shipout runs. 376 % 377 \indexdummies % don't expand commands in the output. 378 \normalturnoffactive % \ in index entries must not stay \, e.g., if 379 % the page break happens to be in the middle of an example. 380 % We don't want .vr (or whatever) entries like this: 381 % \entry{{\indexbackslash }acronym}{32}{\code {\acronym}} 382 % "\acronym" won't work when it's read back in; 383 % it needs to be 384 % {\code {{\backslashcurfont }acronym} 385 \shipout\vbox{% 386 % Do this early so pdf references go to the beginning of the page. 387 \ifpdfmakepagedest \pdfdest name{\the\pageno} xyz\fi 388 % 389 \ifcropmarks \vbox to \outervsize\bgroup 390 \hsize = \outerhsize 391 \vskip-\topandbottommargin 392 \vtop to0pt{% 393 \line{\ewtop\hfil\ewtop}% 394 \nointerlineskip 395 \line{% 396 \vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nstop}% 397 \hfill 398 \vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nstop}% 399 }% 400 \vss}% 401 \vskip\topandbottommargin 402 \line\bgroup 403 \hfil % center the page within the outer (page) hsize. 404 \ifodd\pageno\hskip\bindingoffset\fi 405 \vbox\bgroup 406 \fi 407 % 408 \unvbox\headlinebox 409 \pagebody{#1}% 410 \ifdim\ht\footlinebox > 0pt 411 % Only leave this space if the footline is nonempty. 412 % (We lessened \vsize for it in \oddfootingyyy.) 413 % The \baselineskip=24pt in plain's \makefootline has no effect. 414 \vskip 24pt 415 \unvbox\footlinebox 416 \fi 417 % 418 \ifcropmarks 419 \egroup % end of \vbox\bgroup 420 \hfil\egroup % end of (centering) \line\bgroup 421 \vskip\topandbottommargin plus1fill minus1fill 422 \boxmaxdepth = \cornerthick 423 \vbox to0pt{\vss 424 \line{% 425 \vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nsbot}% 426 \hfill 427 \vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nsbot}% 428 }% 429 \nointerlineskip 430 \line{\ewbot\hfil\ewbot}% 431 }% 432 \egroup % \vbox from first cropmarks clause 433 \fi 434 }% end of \shipout\vbox 435 }% end of group with \indexdummies 436 \advancepageno 437 \ifnum\outputpenalty>-20000 \else\dosupereject\fi 438} 439 440\newinsert\margin \dimen\margin=\maxdimen 441 442% Main part of page, including any footnotes 443\def\pagebody#1{\vbox to\txipageheight{\boxmaxdepth=\maxdepth #1}} 444{\catcode`\@ =11 445\gdef\pagecontents#1{\ifvoid\topins\else\unvbox\topins\fi 446% marginal hacks, juha@viisa.uucp (Juha Takala) 447\ifvoid\margin\else % marginal info is present 448 \rlap{\kern\hsize\vbox to\z@{\kern1pt\box\margin \vss}}\fi 449\dimen@=\dp#1\relax \unvbox#1\relax 450\ifvoid\footins\else\vskip\skip\footins\footnoterule \unvbox\footins\fi 451\ifr@ggedbottom \kern-\dimen@ \vfil \fi} 452} 453 454% Here are the rules for the cropmarks. Note that they are 455% offset so that the space between them is truly \outerhsize or \outervsize 456% (P. A. MacKay, 12 November, 1986) 457% 458\def\ewtop{\vrule height\cornerthick depth0pt width\cornerlong} 459\def\nstop{\vbox 460 {\hrule height\cornerthick depth\cornerlong width\cornerthick}} 461\def\ewbot{\vrule height0pt depth\cornerthick width\cornerlong} 462\def\nsbot{\vbox 463 {\hrule height\cornerlong depth\cornerthick width\cornerthick}} 464 465 466% Argument parsing 467 468% Parse an argument, then pass it to #1. The argument is the rest of 469% the input line (except we remove a trailing comment). #1 should be a 470% macro which expects an ordinary undelimited TeX argument. 471% For example, \def\foo{\parsearg\fooxxx}. 472% 473\def\parsearg{\parseargusing{}} 474\def\parseargusing#1#2{% 475 \def\argtorun{#2}% 476 \begingroup 477 \obeylines 478 \spaceisspace 479 #1% 480 \parseargline\empty% Insert the \empty token, see \finishparsearg below. 481} 482 483{\obeylines % 484 \gdef\parseargline#1^^M{% 485 \endgroup % End of the group started in \parsearg. 486 \argremovecomment #1\comment\ArgTerm% 487 }% 488} 489 490% First remove any @comment, then any @c comment. Also remove a @texinfoc 491% comment (see \scanmacro for details). Pass the result on to \argcheckspaces. 492\def\argremovecomment#1\comment#2\ArgTerm{\argremovec #1\c\ArgTerm} 493\def\argremovec#1\c#2\ArgTerm{\argremovetexinfoc #1\texinfoc\ArgTerm} 494\def\argremovetexinfoc#1\texinfoc#2\ArgTerm{\argcheckspaces#1\^^M\ArgTerm} 495 496% Each occurrence of `\^^M' or `<space>\^^M' is replaced by a single space. 497% 498% \argremovec might leave us with trailing space, e.g., 499% @end itemize @c foo 500% This space token undergoes the same procedure and is eventually removed 501% by \finishparsearg. 502% 503\def\argcheckspaces#1\^^M{\argcheckspacesX#1\^^M \^^M} 504\def\argcheckspacesX#1 \^^M{\argcheckspacesY#1\^^M} 505\def\argcheckspacesY#1\^^M#2\^^M#3\ArgTerm{% 506 \def\temp{#3}% 507 \ifx\temp\empty 508 % Do not use \next, perhaps the caller of \parsearg uses it; reuse \temp: 509 \let\temp\finishparsearg 510 \else 511 \let\temp\argcheckspaces 512 \fi 513 % Put the space token in: 514 \temp#1 #3\ArgTerm 515} 516 517% If a _delimited_ argument is enclosed in braces, they get stripped; so 518% to get _exactly_ the rest of the line, we had to prevent such situation. 519% We prepended an \empty token at the very beginning and we expand it now, 520% just before passing the control to \argtorun. 521% (Similarly, we have to think about #3 of \argcheckspacesY above: it is 522% either the null string, or it ends with \^^M---thus there is no danger 523% that a pair of braces would be stripped. 524% 525% But first, we have to remove the trailing space token. 526% 527\def\finishparsearg#1 \ArgTerm{\expandafter\argtorun\expandafter{#1}} 528 529 530% \parseargdef - define a command taking an argument on the line 531% 532% \parseargdef\foo{...} 533% is roughly equivalent to 534% \def\foo{\parsearg\Xfoo} 535% \def\Xfoo#1{...} 536\def\parseargdef#1{% 537 \expandafter \doparseargdef \csname\string#1\endcsname #1% 538} 539\def\doparseargdef#1#2{% 540 \def#2{\parsearg#1}% 541 \def#1##1% 542} 543 544% Several utility definitions with active space: 545{ 546 \obeyspaces 547 \gdef\obeyedspace{ } 548 549 % Make each space character in the input produce a normal interword 550 % space in the output. Don't allow a line break at this space, as this 551 % is used only in environments like @example, where each line of input 552 % should produce a line of output anyway. 553 % 554 \gdef\sepspaces{\obeyspaces\let =\tie} 555 556 % If an index command is used in an @example environment, any spaces 557 % therein should become regular spaces in the raw index file, not the 558 % expansion of \tie (\leavevmode \penalty \@M \ ). 559 \gdef\unsepspaces{\let =\space} 560} 561 562 563\def\flushcr{\ifx\par\lisppar \def\next##1{}\else \let\next=\relax \fi \next} 564 565% Define the framework for environments in texinfo.tex. It's used like this: 566% 567% \envdef\foo{...} 568% \def\Efoo{...} 569% 570% It's the responsibility of \envdef to insert \begingroup before the 571% actual body; @end closes the group after calling \Efoo. \envdef also 572% defines \thisenv, so the current environment is known; @end checks 573% whether the environment name matches. The \checkenv macro can also be 574% used to check whether the current environment is the one expected. 575% 576% Non-false conditionals (@iftex, @ifset) don't fit into this, so they 577% are not treated as environments; they don't open a group. (The 578% implementation of @end takes care not to call \endgroup in this 579% special case.) 580 581 582% At run-time, environments start with this: 583\def\startenvironment#1{\begingroup\def\thisenv{#1}} 584% initialize 585\let\thisenv\empty 586 587% ... but they get defined via ``\envdef\foo{...}'': 588\long\def\envdef#1#2{\def#1{\startenvironment#1#2}} 589\def\envparseargdef#1#2{\parseargdef#1{\startenvironment#1#2}} 590 591% Check whether we're in the right environment: 592\def\checkenv#1{% 593 \def\temp{#1}% 594 \ifx\thisenv\temp 595 \else 596 \badenverr 597 \fi 598} 599 600% Environment mismatch, #1 expected: 601\def\badenverr{% 602 \errhelp = \EMsimple 603 \errmessage{This command can appear only \inenvironment\temp, 604 not \inenvironment\thisenv}% 605} 606\def\inenvironment#1{% 607 \ifx#1\empty 608 outside of any environment% 609 \else 610 in environment \expandafter\string#1% 611 \fi 612} 613 614% @end foo executes the definition of \Efoo. 615% But first, it executes a specialized version of \checkenv 616% 617\parseargdef\end{% 618 \if 1\csname iscond.#1\endcsname 619 \else 620 % The general wording of \badenverr may not be ideal. 621 \expandafter\checkenv\csname#1\endcsname 622 \csname E#1\endcsname 623 \endgroup 624 \fi 625} 626 627\newhelp\EMsimple{Press RETURN to continue.} 628 629 630% Be sure we're in horizontal mode when doing a tie, since we make space 631% equivalent to this in @example-like environments. Otherwise, a space 632% at the beginning of a line will start with \penalty -- and 633% since \penalty is valid in vertical mode, we'd end up putting the 634% penalty on the vertical list instead of in the new paragraph. 635{\catcode`@ = 11 636 % Avoid using \@M directly, because that causes trouble 637 % if the definition is written into an index file. 638 \global\let\tiepenalty = \@M 639 \gdef\tie{\leavevmode\penalty\tiepenalty\ } 640} 641 642% @: forces normal size whitespace following. 643\def\:{\spacefactor=1000 } 644 645% @* forces a line break. 646\def\*{\unskip\hfil\break\hbox{}\ignorespaces} 647 648% @/ allows a line break. 649\let\/=\allowbreak 650 651% @. is an end-of-sentence period. 652\def\.{.\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space} 653 654% @! is an end-of-sentence bang. 655\def\!{!\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space} 656 657% @? is an end-of-sentence query. 658\def\?{?\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space} 659 660% @frenchspacing on|off says whether to put extra space after punctuation. 661% 662\def\onword{on} 663\def\offword{off} 664% 665\parseargdef\frenchspacing{% 666 \def\temp{#1}% 667 \ifx\temp\onword \plainfrenchspacing 668 \else\ifx\temp\offword \plainnonfrenchspacing 669 \else 670 \errhelp = \EMsimple 671 \errmessage{Unknown @frenchspacing option `\temp', must be on|off}% 672 \fi\fi 673} 674 675% @w prevents a word break. Without the \leavevmode, @w at the 676% beginning of a paragraph, when TeX is still in vertical mode, would 677% produce a whole line of output instead of starting the paragraph. 678\def\w#1{\leavevmode\hbox{#1}} 679 680% @group ... @end group forces ... to be all on one page, by enclosing 681% it in a TeX vbox. We use \vtop instead of \vbox to construct the box 682% to keep its height that of a normal line. According to the rules for 683% \topskip (p.114 of the TeXbook), the glue inserted is 684% max (\topskip - \ht (first item), 0). If that height is large, 685% therefore, no glue is inserted, and the space between the headline and 686% the text is small, which looks bad. 687% 688% Another complication is that the group might be very large. This can 689% cause the glue on the previous page to be unduly stretched, because it 690% does not have much material. In this case, it's better to add an 691% explicit \vfill so that the extra space is at the bottom. The 692% threshold for doing this is if the group is more than \vfilllimit 693% percent of a page (\vfilllimit can be changed inside of @tex). 694% 695\newbox\groupbox 696\def\vfilllimit{0.7} 697% 698\envdef\group{% 699 \ifnum\catcode`\^^M=\active \else 700 \errhelp = \groupinvalidhelp 701 \errmessage{@group invalid in context where filling is enabled}% 702 \fi 703 \startsavinginserts 704 % 705 \setbox\groupbox = \vtop\bgroup 706 % Do @comment since we are called inside an environment such as 707 % @example, where each end-of-line in the input causes an 708 % end-of-line in the output. We don't want the end-of-line after 709 % the `@group' to put extra space in the output. Since @group 710 % should appear on a line by itself (according to the Texinfo 711 % manual), we don't worry about eating any user text. 712 \comment 713} 714% 715% The \vtop produces a box with normal height and large depth; thus, TeX puts 716% \baselineskip glue before it, and (when the next line of text is done) 717% \lineskip glue after it. Thus, space below is not quite equal to space 718% above. But it's pretty close. 719\def\Egroup{% 720 % To get correct interline space between the last line of the group 721 % and the first line afterwards, we have to propagate \prevdepth. 722 \endgraf % Not \par, as it may have been set to \lisppar. 723 \global\dimen1 = \prevdepth 724 \egroup % End the \vtop. 725 \addgroupbox 726 \prevdepth = \dimen1 727 \checkinserts 728} 729 730\def\addgroupbox{ 731 % \dimen0 is the vertical size of the group's box. 732 \dimen0 = \ht\groupbox \advance\dimen0 by \dp\groupbox 733 % \dimen2 is how much space is left on the page (more or less). 734 \dimen2 = \txipageheight \advance\dimen2 by -\pagetotal 735 % if the group doesn't fit on the current page, and it's a big big 736 % group, force a page break. 737 \ifdim \dimen0 > \dimen2 738 \ifdim \pagetotal < \vfilllimit\txipageheight 739 \page 740 \fi 741 \fi 742 \box\groupbox 743} 744 745% 746% TeX puts in an \escapechar (i.e., `@') at the beginning of the help 747% message, so this ends up printing `@group can only ...'. 748% 749\newhelp\groupinvalidhelp{% 750group can only be used in environments such as @example,^^J% 751where each line of input produces a line of output.} 752 753% @need space-in-mils 754% forces a page break if there is not space-in-mils remaining. 755 756\newdimen\mil \mil=0.001in 757 758\parseargdef\need{% 759 % Ensure vertical mode, so we don't make a big box in the middle of a 760 % paragraph. 761 \par 762 % 763 % If the @need value is less than one line space, it's useless. 764 \dimen0 = #1\mil 765 \dimen2 = \ht\strutbox 766 \advance\dimen2 by \dp\strutbox 767 \ifdim\dimen0 > \dimen2 768 % 769 % Do a \strut just to make the height of this box be normal, so the 770 % normal leading is inserted relative to the preceding line. 771 % And a page break here is fine. 772 \vtop to #1\mil{\strut\vfil}% 773 % 774 % TeX does not even consider page breaks if a penalty added to the 775 % main vertical list is 10000 or more. But in order to see if the 776 % empty box we just added fits on the page, we must make it consider 777 % page breaks. On the other hand, we don't want to actually break the 778 % page after the empty box. So we use a penalty of 9999. 779 % 780 % There is an extremely small chance that TeX will actually break the 781 % page at this \penalty, if there are no other feasible breakpoints in 782 % sight. (If the user is using lots of big @group commands, which 783 % almost-but-not-quite fill up a page, TeX will have a hard time doing 784 % good page breaking, for example.) However, I could not construct an 785 % example where a page broke at this \penalty; if it happens in a real 786 % document, then we can reconsider our strategy. 787 \penalty9999 788 % 789 % Back up by the size of the box, whether we did a page break or not. 790 \kern -#1\mil 791 % 792 % Do not allow a page break right after this kern. 793 \nobreak 794 \fi 795} 796 797% @br forces paragraph break (and is undocumented). 798 799\let\br = \par 800 801% @page forces the start of a new page. 802% 803\def\page{\par\vfill\supereject} 804 805% @exdent text.... 806% outputs text on separate line in roman font, starting at standard page margin 807 808% This records the amount of indent in the innermost environment. 809% That's how much \exdent should take out. 810\newskip\exdentamount 811 812% This defn is used inside fill environments such as @defun. 813\parseargdef\exdent{\hfil\break\hbox{\kern -\exdentamount{\rm#1}}\hfil\break} 814 815% This defn is used inside nofill environments such as @example. 816\parseargdef\nofillexdent{{\advance \leftskip by -\exdentamount 817 \leftline{\hskip\leftskip{\rm#1}}}} 818 819% @inmargin{WHICH}{TEXT} puts TEXT in the WHICH margin next to the current 820% paragraph. For more general purposes, use the \margin insertion 821% class. WHICH is `l' or `r'. Not documented, written for gawk manual. 822% 823\newskip\inmarginspacing \inmarginspacing=1cm 824\def\strutdepth{\dp\strutbox} 825% 826\def\doinmargin#1#2{\strut\vadjust{% 827 \nobreak 828 \kern-\strutdepth 829 \vtop to \strutdepth{% 830 \baselineskip=\strutdepth 831 \vss 832 % if you have multiple lines of stuff to put here, you'll need to 833 % make the vbox yourself of the appropriate size. 834 \ifx#1l% 835 \llap{\ignorespaces #2\hskip\inmarginspacing}% 836 \else 837 \rlap{\hskip\hsize \hskip\inmarginspacing \ignorespaces #2}% 838 \fi 839 \null 840 }% 841}} 842\def\inleftmargin{\doinmargin l} 843\def\inrightmargin{\doinmargin r} 844% 845% @inmargin{TEXT [, RIGHT-TEXT]} 846% (if RIGHT-TEXT is given, use TEXT for left page, RIGHT-TEXT for right; 847% else use TEXT for both). 848% 849\def\inmargin#1{\parseinmargin #1,,\finish} 850\def\parseinmargin#1,#2,#3\finish{% not perfect, but better than nothing. 851 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% 852 \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt 853 \def\lefttext{#1}% have both texts 854 \def\righttext{#2}% 855 \else 856 \def\lefttext{#1}% have only one text 857 \def\righttext{#1}% 858 \fi 859 % 860 \ifodd\pageno 861 \def\temp{\inrightmargin\righttext}% odd page -> outside is right margin 862 \else 863 \def\temp{\inleftmargin\lefttext}% 864 \fi 865 \temp 866} 867 868% @include FILE -- \input text of FILE. 869% 870\def\include{\parseargusing\filenamecatcodes\includezzz} 871\def\includezzz#1{% 872 \pushthisfilestack 873 \def\thisfile{#1}% 874 {% 875 \makevalueexpandable % we want to expand any @value in FILE. 876 \turnoffactive % and allow special characters in the expansion 877 \indexnofonts % Allow `@@' and other weird things in file names. 878 \wlog{texinfo.tex: doing @include of #1^^J}% 879 \edef\temp{\noexpand\input #1 }% 880 % 881 % This trickery is to read FILE outside of a group, in case it makes 882 % definitions, etc. 883 \expandafter 884 }\temp 885 \popthisfilestack 886} 887\def\filenamecatcodes{% 888 \catcode`\\=\other 889 \catcode`~=\other 890 \catcode`^=\other 891 \catcode`_=\other 892 \catcode`|=\other 893 \catcode`<=\other 894 \catcode`>=\other 895 \catcode`+=\other 896 \catcode`-=\other 897 \catcode`\`=\other 898 \catcode`\'=\other 899} 900 901\def\pushthisfilestack{% 902 \expandafter\pushthisfilestackX\popthisfilestack\StackTerm 903} 904\def\pushthisfilestackX{% 905 \expandafter\pushthisfilestackY\thisfile\StackTerm 906} 907\def\pushthisfilestackY #1\StackTerm #2\StackTerm {% 908 \gdef\popthisfilestack{\gdef\thisfile{#1}\gdef\popthisfilestack{#2}}% 909} 910 911\def\popthisfilestack{\errthisfilestackempty} 912\def\errthisfilestackempty{\errmessage{Internal error: 913 the stack of filenames is empty.}} 914% 915\def\thisfile{} 916 917% @center line 918% outputs that line, centered. 919% 920\parseargdef\center{% 921 \ifhmode 922 \let\centersub\centerH 923 \else 924 \let\centersub\centerV 925 \fi 926 \centersub{\hfil \ignorespaces#1\unskip \hfil}% 927 \let\centersub\relax % don't let the definition persist, just in case 928} 929\def\centerH#1{{% 930 \hfil\break 931 \advance\hsize by -\leftskip 932 \advance\hsize by -\rightskip 933 \line{#1}% 934 \break 935}} 936% 937\newcount\centerpenalty 938\def\centerV#1{% 939 % The idea here is the same as in \startdefun, \cartouche, etc.: if 940 % @center is the first thing after a section heading, we need to wipe 941 % out the negative parskip inserted by \sectionheading, but still 942 % prevent a page break here. 943 \centerpenalty = \lastpenalty 944 \ifnum\centerpenalty>10000 \vskip\parskip \fi 945 \ifnum\centerpenalty>9999 \penalty\centerpenalty \fi 946 \line{\kern\leftskip #1\kern\rightskip}% 947} 948 949% @sp n outputs n lines of vertical space 950% 951\parseargdef\sp{\vskip #1\baselineskip} 952 953% @comment ...line which is ignored... 954% @c is the same as @comment 955% @ignore ... @end ignore is another way to write a comment 956 957 958\def\c{\begingroup \catcode`\^^M=\active% 959\catcode`\@=\other \catcode`\{=\other \catcode`\}=\other% 960\cxxx} 961{\catcode`\^^M=\active \gdef\cxxx#1^^M{\endgroup}} 962% 963\let\comment\c 964 965% @paragraphindent NCHARS 966% We'll use ems for NCHARS, close enough. 967% NCHARS can also be the word `asis' or `none'. 968% We cannot feasibly implement @paragraphindent asis, though. 969% 970\def\asisword{asis} % no translation, these are keywords 971\def\noneword{none} 972% 973\parseargdef\paragraphindent{% 974 \def\temp{#1}% 975 \ifx\temp\asisword 976 \else 977 \ifx\temp\noneword 978 \defaultparindent = 0pt 979 \else 980 \defaultparindent = #1em 981 \fi 982 \fi 983 \parindent = \defaultparindent 984} 985 986% @exampleindent NCHARS 987% We'll use ems for NCHARS like @paragraphindent. 988% It seems @exampleindent asis isn't necessary, but 989% I preserve it to make it similar to @paragraphindent. 990\parseargdef\exampleindent{% 991 \def\temp{#1}% 992 \ifx\temp\asisword 993 \else 994 \ifx\temp\noneword 995 \lispnarrowing = 0pt 996 \else 997 \lispnarrowing = #1em 998 \fi 999 \fi 1000} 1001 1002% @firstparagraphindent WORD 1003% If WORD is `none', then suppress indentation of the first paragraph 1004% after a section heading. If WORD is `insert', then do indent at such 1005% paragraphs. 1006% 1007% The paragraph indentation is suppressed or not by calling 1008% \suppressfirstparagraphindent, which the sectioning commands do. 1009% We switch the definition of this back and forth according to WORD. 1010% By default, we suppress indentation. 1011% 1012\def\suppressfirstparagraphindent{\dosuppressfirstparagraphindent} 1013\def\insertword{insert} 1014% 1015\parseargdef\firstparagraphindent{% 1016 \def\temp{#1}% 1017 \ifx\temp\noneword 1018 \let\suppressfirstparagraphindent = \dosuppressfirstparagraphindent 1019 \else\ifx\temp\insertword 1020 \let\suppressfirstparagraphindent = \relax 1021 \else 1022 \errhelp = \EMsimple 1023 \errmessage{Unknown @firstparagraphindent option `\temp'}% 1024 \fi\fi 1025} 1026 1027% Here is how we actually suppress indentation. Redefine \everypar to 1028% \kern backwards by \parindent, and then reset itself to empty. 1029% 1030% We also make \indent itself not actually do anything until the next 1031% paragraph. 1032% 1033\gdef\dosuppressfirstparagraphindent{% 1034 \gdef\indent {\restorefirstparagraphindent \indent}% 1035 \gdef\noindent{\restorefirstparagraphindent \noindent}% 1036 \global\everypar = {\kern -\parindent \restorefirstparagraphindent}% 1037} 1038% 1039\gdef\restorefirstparagraphindent{% 1040 \global\let\indent = \ptexindent 1041 \global\let\noindent = \ptexnoindent 1042 \global\everypar = {}% 1043} 1044 1045 1046% @refill is a no-op. 1047\let\refill=\relax 1048 1049% @setfilename INFO-FILENAME - ignored 1050\let\setfilename=\comment 1051 1052% @bye. 1053\outer\def\bye{\pagealignmacro\tracingstats=1\ptexend} 1054 1055 1056\message{pdf,} 1057% adobe `portable' document format 1058\newcount\tempnum 1059\newcount\lnkcount 1060\newtoks\filename 1061\newcount\filenamelength 1062\newcount\pgn 1063\newtoks\toksA 1064\newtoks\toksB 1065\newtoks\toksC 1066\newtoks\toksD 1067\newbox\boxA 1068\newbox\boxB 1069\newcount\countA 1070\newif\ifpdf 1071\newif\ifpdfmakepagedest 1072 1073% 1074% For LuaTeX 1075% 1076 1077\newif\iftxiuseunicodedestname 1078\txiuseunicodedestnamefalse % For pdfTeX etc. 1079 1080\ifx\luatexversion\thisisundefined 1081\else 1082 % Use Unicode destination names 1083 \txiuseunicodedestnametrue 1084 % Escape PDF strings with converting UTF-16 from UTF-8 1085 \begingroup 1086 \catcode`\%=12 1087 \directlua{ 1088 function UTF16oct(str) 1089 tex.sprint(string.char(0x5c) .. '376' .. string.char(0x5c) .. '377') 1090 for c in string.utfvalues(str) do 1091 if c < 0x10000 then 1092 tex.sprint( 1093 string.format(string.char(0x5c) .. string.char(0x25) .. '03o' .. 1094 string.char(0x5c) .. string.char(0x25) .. '03o', 1095 (c / 256), (c % 256))) 1096 else 1097 c = c - 0x10000 1098 local c_hi = c / 1024 + 0xd800 1099 local c_lo = c % 1024 + 0xdc00 1100 tex.sprint( 1101 string.format(string.char(0x5c) .. string.char(0x25) .. '03o' .. 1102 string.char(0x5c) .. string.char(0x25) .. '03o' .. 1103 string.char(0x5c) .. string.char(0x25) .. '03o' .. 1104 string.char(0x5c) .. string.char(0x25) .. '03o', 1105 (c_hi / 256), (c_hi % 256), 1106 (c_lo / 256), (c_lo % 256))) 1107 end 1108 end 1109 end 1110 } 1111 \endgroup 1112 \def\pdfescapestrutfsixteen#1{\directlua{UTF16oct('\luaescapestring{#1}')}} 1113 % Escape PDF strings without converting 1114 \begingroup 1115 \directlua{ 1116 function PDFescstr(str) 1117 for c in string.bytes(str) do 1118 if c <= 0x20 or c >= 0x80 or c == 0x28 or c == 0x29 or c == 0x5c then 1119 tex.sprint( 1120 string.format(string.char(0x5c) .. string.char(0x25) .. '03o', 1121 c)) 1122 else 1123 tex.sprint(string.char(c)) 1124 end 1125 end 1126 end 1127 } 1128 \endgroup 1129 \def\pdfescapestring#1{\directlua{PDFescstr('\luaescapestring{#1}')}} 1130 \ifnum\luatexversion>84 1131 % For LuaTeX >= 0.85 1132 \def\pdfdest{\pdfextension dest} 1133 \let\pdfoutput\outputmode 1134 \def\pdfliteral{\pdfextension literal} 1135 \def\pdfcatalog{\pdfextension catalog} 1136 \def\pdftexversion{\numexpr\pdffeedback version\relax} 1137 \let\pdfximage\saveimageresource 1138 \let\pdfrefximage\useimageresource 1139 \let\pdflastximage\lastsavedimageresourceindex 1140 \def\pdfendlink{\pdfextension endlink\relax} 1141 \def\pdfoutline{\pdfextension outline} 1142 \def\pdfstartlink{\pdfextension startlink} 1143 \def\pdffontattr{\pdfextension fontattr} 1144 \def\pdfobj{\pdfextension obj} 1145 \def\pdflastobj{\numexpr\pdffeedback lastobj\relax} 1146 \let\pdfpagewidth\pagewidth 1147 \let\pdfpageheight\pageheight 1148 \edef\pdfhorigin{\pdfvariable horigin} 1149 \edef\pdfvorigin{\pdfvariable vorigin} 1150 \fi 1151\fi 1152 1153% when pdftex is run in dvi mode, \pdfoutput is defined (so \pdfoutput=1 1154% can be set). So we test for \relax and 0 as well as being undefined. 1155\ifx\pdfoutput\thisisundefined 1156\else 1157 \ifx\pdfoutput\relax 1158 \else 1159 \ifcase\pdfoutput 1160 \else 1161 \pdftrue 1162 \fi 1163 \fi 1164\fi 1165 1166% PDF uses PostScript string constants for the names of xref targets, 1167% for display in the outlines, and in other places. Thus, we have to 1168% double any backslashes. Otherwise, a name like "\node" will be 1169% interpreted as a newline (\n), followed by o, d, e. Not good. 1170% 1171% See http://www.ntg.nl/pipermail/ntg-pdftex/2004-July/000654.html and 1172% related messages. The final outcome is that it is up to the TeX user 1173% to double the backslashes and otherwise make the string valid, so 1174% that's what we do. pdftex 1.30.0 (ca.2005) introduced a primitive to 1175% do this reliably, so we use it. 1176 1177% #1 is a control sequence in which to do the replacements, 1178% which we \xdef. 1179\def\txiescapepdf#1{% 1180 \ifx\pdfescapestring\thisisundefined 1181 % No primitive available; should we give a warning or log? 1182 % Many times it won't matter. 1183 \xdef#1{#1}% 1184 \else 1185 % The expandable \pdfescapestring primitive escapes parentheses, 1186 % backslashes, and other special chars. 1187 \xdef#1{\pdfescapestring{#1}}% 1188 \fi 1189} 1190\def\txiescapepdfutfsixteen#1{% 1191 \ifx\pdfescapestrutfsixteen\thisisundefined 1192 % No UTF-16 converting macro available. 1193 \txiescapepdf{#1}% 1194 \else 1195 \xdef#1{\pdfescapestrutfsixteen{#1}}% 1196 \fi 1197} 1198 1199\newhelp\nopdfimagehelp{Texinfo supports .png, .jpg, .jpeg, and .pdf images 1200with PDF output, and none of those formats could be found. (.eps cannot 1201be supported due to the design of the PDF format; use regular TeX (DVI 1202output) for that.)} 1203 1204\ifpdf 1205 % 1206 % Color manipulation macros using ideas from pdfcolor.tex, 1207 % except using rgb instead of cmyk; the latter is said to render as a 1208 % very dark gray on-screen and a very dark halftone in print, instead 1209 % of actual black. The dark red here is dark enough to print on paper as 1210 % nearly black, but still distinguishable for online viewing. We use 1211 % black by default, though. 1212 \def\rgbDarkRed{0.50 0.09 0.12} 1213 \def\rgbBlack{0 0 0} 1214 % 1215 % rg sets the color for filling (usual text, etc.); 1216 % RG sets the color for stroking (thin rules, e.g., normal _'s). 1217 \def\pdfsetcolor#1{\pdfliteral{#1 rg #1 RG}} 1218 % 1219 % Set color, and create a mark which defines \thiscolor accordingly, 1220 % so that \makeheadline knows which color to restore. 1221 \def\setcolor#1{% 1222 \xdef\lastcolordefs{\gdef\noexpand\thiscolor{#1}}% 1223 \domark 1224 \pdfsetcolor{#1}% 1225 } 1226 % 1227 \def\maincolor{\rgbBlack} 1228 \pdfsetcolor{\maincolor} 1229 \edef\thiscolor{\maincolor} 1230 \def\lastcolordefs{} 1231 % 1232 \def\makefootline{% 1233 \baselineskip24pt 1234 \line{\pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}\the\footline}% 1235 } 1236 % 1237 \def\makeheadline{% 1238 \vbox to 0pt{% 1239 \vskip-22.5pt 1240 \line{% 1241 \vbox to8.5pt{}% 1242 % Extract \thiscolor definition from the marks. 1243 \getcolormarks 1244 % Typeset the headline with \maincolor, then restore the color. 1245 \pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}\the\headline\pdfsetcolor{\thiscolor}% 1246 }% 1247 \vss 1248 }% 1249 \nointerlineskip 1250 } 1251 % 1252 % 1253 \pdfcatalog{/PageMode /UseOutlines} 1254 % 1255 % #1 is image name, #2 width (might be empty/whitespace), #3 height (ditto). 1256 \def\dopdfimage#1#2#3{% 1257 \def\pdfimagewidth{#2}\setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% 1258 \def\pdfimageheight{#3}\setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}% 1259 % 1260 % pdftex (and the PDF format) support .pdf, .png, .jpg (among 1261 % others). Let's try in that order, PDF first since if 1262 % someone has a scalable image, presumably better to use that than a 1263 % bitmap. 1264 \let\pdfimgext=\empty 1265 \begingroup 1266 \openin 1 #1.pdf \ifeof 1 1267 \openin 1 #1.PDF \ifeof 1 1268 \openin 1 #1.png \ifeof 1 1269 \openin 1 #1.jpg \ifeof 1 1270 \openin 1 #1.jpeg \ifeof 1 1271 \openin 1 #1.JPG \ifeof 1 1272 \errhelp = \nopdfimagehelp 1273 \errmessage{Could not find image file #1 for pdf}% 1274 \else \gdef\pdfimgext{JPG}% 1275 \fi 1276 \else \gdef\pdfimgext{jpeg}% 1277 \fi 1278 \else \gdef\pdfimgext{jpg}% 1279 \fi 1280 \else \gdef\pdfimgext{png}% 1281 \fi 1282 \else \gdef\pdfimgext{PDF}% 1283 \fi 1284 \else \gdef\pdfimgext{pdf}% 1285 \fi 1286 \closein 1 1287 \endgroup 1288 % 1289 % without \immediate, ancient pdftex seg faults when the same image is 1290 % included twice. (Version 3.14159-pre-1.0-unofficial-20010704.) 1291 \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14 1292 \immediate\pdfimage 1293 \else 1294 \immediate\pdfximage 1295 \fi 1296 \ifdim \wd0 >0pt width \pdfimagewidth \fi 1297 \ifdim \wd2 >0pt height \pdfimageheight \fi 1298 \ifnum\pdftexversion<13 1299 #1.\pdfimgext 1300 \else 1301 {#1.\pdfimgext}% 1302 \fi 1303 \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14 \else 1304 \pdfrefximage \pdflastximage 1305 \fi} 1306 % 1307 \def\setpdfdestname#1{{% 1308 % We have to set dummies so commands such as @code, and characters 1309 % such as \, aren't expanded when present in a section title. 1310 \indexnofonts 1311 \makevalueexpandable 1312 \turnoffactive 1313 \iftxiuseunicodedestname 1314 \ifx \declaredencoding \latone 1315 % Pass through Latin-1 characters. 1316 % LuaTeX with byte wise I/O converts Latin-1 characters to Unicode. 1317 \else 1318 \ifx \declaredencoding \utfeight 1319 % Pass through Unicode characters. 1320 \else 1321 % Use ASCII approximations in destination names. 1322 \passthroughcharsfalse 1323 \fi 1324 \fi 1325 \else 1326 % Use ASCII approximations in destination names. 1327 \passthroughcharsfalse 1328 \fi 1329 \def\pdfdestname{#1}% 1330 \txiescapepdf\pdfdestname 1331 }} 1332 % 1333 \def\setpdfoutlinetext#1{{% 1334 \indexnofonts 1335 \makevalueexpandable 1336 \turnoffactive 1337 \ifx \declaredencoding \latone 1338 % The PDF format can use an extended form of Latin-1 in bookmark 1339 % strings. See Appendix D of the PDF Reference, Sixth Edition, for 1340 % the "PDFDocEncoding". 1341 \passthroughcharstrue 1342 % Pass through Latin-1 characters. 1343 % LuaTeX: Convert to Unicode 1344 % pdfTeX: Use Latin-1 as PDFDocEncoding 1345 \def\pdfoutlinetext{#1}% 1346 \else 1347 \ifx \declaredencoding \utfeight 1348 \ifx\luatexversion\thisisundefined 1349 % For pdfTeX with UTF-8. 1350 % TODO: the PDF format can use UTF-16 in bookmark strings, 1351 % but the code for this isn't done yet. 1352 % Use ASCII approximations. 1353 \passthroughcharsfalse 1354 \def\pdfoutlinetext{#1}% 1355 \else 1356 % For LuaTeX with UTF-8. 1357 % Pass through Unicode characters for title texts. 1358 \passthroughcharstrue 1359 \def\pdfoutlinetext{#1}% 1360 \fi 1361 \else 1362 % For non-Latin-1 or non-UTF-8 encodings. 1363 % Use ASCII approximations. 1364 \passthroughcharsfalse 1365 \def\pdfoutlinetext{#1}% 1366 \fi 1367 \fi 1368 % LuaTeX: Convert to UTF-16 1369 % pdfTeX: Use Latin-1 as PDFDocEncoding 1370 \txiescapepdfutfsixteen\pdfoutlinetext 1371 }} 1372 % 1373 \def\pdfmkdest#1{% 1374 \setpdfdestname{#1}% 1375 \safewhatsit{\pdfdest name{\pdfdestname} xyz}% 1376 } 1377 % 1378 % used to mark target names; must be expandable. 1379 \def\pdfmkpgn#1{#1} 1380 % 1381 % by default, use black for everything. 1382 \def\urlcolor{\rgbBlack} 1383 \def\linkcolor{\rgbBlack} 1384 \def\endlink{\setcolor{\maincolor}\pdfendlink} 1385 % 1386 % Adding outlines to PDF; macros for calculating structure of outlines 1387 % come from Petr Olsak 1388 \def\expnumber#1{\expandafter\ifx\csname#1\endcsname\relax 0% 1389 \else \csname#1\endcsname \fi} 1390 \def\advancenumber#1{\tempnum=\expnumber{#1}\relax 1391 \advance\tempnum by 1 1392 \expandafter\xdef\csname#1\endcsname{\the\tempnum}} 1393 % 1394 % #1 is the section text, which is what will be displayed in the 1395 % outline by the pdf viewer. #2 is the pdf expression for the number 1396 % of subentries (or empty, for subsubsections). #3 is the node text, 1397 % which might be empty if this toc entry had no corresponding node. 1398 % #4 is the page number 1399 % 1400 \def\dopdfoutline#1#2#3#4{% 1401 % Generate a link to the node text if that exists; else, use the 1402 % page number. We could generate a destination for the section 1403 % text in the case where a section has no node, but it doesn't 1404 % seem worth the trouble, since most documents are normally structured. 1405 \setpdfoutlinetext{#1} 1406 \setpdfdestname{#3} 1407 \ifx\pdfdestname\empty 1408 \def\pdfdestname{#4}% 1409 \fi 1410 % 1411 \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{\pdfdestname}}#2{\pdfoutlinetext}% 1412 } 1413 % 1414 \def\pdfmakeoutlines{% 1415 \begingroup 1416 % Read toc silently, to get counts of subentries for \pdfoutline. 1417 \def\partentry##1##2##3##4{}% ignore parts in the outlines 1418 \def\numchapentry##1##2##3##4{% 1419 \def\thischapnum{##2}% 1420 \def\thissecnum{0}% 1421 \def\thissubsecnum{0}% 1422 }% 1423 \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{% 1424 \advancenumber{chap\thischapnum}% 1425 \def\thissecnum{##2}% 1426 \def\thissubsecnum{0}% 1427 }% 1428 \def\numsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% 1429 \advancenumber{sec\thissecnum}% 1430 \def\thissubsecnum{##2}% 1431 }% 1432 \def\numsubsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% 1433 \advancenumber{subsec\thissubsecnum}% 1434 }% 1435 \def\thischapnum{0}% 1436 \def\thissecnum{0}% 1437 \def\thissubsecnum{0}% 1438 % 1439 % use \def rather than \let here because we redefine \chapentry et 1440 % al. a second time, below. 1441 \def\appentry{\numchapentry}% 1442 \def\appsecentry{\numsecentry}% 1443 \def\appsubsecentry{\numsubsecentry}% 1444 \def\appsubsubsecentry{\numsubsubsecentry}% 1445 \def\unnchapentry{\numchapentry}% 1446 \def\unnsecentry{\numsecentry}% 1447 \def\unnsubsecentry{\numsubsecentry}% 1448 \def\unnsubsubsecentry{\numsubsubsecentry}% 1449 \readdatafile{toc}% 1450 % 1451 % Read toc second time, this time actually producing the outlines. 1452 % The `-' means take the \expnumber as the absolute number of 1453 % subentries, which we calculated on our first read of the .toc above. 1454 % 1455 % We use the node names as the destinations. 1456 \def\numchapentry##1##2##3##4{% 1457 \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{chap##2}}{##3}{##4}}% 1458 \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{% 1459 \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{sec##2}}{##3}{##4}}% 1460 \def\numsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% 1461 \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{subsec##2}}{##3}{##4}}% 1462 \def\numsubsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% count is always zero 1463 \dopdfoutline{##1}{}{##3}{##4}}% 1464 % 1465 % PDF outlines are displayed using system fonts, instead of 1466 % document fonts. Therefore we cannot use special characters, 1467 % since the encoding is unknown. For example, the eogonek from 1468 % Latin 2 (0xea) gets translated to a | character. Info from 1469 % Staszek Wawrykiewicz, 19 Jan 2004 04:09:24 +0100. 1470 % 1471 % TODO this right, we have to translate 8-bit characters to 1472 % their "best" equivalent, based on the @documentencoding. Too 1473 % much work for too little return. Just use the ASCII equivalents 1474 % we use for the index sort strings. 1475 % 1476 \indexnofonts 1477 \setupdatafile 1478 % We can have normal brace characters in the PDF outlines, unlike 1479 % Texinfo index files. So set that up. 1480 \def\{{\lbracecharliteral}% 1481 \def\}{\rbracecharliteral}% 1482 \catcode`\\=\active \otherbackslash 1483 \input \tocreadfilename 1484 \endgroup 1485 } 1486 {\catcode`[=1 \catcode`]=2 1487 \catcode`{=\other \catcode`}=\other 1488 \gdef\lbracecharliteral[{]% 1489 \gdef\rbracecharliteral[}]% 1490 ] 1491 % 1492 \def\skipspaces#1{\def\PP{#1}\def\D{|}% 1493 \ifx\PP\D\let\nextsp\relax 1494 \else\let\nextsp\skipspaces 1495 \addtokens{\filename}{\PP}% 1496 \advance\filenamelength by 1 1497 \fi 1498 \nextsp} 1499 \def\getfilename#1{% 1500 \filenamelength=0 1501 % If we don't expand the argument now, \skipspaces will get 1502 % snagged on things like "@value{foo}". 1503 \edef\temp{#1}% 1504 \expandafter\skipspaces\temp|\relax 1505 } 1506 \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14 1507 \let \startlink \pdfannotlink 1508 \else 1509 \let \startlink \pdfstartlink 1510 \fi 1511 % make a live url in pdf output. 1512 \def\pdfurl#1{% 1513 \begingroup 1514 % it seems we really need yet another set of dummies; have not 1515 % tried to figure out what each command should do in the context 1516 % of @url. for now, just make @/ a no-op, that's the only one 1517 % people have actually reported a problem with. 1518 % 1519 \normalturnoffactive 1520 \def\@{@}% 1521 \let\/=\empty 1522 \makevalueexpandable 1523 % do we want to go so far as to use \indexnofonts instead of just 1524 % special-casing \var here? 1525 \def\var##1{##1}% 1526 % 1527 \leavevmode\setcolor{\urlcolor}% 1528 \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}% 1529 user{/Subtype /Link /A << /S /URI /URI (#1) >>}% 1530 \endgroup} 1531 \def\pdfgettoks#1.{\setbox\boxA=\hbox{\toksA={#1.}\toksB={}\maketoks}} 1532 \def\addtokens#1#2{\edef\addtoks{\noexpand#1={\the#1#2}}\addtoks} 1533 \def\adn#1{\addtokens{\toksC}{#1}\global\countA=1\let\next=\maketoks} 1534 \def\poptoks#1#2|ENDTOKS|{\let\first=#1\toksD={#1}\toksA={#2}} 1535 \def\maketoks{% 1536 \expandafter\poptoks\the\toksA|ENDTOKS|\relax 1537 \ifx\first0\adn0 1538 \else\ifx\first1\adn1 \else\ifx\first2\adn2 \else\ifx\first3\adn3 1539 \else\ifx\first4\adn4 \else\ifx\first5\adn5 \else\ifx\first6\adn6 1540 \else\ifx\first7\adn7 \else\ifx\first8\adn8 \else\ifx\first9\adn9 1541 \else 1542 \ifnum0=\countA\else\makelink\fi 1543 \ifx\first.\let\next=\done\else 1544 \let\next=\maketoks 1545 \addtokens{\toksB}{\the\toksD} 1546 \ifx\first,\addtokens{\toksB}{\space}\fi 1547 \fi 1548 \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi 1549 \next} 1550 \def\makelink{\addtokens{\toksB}% 1551 {\noexpand\pdflink{\the\toksC}}\toksC={}\global\countA=0} 1552 \def\pdflink#1{% 1553 \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]} goto name{\pdfmkpgn{#1}} 1554 \setcolor{\linkcolor}#1\endlink} 1555 \def\done{\edef\st{\global\noexpand\toksA={\the\toksB}}\st} 1556\else 1557 % non-pdf mode 1558 \let\pdfmkdest = \gobble 1559 \let\pdfurl = \gobble 1560 \let\endlink = \relax 1561 \let\setcolor = \gobble 1562 \let\pdfsetcolor = \gobble 1563 \let\pdfmakeoutlines = \relax 1564\fi % \ifx\pdfoutput 1565 1566% 1567% For XeTeX 1568% 1569\ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined 1570\else 1571 % 1572 % XeTeX version check 1573 % 1574 \ifnum\strcmp{\the\XeTeXversion\XeTeXrevision}{0.99996}>-1 1575 % TeX Live 2016 contains XeTeX 0.99996 and xdvipdfmx 20160307. 1576 % It can use the `dvipdfmx:config' special (from TeX Live SVN r40941). 1577 % For avoiding PDF destination name replacement, we use this special 1578 % instead of xdvipdfmx's command line option `-C 0x0010'. 1579 \special{dvipdfmx:config C 0x0010} 1580 % XeTeX 0.99995+ comes with xdvipdfmx 20160307+. 1581 % It can handle Unicode destination names for PDF. 1582 \txiuseunicodedestnametrue 1583 \else 1584 % XeTeX < 0.99996 (TeX Live < 2016) cannot use the 1585 % `dvipdfmx:config' special. 1586 % So for avoiding PDF destination name replacement, 1587 % xdvipdfmx's command line option `-C 0x0010' is necessary. 1588 % 1589 % XeTeX < 0.99995 can not handle Unicode destination names for PDF 1590 % because xdvipdfmx 20150315 has a UTF-16 conversion issue. 1591 % It is fixed by xdvipdfmx 20160106 (TeX Live SVN r39753). 1592 \txiuseunicodedestnamefalse 1593 \fi 1594 % 1595 % Color support 1596 % 1597 \def\rgbDarkRed{0.50 0.09 0.12} 1598 \def\rgbBlack{0 0 0} 1599 % 1600 \def\pdfsetcolor#1{\special{pdf:scolor [#1]}} 1601 % 1602 % Set color, and create a mark which defines \thiscolor accordingly, 1603 % so that \makeheadline knows which color to restore. 1604 \def\setcolor#1{% 1605 \xdef\lastcolordefs{\gdef\noexpand\thiscolor{#1}}% 1606 \domark 1607 \pdfsetcolor{#1}% 1608 } 1609 % 1610 \def\maincolor{\rgbBlack} 1611 \pdfsetcolor{\maincolor} 1612 \edef\thiscolor{\maincolor} 1613 \def\lastcolordefs{} 1614 % 1615 \def\makefootline{% 1616 \baselineskip24pt 1617 \line{\pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}\the\footline}% 1618 } 1619 % 1620 \def\makeheadline{% 1621 \vbox to 0pt{% 1622 \vskip-22.5pt 1623 \line{% 1624 \vbox to8.5pt{}% 1625 % Extract \thiscolor definition from the marks. 1626 \getcolormarks 1627 % Typeset the headline with \maincolor, then restore the color. 1628 \pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}\the\headline\pdfsetcolor{\thiscolor}% 1629 }% 1630 \vss 1631 }% 1632 \nointerlineskip 1633 } 1634 % 1635 % PDF outline support 1636 % 1637 % Emulate pdfTeX primitive 1638 \def\pdfdest name#1 xyz{% 1639 \special{pdf:dest (#1) [@thispage /XYZ @xpos @ypos null]}% 1640 } 1641 % 1642 \def\setpdfdestname#1{{% 1643 % We have to set dummies so commands such as @code, and characters 1644 % such as \, aren't expanded when present in a section title. 1645 \indexnofonts 1646 \makevalueexpandable 1647 \turnoffactive 1648 \iftxiuseunicodedestname 1649 % Pass through Unicode characters. 1650 \else 1651 % Use ASCII approximations in destination names. 1652 \passthroughcharsfalse 1653 \fi 1654 \def\pdfdestname{#1}% 1655 \txiescapepdf\pdfdestname 1656 }} 1657 % 1658 \def\setpdfoutlinetext#1{{% 1659 \turnoffactive 1660 % Always use Unicode characters in title texts. 1661 \def\pdfoutlinetext{#1}% 1662 % For XeTeX, xdvipdfmx converts to UTF-16. 1663 % So we do not convert. 1664 \txiescapepdf\pdfoutlinetext 1665 }} 1666 % 1667 \def\pdfmkdest#1{% 1668 \setpdfdestname{#1}% 1669 \safewhatsit{\pdfdest name{\pdfdestname} xyz}% 1670 } 1671 % 1672 % by default, use black for everything. 1673 \def\urlcolor{\rgbBlack} 1674 \def\linkcolor{\rgbBlack} 1675 \def\endlink{\setcolor{\maincolor}\pdfendlink} 1676 % 1677 \def\dopdfoutline#1#2#3#4{% 1678 \setpdfoutlinetext{#1} 1679 \setpdfdestname{#3} 1680 \ifx\pdfdestname\empty 1681 \def\pdfdestname{#4}% 1682 \fi 1683 % 1684 \special{pdf:out [-] #2 << /Title (\pdfoutlinetext) /A 1685 << /S /GoTo /D (\pdfdestname) >> >> }% 1686 } 1687 % 1688 \def\pdfmakeoutlines{% 1689 \begingroup 1690 % 1691 % For XeTeX, counts of subentries are not necessary. 1692 % Therefore, we read toc only once. 1693 % 1694 % We use node names as destinations. 1695 \def\partentry##1##2##3##4{}% ignore parts in the outlines 1696 \def\numchapentry##1##2##3##4{% 1697 \dopdfoutline{##1}{1}{##3}{##4}}% 1698 \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{% 1699 \dopdfoutline{##1}{2}{##3}{##4}}% 1700 \def\numsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% 1701 \dopdfoutline{##1}{3}{##3}{##4}}% 1702 \def\numsubsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% 1703 \dopdfoutline{##1}{4}{##3}{##4}}% 1704 % 1705 \let\appentry\numchapentry% 1706 \let\appsecentry\numsecentry% 1707 \let\appsubsecentry\numsubsecentry% 1708 \let\appsubsubsecentry\numsubsubsecentry% 1709 \let\unnchapentry\numchapentry% 1710 \let\unnsecentry\numsecentry% 1711 \let\unnsubsecentry\numsubsecentry% 1712 \let\unnsubsubsecentry\numsubsubsecentry% 1713 % 1714 % For XeTeX, xdvipdfmx converts strings to UTF-16. 1715 % Therefore, the encoding and the language may not be considered. 1716 % 1717 \indexnofonts 1718 \setupdatafile 1719 % We can have normal brace characters in the PDF outlines, unlike 1720 % Texinfo index files. So set that up. 1721 \def\{{\lbracecharliteral}% 1722 \def\}{\rbracecharliteral}% 1723 \catcode`\\=\active \otherbackslash 1724 \input \tocreadfilename 1725 \endgroup 1726 } 1727 {\catcode`[=1 \catcode`]=2 1728 \catcode`{=\other \catcode`}=\other 1729 \gdef\lbracecharliteral[{]% 1730 \gdef\rbracecharliteral[}]% 1731 ] 1732 1733 \special{pdf:docview << /PageMode /UseOutlines >> } 1734 % ``\special{pdf:tounicode ...}'' is not necessary 1735 % because xdvipdfmx converts strings from UTF-8 to UTF-16 without it. 1736 % However, due to a UTF-16 conversion issue of xdvipdfmx 20150315, 1737 % ``\special{pdf:dest ...}'' cannot handle non-ASCII strings. 1738 % It is fixed by xdvipdfmx 20160106 (TeX Live SVN r39753). 1739% 1740 \def\skipspaces#1{\def\PP{#1}\def\D{|}% 1741 \ifx\PP\D\let\nextsp\relax 1742 \else\let\nextsp\skipspaces 1743 \addtokens{\filename}{\PP}% 1744 \advance\filenamelength by 1 1745 \fi 1746 \nextsp} 1747 \def\getfilename#1{% 1748 \filenamelength=0 1749 % If we don't expand the argument now, \skipspaces will get 1750 % snagged on things like "@value{foo}". 1751 \edef\temp{#1}% 1752 \expandafter\skipspaces\temp|\relax 1753 } 1754 % make a live url in pdf output. 1755 \def\pdfurl#1{% 1756 \begingroup 1757 % it seems we really need yet another set of dummies; have not 1758 % tried to figure out what each command should do in the context 1759 % of @url. for now, just make @/ a no-op, that's the only one 1760 % people have actually reported a problem with. 1761 % 1762 \normalturnoffactive 1763 \def\@{@}% 1764 \let\/=\empty 1765 \makevalueexpandable 1766 % do we want to go so far as to use \indexnofonts instead of just 1767 % special-casing \var here? 1768 \def\var##1{##1}% 1769 % 1770 \leavevmode\setcolor{\urlcolor}% 1771 \special{pdf:bann << /Border [0 0 0] 1772 /Subtype /Link /A << /S /URI /URI (#1) >> >>}% 1773 \endgroup} 1774 \def\endlink{\setcolor{\maincolor}\special{pdf:eann}} 1775 \def\pdfgettoks#1.{\setbox\boxA=\hbox{\toksA={#1.}\toksB={}\maketoks}} 1776 \def\addtokens#1#2{\edef\addtoks{\noexpand#1={\the#1#2}}\addtoks} 1777 \def\adn#1{\addtokens{\toksC}{#1}\global\countA=1\let\next=\maketoks} 1778 \def\poptoks#1#2|ENDTOKS|{\let\first=#1\toksD={#1}\toksA={#2}} 1779 \def\maketoks{% 1780 \expandafter\poptoks\the\toksA|ENDTOKS|\relax 1781 \ifx\first0\adn0 1782 \else\ifx\first1\adn1 \else\ifx\first2\adn2 \else\ifx\first3\adn3 1783 \else\ifx\first4\adn4 \else\ifx\first5\adn5 \else\ifx\first6\adn6 1784 \else\ifx\first7\adn7 \else\ifx\first8\adn8 \else\ifx\first9\adn9 1785 \else 1786 \ifnum0=\countA\else\makelink\fi 1787 \ifx\first.\let\next=\done\else 1788 \let\next=\maketoks 1789 \addtokens{\toksB}{\the\toksD} 1790 \ifx\first,\addtokens{\toksB}{\space}\fi 1791 \fi 1792 \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi 1793 \next} 1794 \def\makelink{\addtokens{\toksB}% 1795 {\noexpand\pdflink{\the\toksC}}\toksC={}\global\countA=0} 1796 \def\pdflink#1{% 1797 \special{pdf:bann << /Border [0 0 0] 1798 /Type /Annot /Subtype /Link /A << /S /GoTo /D (#1) >> >>}% 1799 \setcolor{\linkcolor}#1\endlink} 1800 \def\done{\edef\st{\global\noexpand\toksA={\the\toksB}}\st} 1801% 1802 % 1803 % @image support 1804 % 1805 % #1 is image name, #2 width (might be empty/whitespace), #3 height (ditto). 1806 \def\doxeteximage#1#2#3{% 1807 \def\xeteximagewidth{#2}\setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% 1808 \def\xeteximageheight{#3}\setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}% 1809 % 1810 % XeTeX (and the PDF format) supports .pdf, .png, .jpg (among 1811 % others). Let's try in that order, PDF first since if 1812 % someone has a scalable image, presumably better to use that than a 1813 % bitmap. 1814 \let\xeteximgext=\empty 1815 \begingroup 1816 \openin 1 #1.pdf \ifeof 1 1817 \openin 1 #1.PDF \ifeof 1 1818 \openin 1 #1.png \ifeof 1 1819 \openin 1 #1.jpg \ifeof 1 1820 \openin 1 #1.jpeg \ifeof 1 1821 \openin 1 #1.JPG \ifeof 1 1822 \errmessage{Could not find image file #1 for XeTeX}% 1823 \else \gdef\xeteximgext{JPG}% 1824 \fi 1825 \else \gdef\xeteximgext{jpeg}% 1826 \fi 1827 \else \gdef\xeteximgext{jpg}% 1828 \fi 1829 \else \gdef\xeteximgext{png}% 1830 \fi 1831 \else \gdef\xeteximgext{PDF}% 1832 \fi 1833 \else \gdef\xeteximgext{pdf}% 1834 \fi 1835 \closein 1 1836 \endgroup 1837 % 1838 \def\xetexpdfext{pdf}% 1839 \ifx\xeteximgext\xetexpdfext 1840 \XeTeXpdffile "#1".\xeteximgext "" 1841 \else 1842 \def\xetexpdfext{PDF}% 1843 \ifx\xeteximgext\xetexpdfext 1844 \XeTeXpdffile "#1".\xeteximgext "" 1845 \else 1846 \XeTeXpicfile "#1".\xeteximgext "" 1847 \fi 1848 \fi 1849 \ifdim \wd0 >0pt width \xeteximagewidth \fi 1850 \ifdim \wd2 >0pt height \xeteximageheight \fi \relax 1851 } 1852\fi 1853 1854 1855% 1856\message{fonts,} 1857 1858% Set the baselineskip to #1, and the lineskip and strut size 1859% correspondingly. There is no deep meaning behind these magic numbers 1860% used as factors; they just match (closely enough) what Knuth defined. 1861% 1862\def\lineskipfactor{.08333} 1863\def\strutheightpercent{.70833} 1864\def\strutdepthpercent {.29167} 1865% 1866% can get a sort of poor man's double spacing by redefining this. 1867\def\baselinefactor{1} 1868% 1869\newdimen\textleading 1870\def\setleading#1{% 1871 \dimen0 = #1\relax 1872 \normalbaselineskip = \baselinefactor\dimen0 1873 \normallineskip = \lineskipfactor\normalbaselineskip 1874 \normalbaselines 1875 \setbox\strutbox =\hbox{% 1876 \vrule width0pt height\strutheightpercent\baselineskip 1877 depth \strutdepthpercent \baselineskip 1878 }% 1879} 1880 1881% PDF CMaps. See also LaTeX's t1.cmap. 1882% 1883% do nothing with this by default. 1884\expandafter\let\csname cmapOT1\endcsname\gobble 1885\expandafter\let\csname cmapOT1IT\endcsname\gobble 1886\expandafter\let\csname cmapOT1TT\endcsname\gobble 1887 1888% if we are producing pdf, and we have \pdffontattr, then define cmaps. 1889% (\pdffontattr was introduced many years ago, but people still run 1890% older pdftex's; it's easy to conditionalize, so we do.) 1891\ifpdf \ifx\pdffontattr\thisisundefined \else 1892 \begingroup 1893 \catcode`\^^M=\active \def^^M{^^J}% Output line endings as the ^^J char. 1894 \catcode`\%=12 \immediate\pdfobj stream {%!PS-Adobe-3.0 Resource-CMap 1895%%DocumentNeededResources: ProcSet (CIDInit) 1896%%IncludeResource: ProcSet (CIDInit) 1897%%BeginResource: CMap (TeX-OT1-0) 1898%%Title: (TeX-OT1-0 TeX OT1 0) 1899%%Version: 1.000 1900%%EndComments 1901/CIDInit /ProcSet findresource begin 190212 dict begin 1903begincmap 1904/CIDSystemInfo 1905<< /Registry (TeX) 1906/Ordering (OT1) 1907/Supplement 0 1908>> def 1909/CMapName /TeX-OT1-0 def 1910/CMapType 2 def 19111 begincodespacerange 1912<00> <7F> 1913endcodespacerange 19148 beginbfrange 1915<00> <01> <0393> 1916<09> <0A> <03A8> 1917<23> <26> <0023> 1918<28> <3B> <0028> 1919<3F> <5B> <003F> 1920<5D> <5E> <005D> 1921<61> <7A> <0061> 1922<7B> <7C> <2013> 1923endbfrange 192440 beginbfchar 1925<02> <0398> 1926<03> <039B> 1927<04> <039E> 1928<05> <03A0> 1929<06> <03A3> 1930<07> <03D2> 1931<08> <03A6> 1932<0B> <00660066> 1933<0C> <00660069> 1934<0D> <0066006C> 1935<0E> <006600660069> 1936<0F> <00660066006C> 1937<10> <0131> 1938<11> <0237> 1939<12> <0060> 1940<13> <00B4> 1941<14> <02C7> 1942<15> <02D8> 1943<16> <00AF> 1944<17> <02DA> 1945<18> <00B8> 1946<19> <00DF> 1947<1A> <00E6> 1948<1B> <0153> 1949<1C> <00F8> 1950<1D> <00C6> 1951<1E> <0152> 1952<1F> <00D8> 1953<21> <0021> 1954<22> <201D> 1955<27> <2019> 1956<3C> <00A1> 1957<3D> <003D> 1958<3E> <00BF> 1959<5C> <201C> 1960<5F> <02D9> 1961<60> <2018> 1962<7D> <02DD> 1963<7E> <007E> 1964<7F> <00A8> 1965endbfchar 1966endcmap 1967CMapName currentdict /CMap defineresource pop 1968end 1969end 1970%%EndResource 1971%%EOF 1972 }\endgroup 1973 \expandafter\edef\csname cmapOT1\endcsname#1{% 1974 \pdffontattr#1{/ToUnicode \the\pdflastobj\space 0 R}% 1975 }% 1976% 1977% \cmapOT1IT 1978 \begingroup 1979 \catcode`\^^M=\active \def^^M{^^J}% Output line endings as the ^^J char. 1980 \catcode`\%=12 \immediate\pdfobj stream {%!PS-Adobe-3.0 Resource-CMap 1981%%DocumentNeededResources: ProcSet (CIDInit) 1982%%IncludeResource: ProcSet (CIDInit) 1983%%BeginResource: CMap (TeX-OT1IT-0) 1984%%Title: (TeX-OT1IT-0 TeX OT1IT 0) 1985%%Version: 1.000 1986%%EndComments 1987/CIDInit /ProcSet findresource begin 198812 dict begin 1989begincmap 1990/CIDSystemInfo 1991<< /Registry (TeX) 1992/Ordering (OT1IT) 1993/Supplement 0 1994>> def 1995/CMapName /TeX-OT1IT-0 def 1996/CMapType 2 def 19971 begincodespacerange 1998<00> <7F> 1999endcodespacerange 20008 beginbfrange 2001<00> <01> <0393> 2002<09> <0A> <03A8> 2003<25> <26> <0025> 2004<28> <3B> <0028> 2005<3F> <5B> <003F> 2006<5D> <5E> <005D> 2007<61> <7A> <0061> 2008<7B> <7C> <2013> 2009endbfrange 201042 beginbfchar 2011<02> <0398> 2012<03> <039B> 2013<04> <039E> 2014<05> <03A0> 2015<06> <03A3> 2016<07> <03D2> 2017<08> <03A6> 2018<0B> <00660066> 2019<0C> <00660069> 2020<0D> <0066006C> 2021<0E> <006600660069> 2022<0F> <00660066006C> 2023<10> <0131> 2024<11> <0237> 2025<12> <0060> 2026<13> <00B4> 2027<14> <02C7> 2028<15> <02D8> 2029<16> <00AF> 2030<17> <02DA> 2031<18> <00B8> 2032<19> <00DF> 2033<1A> <00E6> 2034<1B> <0153> 2035<1C> <00F8> 2036<1D> <00C6> 2037<1E> <0152> 2038<1F> <00D8> 2039<21> <0021> 2040<22> <201D> 2041<23> <0023> 2042<24> <00A3> 2043<27> <2019> 2044<3C> <00A1> 2045<3D> <003D> 2046<3E> <00BF> 2047<5C> <201C> 2048<5F> <02D9> 2049<60> <2018> 2050<7D> <02DD> 2051<7E> <007E> 2052<7F> <00A8> 2053endbfchar 2054endcmap 2055CMapName currentdict /CMap defineresource pop 2056end 2057end 2058%%EndResource 2059%%EOF 2060 }\endgroup 2061 \expandafter\edef\csname cmapOT1IT\endcsname#1{% 2062 \pdffontattr#1{/ToUnicode \the\pdflastobj\space 0 R}% 2063 }% 2064% 2065% \cmapOT1TT 2066 \begingroup 2067 \catcode`\^^M=\active \def^^M{^^J}% Output line endings as the ^^J char. 2068 \catcode`\%=12 \immediate\pdfobj stream {%!PS-Adobe-3.0 Resource-CMap 2069%%DocumentNeededResources: ProcSet (CIDInit) 2070%%IncludeResource: ProcSet (CIDInit) 2071%%BeginResource: CMap (TeX-OT1TT-0) 2072%%Title: (TeX-OT1TT-0 TeX OT1TT 0) 2073%%Version: 1.000 2074%%EndComments 2075/CIDInit /ProcSet findresource begin 207612 dict begin 2077begincmap 2078/CIDSystemInfo 2079<< /Registry (TeX) 2080/Ordering (OT1TT) 2081/Supplement 0 2082>> def 2083/CMapName /TeX-OT1TT-0 def 2084/CMapType 2 def 20851 begincodespacerange 2086<00> <7F> 2087endcodespacerange 20885 beginbfrange 2089<00> <01> <0393> 2090<09> <0A> <03A8> 2091<21> <26> <0021> 2092<28> <5F> <0028> 2093<61> <7E> <0061> 2094endbfrange 209532 beginbfchar 2096<02> <0398> 2097<03> <039B> 2098<04> <039E> 2099<05> <03A0> 2100<06> <03A3> 2101<07> <03D2> 2102<08> <03A6> 2103<0B> <2191> 2104<0C> <2193> 2105<0D> <0027> 2106<0E> <00A1> 2107<0F> <00BF> 2108<10> <0131> 2109<11> <0237> 2110<12> <0060> 2111<13> <00B4> 2112<14> <02C7> 2113<15> <02D8> 2114<16> <00AF> 2115<17> <02DA> 2116<18> <00B8> 2117<19> <00DF> 2118<1A> <00E6> 2119<1B> <0153> 2120<1C> <00F8> 2121<1D> <00C6> 2122<1E> <0152> 2123<1F> <00D8> 2124<20> <2423> 2125<27> <2019> 2126<60> <2018> 2127<7F> <00A8> 2128endbfchar 2129endcmap 2130CMapName currentdict /CMap defineresource pop 2131end 2132end 2133%%EndResource 2134%%EOF 2135 }\endgroup 2136 \expandafter\edef\csname cmapOT1TT\endcsname#1{% 2137 \pdffontattr#1{/ToUnicode \the\pdflastobj\space 0 R}% 2138 }% 2139\fi\fi 2140 2141 2142% Set the font macro #1 to the font named \fontprefix#2. 2143% #3 is the font's design size, #4 is a scale factor, #5 is the CMap 2144% encoding (only OT1, OT1IT and OT1TT are allowed, or empty to omit). 2145% Example: 2146% #1 = \textrm 2147% #2 = \rmshape 2148% #3 = 10 2149% #4 = \mainmagstep 2150% #5 = OT1 2151% 2152\def\setfont#1#2#3#4#5{% 2153 \font#1=\fontprefix#2#3 scaled #4 2154 \csname cmap#5\endcsname#1% 2155} 2156% This is what gets called when #5 of \setfont is empty. 2157\let\cmap\gobble 2158% 2159% (end of cmaps) 2160 2161% Use cm as the default font prefix. 2162% To specify the font prefix, you must define \fontprefix 2163% before you read in texinfo.tex. 2164\ifx\fontprefix\thisisundefined 2165\def\fontprefix{cm} 2166\fi 2167% Support font families that don't use the same naming scheme as CM. 2168\def\rmshape{r} 2169\def\rmbshape{bx} % where the normal face is bold 2170\def\bfshape{b} 2171\def\bxshape{bx} 2172\def\ttshape{tt} 2173\def\ttbshape{tt} 2174\def\ttslshape{sltt} 2175\def\itshape{ti} 2176\def\itbshape{bxti} 2177\def\slshape{sl} 2178\def\slbshape{bxsl} 2179\def\sfshape{ss} 2180\def\sfbshape{ss} 2181\def\scshape{csc} 2182\def\scbshape{csc} 2183 2184% Definitions for a main text size of 11pt. (The default in Texinfo.) 2185% 2186\def\definetextfontsizexi{% 2187% Text fonts (11.2pt, magstep1). 2188\def\textnominalsize{11pt} 2189\edef\mainmagstep{\magstephalf} 2190\setfont\textrm\rmshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 2191\setfont\texttt\ttshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT} 2192\setfont\textbf\bfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 2193\setfont\textit\itshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1IT} 2194\setfont\textsl\slshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 2195\setfont\textsf\sfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 2196\setfont\textsc\scshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 2197\setfont\textttsl\ttslshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT} 2198\font\texti=cmmi10 scaled \mainmagstep 2199\font\textsy=cmsy10 scaled \mainmagstep 2200\def\textecsize{1095} 2201 2202% A few fonts for @defun names and args. 2203\setfont\defbf\bfshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1} 2204\setfont\deftt\ttshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT} 2205\setfont\defsl\slshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT} 2206\setfont\defttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT} 2207\def\df{\let\ttfont=\deftt \let\bffont = \defbf 2208\let\ttslfont=\defttsl \let\slfont=\defsl \bf} 2209 2210% Fonts for indices, footnotes, small examples (9pt). 2211\def\smallnominalsize{9pt} 2212\setfont\smallrm\rmshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 2213\setfont\smalltt\ttshape{9}{1000}{OT1TT} 2214\setfont\smallbf\bfshape{10}{900}{OT1} 2215\setfont\smallit\itshape{9}{1000}{OT1IT} 2216\setfont\smallsl\slshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 2217\setfont\smallsf\sfshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 2218\setfont\smallsc\scshape{10}{900}{OT1} 2219\setfont\smallttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}{OT1TT} 2220\font\smalli=cmmi9 2221\font\smallsy=cmsy9 2222\def\smallecsize{0900} 2223 2224% Fonts for small examples (8pt). 2225\def\smallernominalsize{8pt} 2226\setfont\smallerrm\rmshape{8}{1000}{OT1} 2227\setfont\smallertt\ttshape{8}{1000}{OT1TT} 2228\setfont\smallerbf\bfshape{10}{800}{OT1} 2229\setfont\smallerit\itshape{8}{1000}{OT1IT} 2230\setfont\smallersl\slshape{8}{1000}{OT1} 2231\setfont\smallersf\sfshape{8}{1000}{OT1} 2232\setfont\smallersc\scshape{10}{800}{OT1} 2233\setfont\smallerttsl\ttslshape{10}{800}{OT1TT} 2234\font\smalleri=cmmi8 2235\font\smallersy=cmsy8 2236\def\smallerecsize{0800} 2237 2238% Fonts for math mode superscripts (7pt). 2239\def\sevennominalsize{7pt} 2240\setfont\sevenrm\rmshape{7}{1000}{OT1} 2241\setfont\seventt\ttshape{10}{700}{OT1TT} 2242\setfont\sevenbf\bfshape{10}{700}{OT1} 2243\setfont\sevenit\itshape{7}{1000}{OT1IT} 2244\setfont\sevensl\slshape{10}{700}{OT1} 2245\setfont\sevensf\sfshape{10}{700}{OT1} 2246\setfont\sevensc\scshape{10}{700}{OT1} 2247\setfont\seventtsl\ttslshape{10}{700}{OT1TT} 2248\font\seveni=cmmi7 2249\font\sevensy=cmsy7 2250\def\sevenecsize{0700} 2251 2252% Fonts for title page (20.4pt): 2253\def\titlenominalsize{20pt} 2254\setfont\titlerm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1} 2255\setfont\titleit\itbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1IT} 2256\setfont\titlesl\slbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1} 2257\setfont\titlett\ttbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1TT} 2258\setfont\titlettsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1TT} 2259\setfont\titlesf\sfbshape{17}{\magstep1}{OT1} 2260\let\titlebf=\titlerm 2261\setfont\titlesc\scbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1} 2262\font\titlei=cmmi12 scaled \magstep3 2263\font\titlesy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep4 2264\def\titleecsize{2074} 2265 2266% Chapter (and unnumbered) fonts (17.28pt). 2267\def\chapnominalsize{17pt} 2268\setfont\chaprm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep2}{OT1} 2269\setfont\chapit\itbshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1IT} 2270\setfont\chapsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1} 2271\setfont\chaptt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep2}{OT1TT} 2272\setfont\chapttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1TT} 2273\setfont\chapsf\sfbshape{17}{1000}{OT1} 2274\let\chapbf=\chaprm 2275\setfont\chapsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1} 2276\font\chapi=cmmi12 scaled \magstep2 2277\font\chapsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep3 2278\def\chapecsize{1728} 2279 2280% Section fonts (14.4pt). 2281\def\secnominalsize{14pt} 2282\setfont\secrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1} 2283\setfont\secrmnotbold\rmshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1} 2284\setfont\secit\itbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1IT} 2285\setfont\secsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1} 2286\setfont\sectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1TT} 2287\setfont\secttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1TT} 2288\setfont\secsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1} 2289\let\secbf\secrm 2290\setfont\secsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1} 2291\font\seci=cmmi12 scaled \magstep1 2292\font\secsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep2 2293\def\sececsize{1440} 2294 2295% Subsection fonts (13.15pt). 2296\def\ssecnominalsize{13pt} 2297\setfont\ssecrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstephalf}{OT1} 2298\setfont\ssecit\itbshape{10}{1315}{OT1IT} 2299\setfont\ssecsl\slbshape{10}{1315}{OT1} 2300\setfont\ssectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT} 2301\setfont\ssecttsl\ttslshape{10}{1315}{OT1TT} 2302\setfont\ssecsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstephalf}{OT1} 2303\let\ssecbf\ssecrm 2304\setfont\ssecsc\scbshape{10}{1315}{OT1} 2305\font\sseci=cmmi12 scaled \magstephalf 2306\font\ssecsy=cmsy10 scaled 1315 2307\def\ssececsize{1200} 2308 2309% Reduced fonts for @acronym in text (10pt). 2310\def\reducednominalsize{10pt} 2311\setfont\reducedrm\rmshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 2312\setfont\reducedtt\ttshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT} 2313\setfont\reducedbf\bfshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 2314\setfont\reducedit\itshape{10}{1000}{OT1IT} 2315\setfont\reducedsl\slshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 2316\setfont\reducedsf\sfshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 2317\setfont\reducedsc\scshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 2318\setfont\reducedttsl\ttslshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT} 2319\font\reducedi=cmmi10 2320\font\reducedsy=cmsy10 2321\def\reducedecsize{1000} 2322 2323\textleading = 13.2pt % line spacing for 11pt CM 2324\textfonts % reset the current fonts 2325\rm 2326} % end of 11pt text font size definitions, \definetextfontsizexi 2327 2328 2329% Definitions to make the main text be 10pt Computer Modern, with 2330% section, chapter, etc., sizes following suit. This is for the GNU 2331% Press printing of the Emacs 22 manual. Maybe other manuals in the 2332% future. Used with @smallbook, which sets the leading to 12pt. 2333% 2334\def\definetextfontsizex{% 2335% Text fonts (10pt). 2336\def\textnominalsize{10pt} 2337\edef\mainmagstep{1000} 2338\setfont\textrm\rmshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 2339\setfont\texttt\ttshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT} 2340\setfont\textbf\bfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 2341\setfont\textit\itshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1IT} 2342\setfont\textsl\slshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 2343\setfont\textsf\sfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 2344\setfont\textsc\scshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 2345\setfont\textttsl\ttslshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT} 2346\font\texti=cmmi10 scaled \mainmagstep 2347\font\textsy=cmsy10 scaled \mainmagstep 2348\def\textecsize{1000} 2349 2350% A few fonts for @defun names and args. 2351\setfont\defbf\bfshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1} 2352\setfont\deftt\ttshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT} 2353\setfont\defsl\slshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT} 2354\setfont\defttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT} 2355\def\df{\let\ttfont=\deftt \let\bffont = \defbf 2356\let\slfont=\defsl \let\ttslfont=\defttsl \bf} 2357 2358% Fonts for indices, footnotes, small examples (9pt). 2359\def\smallnominalsize{9pt} 2360\setfont\smallrm\rmshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 2361\setfont\smalltt\ttshape{9}{1000}{OT1TT} 2362\setfont\smallbf\bfshape{10}{900}{OT1} 2363\setfont\smallit\itshape{9}{1000}{OT1IT} 2364\setfont\smallsl\slshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 2365\setfont\smallsf\sfshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 2366\setfont\smallsc\scshape{10}{900}{OT1} 2367\setfont\smallttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}{OT1TT} 2368\font\smalli=cmmi9 2369\font\smallsy=cmsy9 2370\def\smallecsize{0900} 2371 2372% Fonts for small examples (8pt). 2373\def\smallernominalsize{8pt} 2374\setfont\smallerrm\rmshape{8}{1000}{OT1} 2375\setfont\smallertt\ttshape{8}{1000}{OT1TT} 2376\setfont\smallerbf\bfshape{10}{800}{OT1} 2377\setfont\smallerit\itshape{8}{1000}{OT1IT} 2378\setfont\smallersl\slshape{8}{1000}{OT1} 2379\setfont\smallersf\sfshape{8}{1000}{OT1} 2380\setfont\smallersc\scshape{10}{800}{OT1} 2381\setfont\smallerttsl\ttslshape{10}{800}{OT1TT} 2382\font\smalleri=cmmi8 2383\font\smallersy=cmsy8 2384\def\smallerecsize{0800} 2385 2386% Fonts for math mode superscripts (7pt). 2387\def\sevennominalsize{7pt} 2388\setfont\sevenrm\rmshape{7}{1000}{OT1} 2389\setfont\seventt\ttshape{10}{700}{OT1TT} 2390\setfont\sevenbf\bfshape{10}{700}{OT1} 2391\setfont\sevenit\itshape{7}{1000}{OT1IT} 2392\setfont\sevensl\slshape{10}{700}{OT1} 2393\setfont\sevensf\sfshape{10}{700}{OT1} 2394\setfont\sevensc\scshape{10}{700}{OT1} 2395\setfont\seventtsl\ttslshape{10}{700}{OT1TT} 2396\font\seveni=cmmi7 2397\font\sevensy=cmsy7 2398\def\sevenecsize{0700} 2399 2400% Fonts for title page (20.4pt): 2401\def\titlenominalsize{20pt} 2402\setfont\titlerm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1} 2403\setfont\titleit\itbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1IT} 2404\setfont\titlesl\slbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1} 2405\setfont\titlett\ttbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1TT} 2406\setfont\titlettsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1TT} 2407\setfont\titlesf\sfbshape{17}{\magstep1}{OT1} 2408\let\titlebf=\titlerm 2409\setfont\titlesc\scbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1} 2410\font\titlei=cmmi12 scaled \magstep3 2411\font\titlesy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep4 2412\def\titleecsize{2074} 2413 2414% Chapter fonts (14.4pt). 2415\def\chapnominalsize{14pt} 2416\setfont\chaprm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1} 2417\setfont\chapit\itbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1IT} 2418\setfont\chapsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1} 2419\setfont\chaptt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1TT} 2420\setfont\chapttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1TT} 2421\setfont\chapsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1} 2422\let\chapbf\chaprm 2423\setfont\chapsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1} 2424\font\chapi=cmmi12 scaled \magstep1 2425\font\chapsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep2 2426\def\chapecsize{1440} 2427 2428% Section fonts (12pt). 2429\def\secnominalsize{12pt} 2430\setfont\secrm\rmbshape{12}{1000}{OT1} 2431\setfont\secit\itbshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1IT} 2432\setfont\secsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1} 2433\setfont\sectt\ttbshape{12}{1000}{OT1TT} 2434\setfont\secttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT} 2435\setfont\secsf\sfbshape{12}{1000}{OT1} 2436\let\secbf\secrm 2437\setfont\secsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1} 2438\font\seci=cmmi12 2439\font\secsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep1 2440\def\sececsize{1200} 2441 2442% Subsection fonts (10pt). 2443\def\ssecnominalsize{10pt} 2444\setfont\ssecrm\rmbshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 2445\setfont\ssecit\itbshape{10}{1000}{OT1IT} 2446\setfont\ssecsl\slbshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 2447\setfont\ssectt\ttbshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT} 2448\setfont\ssecttsl\ttslshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT} 2449\setfont\ssecsf\sfbshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 2450\let\ssecbf\ssecrm 2451\setfont\ssecsc\scbshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 2452\font\sseci=cmmi10 2453\font\ssecsy=cmsy10 2454\def\ssececsize{1000} 2455 2456% Reduced fonts for @acronym in text (9pt). 2457\def\reducednominalsize{9pt} 2458\setfont\reducedrm\rmshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 2459\setfont\reducedtt\ttshape{9}{1000}{OT1TT} 2460\setfont\reducedbf\bfshape{10}{900}{OT1} 2461\setfont\reducedit\itshape{9}{1000}{OT1IT} 2462\setfont\reducedsl\slshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 2463\setfont\reducedsf\sfshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 2464\setfont\reducedsc\scshape{10}{900}{OT1} 2465\setfont\reducedttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}{OT1TT} 2466\font\reducedi=cmmi9 2467\font\reducedsy=cmsy9 2468\def\reducedecsize{0900} 2469 2470\divide\parskip by 2 % reduce space between paragraphs 2471\textleading = 12pt % line spacing for 10pt CM 2472\textfonts % reset the current fonts 2473\rm 2474} % end of 10pt text font size definitions, \definetextfontsizex 2475 2476% Fonts for short table of contents. 2477\setfont\shortcontrm\rmshape{12}{1000}{OT1} 2478\setfont\shortcontbf\bfshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1} % no cmb12 2479\setfont\shortcontsl\slshape{12}{1000}{OT1} 2480\setfont\shortconttt\ttshape{12}{1000}{OT1TT} 2481 2482 2483% We provide the user-level command 2484% @fonttextsize 10 2485% (or 11) to redefine the text font size. pt is assumed. 2486% 2487\def\xiword{11} 2488\def\xword{10} 2489\def\xwordpt{10pt} 2490% 2491\parseargdef\fonttextsize{% 2492 \def\textsizearg{#1}% 2493 %\wlog{doing @fonttextsize \textsizearg}% 2494 % 2495 % Set \globaldefs so that documents can use this inside @tex, since 2496 % makeinfo 4.8 does not support it, but we need it nonetheless. 2497 % 2498 \begingroup \globaldefs=1 2499 \ifx\textsizearg\xword \definetextfontsizex 2500 \else \ifx\textsizearg\xiword \definetextfontsizexi 2501 \else 2502 \errhelp=\EMsimple 2503 \errmessage{@fonttextsize only supports `10' or `11', not `\textsizearg'} 2504 \fi\fi 2505 \endgroup 2506} 2507 2508% 2509% Change the current font style to #1, remembering it in \curfontstyle. 2510% For now, we do not accumulate font styles: @b{@i{foo}} prints foo in 2511% italics, not bold italics. 2512% 2513\def\setfontstyle#1{% 2514 \def\curfontstyle{#1}% not as a control sequence, because we are \edef'd. 2515 \csname #1font\endcsname % change the current font 2516} 2517 2518\def\rm{\fam=0 \setfontstyle{rm}} 2519\def\it{\fam=\itfam \setfontstyle{it}} 2520\def\sl{\fam=\slfam \setfontstyle{sl}} 2521\def\bf{\fam=\bffam \setfontstyle{bf}}\def\bfstylename{bf} 2522\def\tt{\fam=\ttfam \setfontstyle{tt}} 2523 2524% Texinfo sort of supports the sans serif font style, which plain TeX does not. 2525% So we set up a \sf. 2526\newfam\sffam 2527\def\sf{\fam=\sffam \setfontstyle{sf}} 2528 2529% We don't need math for this font style. 2530\def\ttsl{\setfontstyle{ttsl}} 2531 2532 2533% In order for the font changes to affect most math symbols and letters, 2534% we have to define the \textfont of the standard families. 2535% We don't bother to reset \scriptscriptfont; awaiting user need. 2536% 2537\def\resetmathfonts{% 2538 \textfont0=\rmfont \textfont1=\ifont \textfont2=\syfont 2539 \textfont\itfam=\itfont \textfont\slfam=\slfont \textfont\bffam=\bffont 2540 \textfont\ttfam=\ttfont \textfont\sffam=\sffont 2541 % 2542 % Fonts for superscript. Note that the 7pt fonts are used regardless 2543 % of the current font size. 2544 \scriptfont0=\sevenrm \scriptfont1=\seveni \scriptfont2=\sevensy 2545 \scriptfont\itfam=\sevenit \scriptfont\slfam=\sevensl 2546 \scriptfont\bffam=\sevenbf \scriptfont\ttfam=\seventt 2547 \scriptfont\sffam=\sevensf 2548} 2549 2550% 2551 2552% The font-changing commands (all called \...fonts) redefine the meanings 2553% of \STYLEfont, instead of just \STYLE. We do this because \STYLE needs 2554% to also set the current \fam for math mode. Our \STYLE (e.g., \rm) 2555% commands hardwire \STYLEfont to set the current font. 2556% 2557% The fonts used for \ifont are for "math italics" (\itfont is for italics 2558% in regular text). \syfont is also used in math mode only. 2559% 2560% Each font-changing command also sets the names \lsize (one size lower) 2561% and \lllsize (three sizes lower). These relative commands are used 2562% in, e.g., the LaTeX logo and acronyms. 2563% 2564% This all needs generalizing, badly. 2565% 2566 2567\def\assignfonts#1{% 2568 \expandafter\let\expandafter\rmfont\csname #1rm\endcsname 2569 \expandafter\let\expandafter\itfont\csname #1it\endcsname 2570 \expandafter\let\expandafter\slfont\csname #1sl\endcsname 2571 \expandafter\let\expandafter\bffont\csname #1bf\endcsname 2572 \expandafter\let\expandafter\ttfont\csname #1tt\endcsname 2573 \expandafter\let\expandafter\smallcaps\csname #1sc\endcsname 2574 \expandafter\let\expandafter\sffont \csname #1sf\endcsname 2575 \expandafter\let\expandafter\ifont \csname #1i\endcsname 2576 \expandafter\let\expandafter\syfont \csname #1sy\endcsname 2577 \expandafter\let\expandafter\ttslfont\csname #1ttsl\endcsname 2578} 2579 2580\newif\ifrmisbold 2581 2582% Select smaller font size with the current style. Used to change font size 2583% in, e.g., the LaTeX logo and acronyms. If we are using bold fonts for 2584% normal roman text, also use bold fonts for roman text in the smaller size. 2585\def\switchtolllsize{% 2586 \expandafter\assignfonts\expandafter{\lllsize}% 2587 \ifrmisbold 2588 \let\rmfont\bffont 2589 \fi 2590 \csname\curfontstyle\endcsname 2591}% 2592 2593\def\switchtolsize{% 2594 \expandafter\assignfonts\expandafter{\lsize}% 2595 \ifrmisbold 2596 \let\rmfont\bffont 2597 \fi 2598 \csname\curfontstyle\endcsname 2599}% 2600 2601\def\definefontsetatsize#1#2#3#4#5{% 2602\expandafter\def\csname #1fonts\endcsname{% 2603 \def\curfontsize{#1}% 2604 \def\lsize{#2}\def\lllsize{#3}% 2605 \csname rmisbold#5\endcsname 2606 \assignfonts{#1}% 2607 \resetmathfonts 2608 \setleading{#4}% 2609}} 2610 2611\definefontsetatsize{text} {reduced}{smaller}{\textleading}{false} 2612\definefontsetatsize{title} {chap} {subsec} {27pt} {true} 2613\definefontsetatsize{chap} {sec} {text} {19pt} {true} 2614\definefontsetatsize{sec} {subsec} {reduced}{17pt} {true} 2615\definefontsetatsize{ssec} {text} {small} {15pt} {true} 2616\definefontsetatsize{reduced}{small} {smaller}{10.5pt}{false} 2617\definefontsetatsize{small} {smaller}{smaller}{10.5pt}{false} 2618\definefontsetatsize{smaller}{smaller}{smaller}{9.5pt} {false} 2619 2620\def\titlefont#1{{\titlefonts\rm #1}} 2621\let\subsecfonts = \ssecfonts 2622\let\subsubsecfonts = \ssecfonts 2623 2624% Define these just so they can be easily changed for other fonts. 2625\def\angleleft{$\langle$} 2626\def\angleright{$\rangle$} 2627 2628% Set the fonts to use with the @small... environments. 2629\let\smallexamplefonts = \smallfonts 2630 2631% About \smallexamplefonts. If we use \smallfonts (9pt), @smallexample 2632% can fit this many characters: 2633% 8.5x11=86 smallbook=72 a4=90 a5=69 2634% If we use \scriptfonts (8pt), then we can fit this many characters: 2635% 8.5x11=90+ smallbook=80 a4=90+ a5=77 2636% For me, subjectively, the few extra characters that fit aren't worth 2637% the additional smallness of 8pt. So I'm making the default 9pt. 2638% 2639% By the way, for comparison, here's what fits with @example (10pt): 2640% 8.5x11=71 smallbook=60 a4=75 a5=58 2641% --karl, 24jan03. 2642 2643% Set up the default fonts, so we can use them for creating boxes. 2644% 2645\definetextfontsizexi 2646 2647 2648\message{markup,} 2649 2650% Check if we are currently using a typewriter font. Since all the 2651% Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero interword stretch (and 2652% shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all typewriter fonts to have 2653% this property, we can check that font parameter. 2654% 2655\def\ifmonospace{\ifdim\fontdimen3\font=0pt } 2656 2657% Markup style infrastructure. \defmarkupstylesetup\INITMACRO will 2658% define and register \INITMACRO to be called on markup style changes. 2659% \INITMACRO can check \currentmarkupstyle for the innermost 2660% style. 2661 2662\let\currentmarkupstyle\empty 2663 2664\def\setupmarkupstyle#1{% 2665 \def\currentmarkupstyle{#1}% 2666 \markupstylesetup 2667} 2668 2669\let\markupstylesetup\empty 2670 2671\def\defmarkupstylesetup#1{% 2672 \expandafter\def\expandafter\markupstylesetup 2673 \expandafter{\markupstylesetup #1}% 2674 \def#1% 2675} 2676 2677% Markup style setup for left and right quotes. 2678\defmarkupstylesetup\markupsetuplq{% 2679 \expandafter\let\expandafter \temp 2680 \csname markupsetuplq\currentmarkupstyle\endcsname 2681 \ifx\temp\relax \markupsetuplqdefault \else \temp \fi 2682} 2683 2684\defmarkupstylesetup\markupsetuprq{% 2685 \expandafter\let\expandafter \temp 2686 \csname markupsetuprq\currentmarkupstyle\endcsname 2687 \ifx\temp\relax \markupsetuprqdefault \else \temp \fi 2688} 2689 2690{ 2691\catcode`\'=\active 2692\catcode`\`=\active 2693 2694\gdef\markupsetuplqdefault{\let`\lq} 2695\gdef\markupsetuprqdefault{\let'\rq} 2696 2697\gdef\markupsetcodequoteleft{\let`\codequoteleft} 2698\gdef\markupsetcodequoteright{\let'\codequoteright} 2699} 2700 2701\let\markupsetuplqcode \markupsetcodequoteleft 2702\let\markupsetuprqcode \markupsetcodequoteright 2703% 2704\let\markupsetuplqexample \markupsetcodequoteleft 2705\let\markupsetuprqexample \markupsetcodequoteright 2706% 2707\let\markupsetuplqkbd \markupsetcodequoteleft 2708\let\markupsetuprqkbd \markupsetcodequoteright 2709% 2710\let\markupsetuplqsamp \markupsetcodequoteleft 2711\let\markupsetuprqsamp \markupsetcodequoteright 2712% 2713\let\markupsetuplqverb \markupsetcodequoteleft 2714\let\markupsetuprqverb \markupsetcodequoteright 2715% 2716\let\markupsetuplqverbatim \markupsetcodequoteleft 2717\let\markupsetuprqverbatim \markupsetcodequoteright 2718 2719% Allow an option to not use regular directed right quote/apostrophe 2720% (char 0x27), but instead the undirected quote from cmtt (char 0x0d). 2721% The undirected quote is ugly, so don't make it the default, but it 2722% works for pasting with more pdf viewers (at least evince), the 2723% lilypond developers report. xpdf does work with the regular 0x27. 2724% 2725\def\codequoteright{% 2726 \ifmonospace 2727 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxicodequoteundirected\endcsname\relax 2728 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETcodequoteundirected\endcsname\relax 2729 '% 2730 \else \char'15 \fi 2731 \else \char'15 \fi 2732 \else 2733 '% 2734 \fi 2735} 2736% 2737% and a similar option for the left quote char vs. a grave accent. 2738% Modern fonts display ASCII 0x60 as a grave accent, so some people like 2739% the code environments to do likewise. 2740% 2741\def\codequoteleft{% 2742 \ifmonospace 2743 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxicodequotebacktick\endcsname\relax 2744 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETcodequotebacktick\endcsname\relax 2745 % [Knuth] pp. 380,381,391 2746 % \relax disables Spanish ligatures ?` and !` of \tt font. 2747 \relax`% 2748 \else \char'22 \fi 2749 \else \char'22 \fi 2750 \else 2751 \relax`% 2752 \fi 2753} 2754 2755% Commands to set the quote options. 2756% 2757\parseargdef\codequoteundirected{% 2758 \def\temp{#1}% 2759 \ifx\temp\onword 2760 \expandafter\let\csname SETtxicodequoteundirected\endcsname 2761 = t% 2762 \else\ifx\temp\offword 2763 \expandafter\let\csname SETtxicodequoteundirected\endcsname 2764 = \relax 2765 \else 2766 \errhelp = \EMsimple 2767 \errmessage{Unknown @codequoteundirected value `\temp', must be on|off}% 2768 \fi\fi 2769} 2770% 2771\parseargdef\codequotebacktick{% 2772 \def\temp{#1}% 2773 \ifx\temp\onword 2774 \expandafter\let\csname SETtxicodequotebacktick\endcsname 2775 = t% 2776 \else\ifx\temp\offword 2777 \expandafter\let\csname SETtxicodequotebacktick\endcsname 2778 = \relax 2779 \else 2780 \errhelp = \EMsimple 2781 \errmessage{Unknown @codequotebacktick value `\temp', must be on|off}% 2782 \fi\fi 2783} 2784 2785% [Knuth] pp. 380,381,391, disable Spanish ligatures ?` and !` of \tt font. 2786\def\noligaturesquoteleft{\relax\lq} 2787 2788% Count depth in font-changes, for error checks 2789\newcount\fontdepth \fontdepth=0 2790 2791% Font commands. 2792 2793% #1 is the font command (\sl or \it), #2 is the text to slant. 2794% If we are in a monospaced environment, however, 1) always use \ttsl, 2795% and 2) do not add an italic correction. 2796\def\dosmartslant#1#2{% 2797 \ifusingtt 2798 {{\ttsl #2}\let\next=\relax}% 2799 {\def\next{{#1#2}\futurelet\next\smartitaliccorrection}}% 2800 \next 2801} 2802\def\smartslanted{\dosmartslant\sl} 2803\def\smartitalic{\dosmartslant\it} 2804 2805% Output an italic correction unless \next (presumed to be the following 2806% character) is such as not to need one. 2807\def\smartitaliccorrection{% 2808 \ifx\next,% 2809 \else\ifx\next-% 2810 \else\ifx\next.% 2811 \else\ifx\next\.% 2812 \else\ifx\next\comma% 2813 \else\ptexslash 2814 \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi 2815 \aftersmartic 2816} 2817 2818% Unconditional use \ttsl, and no ic. @var is set to this for defuns. 2819\def\ttslanted#1{{\ttsl #1}} 2820 2821% @cite is like \smartslanted except unconditionally use \sl. We never want 2822% ttsl for book titles, do we? 2823\def\cite#1{{\sl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitaliccorrection} 2824 2825\def\aftersmartic{} 2826\def\var#1{% 2827 \let\saveaftersmartic = \aftersmartic 2828 \def\aftersmartic{\null\let\aftersmartic=\saveaftersmartic}% 2829 \smartslanted{#1}% 2830} 2831 2832\let\i=\smartitalic 2833\let\slanted=\smartslanted 2834\let\dfn=\smartslanted 2835\let\emph=\smartitalic 2836 2837% Explicit font changes: @r, @sc, undocumented @ii. 2838\def\r#1{{\rm #1}} % roman font 2839\def\sc#1{{\smallcaps#1}} % smallcaps font 2840\def\ii#1{{\it #1}} % italic font 2841 2842% @b, explicit bold. Also @strong. 2843\def\b#1{{\bf #1}} 2844\let\strong=\b 2845 2846% @sansserif, explicit sans. 2847\def\sansserif#1{{\sf #1}} 2848 2849% We can't just use \exhyphenpenalty, because that only has effect at 2850% the end of a paragraph. Restore normal hyphenation at the end of the 2851% group within which \nohyphenation is presumably called. 2852% 2853\def\nohyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = -1 \aftergroup\restorehyphenation} 2854\def\restorehyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = `- } 2855 2856% Set sfcode to normal for the chars that usually have another value. 2857% Can't use plain's \frenchspacing because it uses the `\x notation, and 2858% sometimes \x has an active definition that messes things up. 2859% 2860\catcode`@=11 2861 \def\plainfrenchspacing{% 2862 \sfcode`\.=\@m \sfcode`\?=\@m \sfcode`\!=\@m 2863 \sfcode`\:=\@m \sfcode`\;=\@m \sfcode`\,=\@m 2864 \def\endofsentencespacefactor{1000}% for @. and friends 2865 } 2866 \def\plainnonfrenchspacing{% 2867 \sfcode`\.3000\sfcode`\?3000\sfcode`\!3000 2868 \sfcode`\:2000\sfcode`\;1500\sfcode`\,1250 2869 \def\endofsentencespacefactor{3000}% for @. and friends 2870 } 2871\catcode`@=\other 2872\def\endofsentencespacefactor{3000}% default 2873 2874% @t, explicit typewriter. 2875\def\t#1{% 2876 {\tt \rawbackslash \plainfrenchspacing #1}% 2877 \null 2878} 2879 2880% @samp. 2881\def\samp#1{{\setupmarkupstyle{samp}\lq\tclose{#1}\rq\null}} 2882 2883% @indicateurl is \samp, that is, with quotes. 2884\let\indicateurl=\samp 2885 2886% @code (and similar) prints in typewriter, but with spaces the same 2887% size as normal in the surrounding text, without hyphenation, etc. 2888% This is a subroutine for that. 2889\def\tclose#1{% 2890 {% 2891 % Change normal interword space to be same as for the current font. 2892 \spaceskip = \fontdimen2\font 2893 % 2894 % Switch to typewriter. 2895 \tt 2896 % 2897 % But `\ ' produces the large typewriter interword space. 2898 \def\ {{\spaceskip = 0pt{} }}% 2899 % 2900 % Turn off hyphenation. 2901 \nohyphenation 2902 % 2903 \rawbackslash 2904 \plainfrenchspacing 2905 #1% 2906 }% 2907 \null % reset spacefactor to 1000 2908} 2909 2910% We *must* turn on hyphenation at `-' and `_' in @code. 2911% (But see \codedashfinish below.) 2912% Otherwise, it is too hard to avoid overfull hboxes 2913% in the Emacs manual, the Library manual, etc. 2914% 2915% Unfortunately, TeX uses one parameter (\hyphenchar) to control 2916% both hyphenation at - and hyphenation within words. 2917% We must therefore turn them both off (\tclose does that) 2918% and arrange explicitly to hyphenate at a dash. -- rms. 2919{ 2920 \catcode`\-=\active \catcode`\_=\active 2921 \catcode`\'=\active \catcode`\`=\active 2922 \global\let'=\rq \global\let`=\lq % default definitions 2923 % 2924 \global\def\code{\begingroup 2925 \setupmarkupstyle{code}% 2926 % The following should really be moved into \setupmarkupstyle handlers. 2927 \catcode\dashChar=\active \catcode\underChar=\active 2928 \ifallowcodebreaks 2929 \let-\codedash 2930 \let_\codeunder 2931 \else 2932 \let-\normaldash 2933 \let_\realunder 2934 \fi 2935 % Given -foo (with a single dash), we do not want to allow a break 2936 % after the hyphen. 2937 \global\let\codedashprev=\codedash 2938 % 2939 \codex 2940 } 2941 % 2942 \gdef\codedash{\futurelet\next\codedashfinish} 2943 \gdef\codedashfinish{% 2944 \normaldash % always output the dash character itself. 2945 % 2946 % Now, output a discretionary to allow a line break, unless 2947 % (a) the next character is a -, or 2948 % (b) the preceding character is a -. 2949 % E.g., given --posix, we do not want to allow a break after either -. 2950 % Given --foo-bar, we do want to allow a break between the - and the b. 2951 \ifx\next\codedash \else 2952 \ifx\codedashprev\codedash 2953 \else \discretionary{}{}{}\fi 2954 \fi 2955 % we need the space after the = for the case when \next itself is a 2956 % space token; it would get swallowed otherwise. As in @code{- a}. 2957 \global\let\codedashprev= \next 2958 } 2959} 2960\def\normaldash{-} 2961% 2962\def\codex #1{\tclose{#1}\endgroup} 2963 2964\def\codeunder{% 2965 % this is all so @math{@code{var_name}+1} can work. In math mode, _ 2966 % is "active" (mathcode"8000) and \normalunderscore (or \char95, etc.) 2967 % will therefore expand the active definition of _, which is us 2968 % (inside @code that is), therefore an endless loop. 2969 \ifusingtt{\ifmmode 2970 \mathchar"075F % class 0=ordinary, family 7=ttfam, pos 0x5F=_. 2971 \else\normalunderscore \fi 2972 \discretionary{}{}{}}% 2973 {\_}% 2974} 2975 2976% An additional complication: the above will allow breaks after, e.g., 2977% each of the four underscores in __typeof__. This is bad. 2978% @allowcodebreaks provides a document-level way to turn breaking at - 2979% and _ on and off. 2980% 2981\newif\ifallowcodebreaks \allowcodebreakstrue 2982 2983\def\keywordtrue{true} 2984\def\keywordfalse{false} 2985 2986\parseargdef\allowcodebreaks{% 2987 \def\txiarg{#1}% 2988 \ifx\txiarg\keywordtrue 2989 \allowcodebreakstrue 2990 \else\ifx\txiarg\keywordfalse 2991 \allowcodebreaksfalse 2992 \else 2993 \errhelp = \EMsimple 2994 \errmessage{Unknown @allowcodebreaks option `\txiarg', must be true|false}% 2995 \fi\fi 2996} 2997 2998% For @command, @env, @file, @option quotes seem unnecessary, 2999% so use \code rather than \samp. 3000\let\command=\code 3001\let\env=\code 3002\let\file=\code 3003\let\option=\code 3004 3005% @uref (abbreviation for `urlref') aka @url takes an optional 3006% (comma-separated) second argument specifying the text to display and 3007% an optional third arg as text to display instead of (rather than in 3008% addition to) the url itself. First (mandatory) arg is the url. 3009 3010% TeX-only option to allow changing PDF output to show only the second 3011% arg (if given), and not the url (which is then just the link target). 3012\newif\ifurefurlonlylink 3013 3014% The main macro is \urefbreak, which allows breaking at expected 3015% places within the url. (There used to be another version, which 3016% didn't support automatic breaking.) 3017\def\urefbreak{\begingroup \urefcatcodes \dourefbreak} 3018\let\uref=\urefbreak 3019% 3020\def\dourefbreak#1{\urefbreakfinish #1,,,\finish} 3021\def\urefbreakfinish#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{% doesn't work in @example 3022 \unsepspaces 3023 \pdfurl{#1}% 3024 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}% 3025 \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt 3026 \unhbox0 % third arg given, show only that 3027 \else 3028 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% look for second arg 3029 \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt 3030 \ifpdf 3031 % For pdfTeX and LuaTeX 3032 \ifurefurlonlylink 3033 % PDF plus option to not display url, show just arg 3034 \unhbox0 3035 \else 3036 % PDF, normally display both arg and url for consistency, 3037 % visibility, if the pdf is eventually used to print, etc. 3038 \unhbox0\ (\urefcode{#1})% 3039 \fi 3040 \else 3041 \ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined 3042 \unhbox0\ (\urefcode{#1})% DVI, always show arg and url 3043 \else 3044 % For XeTeX 3045 \ifurefurlonlylink 3046 % PDF plus option to not display url, show just arg 3047 \unhbox0 3048 \else 3049 % PDF, normally display both arg and url for consistency, 3050 % visibility, if the pdf is eventually used to print, etc. 3051 \unhbox0\ (\urefcode{#1})% 3052 \fi 3053 \fi 3054 \fi 3055 \else 3056 \urefcode{#1}% only url given, so show it 3057 \fi 3058 \fi 3059 \endlink 3060\endgroup} 3061 3062% Allow line breaks around only a few characters (only). 3063\def\urefcatcodes{% 3064 \catcode`\&=\active \catcode`\.=\active 3065 \catcode`\#=\active \catcode`\?=\active 3066 \catcode`\/=\active 3067} 3068{ 3069 \urefcatcodes 3070 % 3071 \global\def\urefcode{\begingroup 3072 \setupmarkupstyle{code}% 3073 \urefcatcodes 3074 \let&\urefcodeamp 3075 \let.\urefcodedot 3076 \let#\urefcodehash 3077 \let?\urefcodequest 3078 \let/\urefcodeslash 3079 \codex 3080 } 3081 % 3082 % By default, they are just regular characters. 3083 \global\def&{\normalamp} 3084 \global\def.{\normaldot} 3085 \global\def#{\normalhash} 3086 \global\def?{\normalquest} 3087 \global\def/{\normalslash} 3088} 3089 3090% we put a little stretch before and after the breakable chars, to help 3091% line breaking of long url's. The unequal skips make look better in 3092% cmtt at least, especially for dots. 3093\def\urefprestretchamount{.13em} 3094\def\urefpoststretchamount{.1em} 3095\def\urefprestretch{\urefprebreak \hskip0pt plus\urefprestretchamount\relax} 3096\def\urefpoststretch{\urefpostbreak \hskip0pt plus\urefprestretchamount\relax} 3097% 3098\def\urefcodeamp{\urefprestretch \&\urefpoststretch} 3099\def\urefcodedot{\urefprestretch .\urefpoststretch} 3100\def\urefcodehash{\urefprestretch \#\urefpoststretch} 3101\def\urefcodequest{\urefprestretch ?\urefpoststretch} 3102\def\urefcodeslash{\futurelet\next\urefcodeslashfinish} 3103{ 3104 \catcode`\/=\active 3105 \global\def\urefcodeslashfinish{% 3106 \urefprestretch \slashChar 3107 % Allow line break only after the final / in a sequence of 3108 % slashes, to avoid line break between the slashes in http://. 3109 \ifx\next/\else \urefpoststretch \fi 3110 } 3111} 3112 3113% One more complication: by default we'll break after the special 3114% characters, but some people like to break before the special chars, so 3115% allow that. Also allow no breaking at all, for manual control. 3116% 3117\parseargdef\urefbreakstyle{% 3118 \def\txiarg{#1}% 3119 \ifx\txiarg\wordnone 3120 \def\urefprebreak{\nobreak}\def\urefpostbreak{\nobreak} 3121 \else\ifx\txiarg\wordbefore 3122 \def\urefprebreak{\allowbreak}\def\urefpostbreak{\nobreak} 3123 \else\ifx\txiarg\wordafter 3124 \def\urefprebreak{\nobreak}\def\urefpostbreak{\allowbreak} 3125 \else 3126 \errhelp = \EMsimple 3127 \errmessage{Unknown @urefbreakstyle setting `\txiarg'}% 3128 \fi\fi\fi 3129} 3130\def\wordafter{after} 3131\def\wordbefore{before} 3132\def\wordnone{none} 3133 3134\urefbreakstyle after 3135 3136% @url synonym for @uref, since that's how everyone uses it. 3137% 3138\let\url=\uref 3139 3140% rms does not like angle brackets --karl, 17may97. 3141% So now @email is just like @uref, unless we are pdf. 3142% 3143%\def\email#1{\angleleft{\tt #1}\angleright} 3144\ifpdf 3145 \def\email#1{\doemail#1,,\finish} 3146 \def\doemail#1,#2,#3\finish{\begingroup 3147 \unsepspaces 3148 \pdfurl{mailto:#1}% 3149 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% 3150 \ifdim\wd0>0pt\unhbox0\else\code{#1}\fi 3151 \endlink 3152 \endgroup} 3153\else 3154 \ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined 3155 \let\email=\uref 3156 \else 3157 \def\email#1{\doemail#1,,\finish} 3158 \def\doemail#1,#2,#3\finish{\begingroup 3159 \unsepspaces 3160 \pdfurl{mailto:#1}% 3161 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% 3162 \ifdim\wd0>0pt\unhbox0\else\code{#1}\fi 3163 \endlink 3164 \endgroup} 3165 \fi 3166\fi 3167 3168% @kbdinputstyle -- arg is `distinct' (@kbd uses slanted tty font always), 3169% `example' (@kbd uses ttsl only inside of @example and friends), 3170% or `code' (@kbd uses normal tty font always). 3171\parseargdef\kbdinputstyle{% 3172 \def\txiarg{#1}% 3173 \ifx\txiarg\worddistinct 3174 \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\ttsl}% 3175 \else\ifx\txiarg\wordexample 3176 \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}% 3177 \else\ifx\txiarg\wordcode 3178 \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\tt}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}% 3179 \else 3180 \errhelp = \EMsimple 3181 \errmessage{Unknown @kbdinputstyle setting `\txiarg'}% 3182 \fi\fi\fi 3183} 3184\def\worddistinct{distinct} 3185\def\wordexample{example} 3186\def\wordcode{code} 3187 3188% Default is `distinct'. 3189\kbdinputstyle distinct 3190 3191% @kbd is like @code, except that if the argument is just one @key command, 3192% then @kbd has no effect. 3193\def\kbd#1{{\def\look{#1}\expandafter\kbdsub\look??\par}} 3194 3195\def\xkey{\key} 3196\def\kbdsub#1#2#3\par{% 3197 \def\one{#1}\def\three{#3}\def\threex{??}% 3198 \ifx\one\xkey\ifx\threex\three \key{#2}% 3199 \else{\tclose{\kbdfont\setupmarkupstyle{kbd}\look}}\fi 3200 \else{\tclose{\kbdfont\setupmarkupstyle{kbd}\look}}\fi 3201} 3202 3203% definition of @key that produces a lozenge. Doesn't adjust to text size. 3204%\setfont\keyrm\rmshape{8}{1000}{OT1} 3205%\font\keysy=cmsy9 3206%\def\key#1{{\keyrm\textfont2=\keysy \leavevmode\hbox{% 3207% \raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleleft}\kern-.08em\vtop{% 3208% \vbox{\hrule\kern-0.4pt 3209% \hbox{\raise0.4pt\hbox{\vphantom{\angleleft}}#1}}% 3210% \kern-0.4pt\hrule}% 3211% \kern-.06em\raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleright}}}} 3212 3213% definition of @key with no lozenge. If the current font is already 3214% monospace, don't change it; that way, we respect @kbdinputstyle. But 3215% if it isn't monospace, then use \tt. 3216% 3217\def\key#1{{\setupmarkupstyle{key}% 3218 \nohyphenation 3219 \ifmonospace\else\tt\fi 3220 #1}\null} 3221 3222% @clicksequence{File @click{} Open ...} 3223\def\clicksequence#1{\begingroup #1\endgroup} 3224 3225% @clickstyle @arrow (by default) 3226\parseargdef\clickstyle{\def\click{#1}} 3227\def\click{\arrow} 3228 3229% Typeset a dimension, e.g., `in' or `pt'. The only reason for the 3230% argument is to make the input look right: @dmn{pt} instead of @dmn{}pt. 3231% 3232\def\dmn#1{\thinspace #1} 3233 3234% @acronym for "FBI", "NATO", and the like. 3235% We print this one point size smaller, since it's intended for 3236% all-uppercase. 3237% 3238\def\acronym#1{\doacronym #1,,\finish} 3239\def\doacronym#1,#2,#3\finish{% 3240 {\switchtolsize #1}% 3241 \def\temp{#2}% 3242 \ifx\temp\empty \else 3243 \space ({\unsepspaces \ignorespaces \temp \unskip})% 3244 \fi 3245 \null % reset \spacefactor=1000 3246} 3247 3248% @abbr for "Comput. J." and the like. 3249% No font change, but don't do end-of-sentence spacing. 3250% 3251\def\abbr#1{\doabbr #1,,\finish} 3252\def\doabbr#1,#2,#3\finish{% 3253 {\plainfrenchspacing #1}% 3254 \def\temp{#2}% 3255 \ifx\temp\empty \else 3256 \space ({\unsepspaces \ignorespaces \temp \unskip})% 3257 \fi 3258 \null % reset \spacefactor=1000 3259} 3260 3261% @asis just yields its argument. Used with @table, for example. 3262% 3263\def\asis#1{#1} 3264 3265% @math outputs its argument in math mode. 3266% 3267% One complication: _ usually means subscripts, but it could also mean 3268% an actual _ character, as in @math{@var{some_variable} + 1}. So make 3269% _ active, and distinguish by seeing if the current family is \slfam, 3270% which is what @var uses. 3271{ 3272 \catcode`\_ = \active 3273 \gdef\mathunderscore{% 3274 \catcode`\_=\active 3275 \def_{\ifnum\fam=\slfam \_\else\sb\fi}% 3276 } 3277} 3278% Another complication: we want \\ (and @\) to output a math (or tt) \. 3279% FYI, plain.tex uses \\ as a temporary control sequence (for no 3280% particular reason), but this is not advertised and we don't care. 3281% 3282% The \mathchar is class=0=ordinary, family=7=ttfam, position=5C=\. 3283\def\mathbackslash{\ifnum\fam=\ttfam \mathchar"075C \else\backslash \fi} 3284% 3285\def\math{% 3286 \ifmmode\else % only go into math if not in math mode already 3287 \tex 3288 \mathunderscore 3289 \let\\ = \mathbackslash 3290 \mathactive 3291 % make the texinfo accent commands work in math mode 3292 \let\"=\ddot 3293 \let\'=\acute 3294 \let\==\bar 3295 \let\^=\hat 3296 \let\`=\grave 3297 \let\u=\breve 3298 \let\v=\check 3299 \let\~=\tilde 3300 \let\dotaccent=\dot 3301 % have to provide another name for sup operator 3302 \let\mathopsup=\sup 3303 $\expandafter\finishmath\fi 3304} 3305\def\finishmath#1{#1$\endgroup} % Close the group opened by \tex. 3306 3307% Some active characters (such as <) are spaced differently in math. 3308% We have to reset their definitions in case the @math was an argument 3309% to a command which sets the catcodes (such as @item or @section). 3310% 3311{ 3312 \catcode`^ = \active 3313 \catcode`< = \active 3314 \catcode`> = \active 3315 \catcode`+ = \active 3316 \catcode`' = \active 3317 \gdef\mathactive{% 3318 \let^ = \ptexhat 3319 \let< = \ptexless 3320 \let> = \ptexgtr 3321 \let+ = \ptexplus 3322 \let' = \ptexquoteright 3323 } 3324} 3325 3326% for @sub and @sup, if in math mode, just do a normal sub/superscript. 3327% If in text, use math to place as sub/superscript, but switch 3328% into text mode, with smaller fonts. This is a different font than the 3329% one used for real math sub/superscripts (8pt vs. 7pt), but let's not 3330% fix it (significant additions to font machinery) until someone notices. 3331% 3332\def\sub{\ifmmode \expandafter\sb \else \expandafter\finishsub\fi} 3333\def\finishsub#1{$\sb{\hbox{\switchtolllsize #1}}$}% 3334% 3335\def\sup{\ifmmode \expandafter\ptexsp \else \expandafter\finishsup\fi} 3336\def\finishsup#1{$\ptexsp{\hbox{\switchtolllsize #1}}$}% 3337 3338% @inlinefmt{FMTNAME,PROCESSED-TEXT} and @inlineraw{FMTNAME,RAW-TEXT}. 3339% Ignore unless FMTNAME == tex; then it is like @iftex and @tex, 3340% except specified as a normal braced arg, so no newlines to worry about. 3341% 3342\def\outfmtnametex{tex} 3343% 3344\long\def\inlinefmt#1{\doinlinefmt #1,\finish} 3345\long\def\doinlinefmt#1,#2,\finish{% 3346 \def\inlinefmtname{#1}% 3347 \ifx\inlinefmtname\outfmtnametex \ignorespaces #2\fi 3348} 3349% 3350% @inlinefmtifelse{FMTNAME,THEN-TEXT,ELSE-TEXT} expands THEN-TEXT if 3351% FMTNAME is tex, else ELSE-TEXT. 3352\long\def\inlinefmtifelse#1{\doinlinefmtifelse #1,,,\finish} 3353\long\def\doinlinefmtifelse#1,#2,#3,#4,\finish{% 3354 \def\inlinefmtname{#1}% 3355 \ifx\inlinefmtname\outfmtnametex \ignorespaces #2\else \ignorespaces #3\fi 3356} 3357% 3358% For raw, must switch into @tex before parsing the argument, to avoid 3359% setting catcodes prematurely. Doing it this way means that, for 3360% example, @inlineraw{html, foo{bar} gets a parse error instead of being 3361% ignored. But this isn't important because if people want a literal 3362% *right* brace they would have to use a command anyway, so they may as 3363% well use a command to get a left brace too. We could re-use the 3364% delimiter character idea from \verb, but it seems like overkill. 3365% 3366\long\def\inlineraw{\tex \doinlineraw} 3367\long\def\doinlineraw#1{\doinlinerawtwo #1,\finish} 3368\def\doinlinerawtwo#1,#2,\finish{% 3369 \def\inlinerawname{#1}% 3370 \ifx\inlinerawname\outfmtnametex \ignorespaces #2\fi 3371 \endgroup % close group opened by \tex. 3372} 3373 3374% @inlineifset{VAR, TEXT} expands TEXT if VAR is @set. 3375% 3376\long\def\inlineifset#1{\doinlineifset #1,\finish} 3377\long\def\doinlineifset#1,#2,\finish{% 3378 \def\inlinevarname{#1}% 3379 \expandafter\ifx\csname SET\inlinevarname\endcsname\relax 3380 \else\ignorespaces#2\fi 3381} 3382 3383% @inlineifclear{VAR, TEXT} expands TEXT if VAR is not @set. 3384% 3385\long\def\inlineifclear#1{\doinlineifclear #1,\finish} 3386\long\def\doinlineifclear#1,#2,\finish{% 3387 \def\inlinevarname{#1}% 3388 \expandafter\ifx\csname SET\inlinevarname\endcsname\relax \ignorespaces#2\fi 3389} 3390 3391 3392\message{glyphs,} 3393% and logos. 3394 3395% @@ prints an @, as does @atchar{}. 3396\def\@{\char64 } 3397\let\atchar=\@ 3398 3399% @{ @} @lbracechar{} @rbracechar{} all generate brace characters. 3400\def\lbracechar{{\ifmonospace\char123\else\ensuremath\lbrace\fi}} 3401\def\rbracechar{{\ifmonospace\char125\else\ensuremath\rbrace\fi}} 3402\let\{=\lbracechar 3403\let\}=\rbracechar 3404 3405% @comma{} to avoid , parsing problems. 3406\let\comma = , 3407 3408% Accents: @, @dotaccent @ringaccent @ubaraccent @udotaccent 3409% Others are defined by plain TeX: @` @' @" @^ @~ @= @u @v @H. 3410\let\, = \ptexc 3411\let\dotaccent = \ptexdot 3412\def\ringaccent#1{{\accent23 #1}} 3413\let\tieaccent = \ptext 3414\let\ubaraccent = \ptexb 3415\let\udotaccent = \d 3416 3417% Other special characters: @questiondown @exclamdown @ordf @ordm 3418% Plain TeX defines: @AA @AE @O @OE @L (plus lowercase versions) @ss. 3419\def\questiondown{?`} 3420\def\exclamdown{!`} 3421\def\ordf{\leavevmode\raise1ex\hbox{\switchtolllsize \underbar{a}}} 3422\def\ordm{\leavevmode\raise1ex\hbox{\switchtolllsize \underbar{o}}} 3423 3424% Dotless i and dotless j, used for accents. 3425\def\imacro{i} 3426\def\jmacro{j} 3427\def\dotless#1{% 3428 \def\temp{#1}% 3429 \ifx\temp\imacro \ifmmode\imath \else\ptexi \fi 3430 \else\ifx\temp\jmacro \ifmmode\jmath \else\j \fi 3431 \else \errmessage{@dotless can be used only with i or j}% 3432 \fi\fi 3433} 3434 3435% The \TeX{} logo, as in plain, but resetting the spacing so that a 3436% period following counts as ending a sentence. (Idea found in latex.) 3437% 3438\edef\TeX{\TeX \spacefactor=1000 } 3439 3440% @LaTeX{} logo. Not quite the same results as the definition in 3441% latex.ltx, since we use a different font for the raised A; it's most 3442% convenient for us to use an explicitly smaller font, rather than using 3443% the \scriptstyle font (since we don't reset \scriptstyle and 3444% \scriptscriptstyle). 3445% 3446\def\LaTeX{% 3447 L\kern-.36em 3448 {\setbox0=\hbox{T}% 3449 \vbox to \ht0{\hbox{% 3450 \ifx\textnominalsize\xwordpt 3451 % for 10pt running text, lllsize (8pt) is too small for the A in LaTeX. 3452 % Revert to plain's \scriptsize, which is 7pt. 3453 \count255=\the\fam $\fam\count255 \scriptstyle A$% 3454 \else 3455 % For 11pt, we can use our lllsize. 3456 \switchtolllsize A% 3457 \fi 3458 }% 3459 \vss 3460 }}% 3461 \kern-.15em 3462 \TeX 3463} 3464 3465% Some math mode symbols. Define \ensuremath to switch into math mode 3466% unless we are already there. Expansion tricks may not be needed here, 3467% but safer, and can't hurt. 3468\def\ensuremath{\ifmmode \expandafter\asis \else\expandafter\ensuredmath \fi} 3469\def\ensuredmath#1{$\relax#1$} 3470% 3471\def\bullet{\ensuremath\ptexbullet} 3472\def\geq{\ensuremath\ge} 3473\def\leq{\ensuremath\le} 3474\def\minus{\ensuremath-} 3475 3476% @dots{} outputs an ellipsis using the current font. 3477% We do .5em per period so that it has the same spacing in the cm 3478% typewriter fonts as three actual period characters; on the other hand, 3479% in other typewriter fonts three periods are wider than 1.5em. So do 3480% whichever is larger. 3481% 3482\def\dots{% 3483 \leavevmode 3484 \setbox0=\hbox{...}% get width of three periods 3485 \ifdim\wd0 > 1.5em 3486 \dimen0 = \wd0 3487 \else 3488 \dimen0 = 1.5em 3489 \fi 3490 \hbox to \dimen0{% 3491 \hskip 0pt plus.25fil 3492 .\hskip 0pt plus1fil 3493 .\hskip 0pt plus1fil 3494 .\hskip 0pt plus.5fil 3495 }% 3496} 3497 3498% @enddots{} is an end-of-sentence ellipsis. 3499% 3500\def\enddots{% 3501 \dots 3502 \spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor 3503} 3504 3505% @point{}, @result{}, @expansion{}, @print{}, @equiv{}. 3506% 3507% Since these characters are used in examples, they should be an even number of 3508% \tt widths. Each \tt character is 1en, so two makes it 1em. 3509% 3510\def\point{$\star$} 3511\def\arrow{\leavevmode\raise.05ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\rightarrow$\hfil}} 3512\def\result{\leavevmode\raise.05ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\Rightarrow$\hfil}} 3513\def\expansion{\leavevmode\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\mapsto$\hfil}} 3514\def\print{\leavevmode\lower.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\dashv$\hfil}} 3515\def\equiv{\leavevmode\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\ptexequiv$\hfil}} 3516 3517% The @error{} command. 3518% Adapted from the TeXbook's \boxit. 3519% 3520\newbox\errorbox 3521% 3522{\ttfont \global\dimen0 = 3em}% Width of the box. 3523\dimen2 = .55pt % Thickness of rules 3524% The text. (`r' is open on the right, `e' somewhat less so on the left.) 3525\setbox0 = \hbox{\kern-.75pt \reducedsf \putworderror\kern-1.5pt} 3526% 3527\setbox\errorbox=\hbox to \dimen0{\hfil 3528 \hsize = \dimen0 \advance\hsize by -5.8pt % Space to left+right. 3529 \advance\hsize by -2\dimen2 % Rules. 3530 \vbox{% 3531 \hrule height\dimen2 3532 \hbox{\vrule width\dimen2 \kern3pt % Space to left of text. 3533 \vtop{\kern2.4pt \box0 \kern2.4pt}% Space above/below. 3534 \kern3pt\vrule width\dimen2}% Space to right. 3535 \hrule height\dimen2} 3536 \hfil} 3537% 3538\def\error{\leavevmode\lower.7ex\copy\errorbox} 3539 3540% @pounds{} is a sterling sign, which Knuth put in the CM italic font. 3541% 3542\def\pounds{{\it\$}} 3543 3544% @euro{} comes from a separate font, depending on the current style. 3545% We use the free feym* fonts from the eurosym package by Henrik 3546% Theiling, which support regular, slanted, bold and bold slanted (and 3547% "outlined" (blackboard board, sort of) versions, which we don't need). 3548% It is available from http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/fonts/eurosym. 3549% 3550% Although only regular is the truly official Euro symbol, we ignore 3551% that. The Euro is designed to be slightly taller than the regular 3552% font height. 3553% 3554% feymr - regular 3555% feymo - slanted 3556% feybr - bold 3557% feybo - bold slanted 3558% 3559% There is no good (free) typewriter version, to my knowledge. 3560% A feymr10 euro is ~7.3pt wide, while a normal cmtt10 char is ~5.25pt wide. 3561% Hmm. 3562% 3563% Also doesn't work in math. Do we need to do math with euro symbols? 3564% Hope not. 3565% 3566% 3567\def\euro{{\eurofont e}} 3568\def\eurofont{% 3569 % We set the font at each command, rather than predefining it in 3570 % \textfonts and the other font-switching commands, so that 3571 % installations which never need the symbol don't have to have the 3572 % font installed. 3573 % 3574 % There is only one designed size (nominal 10pt), so we always scale 3575 % that to the current nominal size. 3576 % 3577 % By the way, simply using "at 1em" works for cmr10 and the like, but 3578 % does not work for cmbx10 and other extended/shrunken fonts. 3579 % 3580 \def\eurosize{\csname\curfontsize nominalsize\endcsname}% 3581 % 3582 \ifx\curfontstyle\bfstylename 3583 % bold: 3584 \font\thiseurofont = \ifusingit{feybo10}{feybr10} at \eurosize 3585 \else 3586 % regular: 3587 \font\thiseurofont = \ifusingit{feymo10}{feymr10} at \eurosize 3588 \fi 3589 \thiseurofont 3590} 3591 3592% Glyphs from the EC fonts. We don't use \let for the aliases, because 3593% sometimes we redefine the original macro, and the alias should reflect 3594% the redefinition. 3595% 3596% Use LaTeX names for the Icelandic letters. 3597\def\DH{{\ecfont \char"D0}} % Eth 3598\def\dh{{\ecfont \char"F0}} % eth 3599\def\TH{{\ecfont \char"DE}} % Thorn 3600\def\th{{\ecfont \char"FE}} % thorn 3601% 3602\def\guillemetleft{{\ecfont \char"13}} 3603\def\guillemotleft{\guillemetleft} 3604\def\guillemetright{{\ecfont \char"14}} 3605\def\guillemotright{\guillemetright} 3606\def\guilsinglleft{{\ecfont \char"0E}} 3607\def\guilsinglright{{\ecfont \char"0F}} 3608\def\quotedblbase{{\ecfont \char"12}} 3609\def\quotesinglbase{{\ecfont \char"0D}} 3610% 3611% This positioning is not perfect (see the ogonek LaTeX package), but 3612% we have the precomposed glyphs for the most common cases. We put the 3613% tests to use those glyphs in the single \ogonek macro so we have fewer 3614% dummy definitions to worry about for index entries, etc. 3615% 3616% ogonek is also used with other letters in Lithuanian (IOU), but using 3617% the precomposed glyphs for those is not so easy since they aren't in 3618% the same EC font. 3619\def\ogonek#1{{% 3620 \def\temp{#1}% 3621 \ifx\temp\macrocharA\Aogonek 3622 \else\ifx\temp\macrochara\aogonek 3623 \else\ifx\temp\macrocharE\Eogonek 3624 \else\ifx\temp\macrochare\eogonek 3625 \else 3626 \ecfont \setbox0=\hbox{#1}% 3627 \ifdim\ht0=1ex\accent"0C #1% 3628 \else\ooalign{\unhbox0\crcr\hidewidth\char"0C \hidewidth}% 3629 \fi 3630 \fi\fi\fi\fi 3631 }% 3632} 3633\def\Aogonek{{\ecfont \char"81}}\def\macrocharA{A} 3634\def\aogonek{{\ecfont \char"A1}}\def\macrochara{a} 3635\def\Eogonek{{\ecfont \char"86}}\def\macrocharE{E} 3636\def\eogonek{{\ecfont \char"A6}}\def\macrochare{e} 3637% 3638% Use the European Computer Modern fonts (cm-super in outline format) 3639% for non-CM glyphs. That is ec* for regular text and tc* for the text 3640% companion symbols (LaTeX TS1 encoding). Both are part of the ec 3641% package and follow the same conventions. 3642% 3643\def\ecfont{\etcfont{e}} 3644\def\tcfont{\etcfont{t}} 3645% 3646\def\etcfont#1{% 3647 % We can't distinguish serif/sans and italic/slanted, but this 3648 % is used for crude hacks anyway (like adding French and German 3649 % quotes to documents typeset with CM, where we lose kerning), so 3650 % hopefully nobody will notice/care. 3651 \edef\ecsize{\csname\curfontsize ecsize\endcsname}% 3652 \edef\nominalsize{\csname\curfontsize nominalsize\endcsname}% 3653 \ifmonospace 3654 % typewriter: 3655 \font\thisecfont = #1ctt\ecsize \space at \nominalsize 3656 \else 3657 \ifx\curfontstyle\bfstylename 3658 % bold: 3659 \font\thisecfont = #1cb\ifusingit{i}{x}\ecsize \space at \nominalsize 3660 \else 3661 % regular: 3662 \font\thisecfont = #1c\ifusingit{ti}{rm}\ecsize \space at \nominalsize 3663 \fi 3664 \fi 3665 \thisecfont 3666} 3667 3668% @registeredsymbol - R in a circle. The font for the R should really 3669% be smaller yet, but lllsize is the best we can do for now. 3670% Adapted from the plain.tex definition of \copyright. 3671% 3672\def\registeredsymbol{% 3673 $^{{\ooalign{\hfil\raise.07ex\hbox{\switchtolllsize R}% 3674 \hfil\crcr\Orb}}% 3675 }$% 3676} 3677 3678% @textdegree - the normal degrees sign. 3679% 3680\def\textdegree{$^\circ$} 3681 3682% Laurent Siebenmann reports \Orb undefined with: 3683% Textures 1.7.7 (preloaded format=plain 93.10.14) (68K) 16 APR 2004 02:38 3684% so we'll define it if necessary. 3685% 3686\ifx\Orb\thisisundefined 3687\def\Orb{\mathhexbox20D} 3688\fi 3689 3690% Quotes. 3691\chardef\quotedblleft="5C 3692\chardef\quotedblright=`\" 3693\chardef\quoteleft=`\` 3694\chardef\quoteright=`\' 3695 3696 3697\message{page headings,} 3698 3699\newskip\titlepagetopglue \titlepagetopglue = 1.5in 3700\newskip\titlepagebottomglue \titlepagebottomglue = 2pc 3701 3702% First the title page. Must do @settitle before @titlepage. 3703\newif\ifseenauthor 3704\newif\iffinishedtitlepage 3705 3706% @setcontentsaftertitlepage used to do an implicit @contents or 3707% @shortcontents after @end titlepage, but it is now obsolete. 3708\def\setcontentsaftertitlepage{% 3709 \errmessage{@setcontentsaftertitlepage has been removed as a Texinfo 3710 command; move your @contents command if you want the contents 3711 after the title page.}}% 3712\def\setshortcontentsaftertitlepage{% 3713 \errmessage{@setshortcontentsaftertitlepage has been removed as a Texinfo 3714 command; move your @shortcontents and @contents commands if you 3715 want the contents after the title page.}}% 3716 3717\parseargdef\shorttitlepage{% 3718 \begingroup \hbox{}\vskip 1.5in \chaprm \centerline{#1}% 3719 \endgroup\page\hbox{}\page} 3720 3721\envdef\titlepage{% 3722 % Open one extra group, as we want to close it in the middle of \Etitlepage. 3723 \begingroup 3724 \parindent=0pt \textfonts 3725 % Leave some space at the very top of the page. 3726 \vglue\titlepagetopglue 3727 % No rule at page bottom unless we print one at the top with @title. 3728 \finishedtitlepagetrue 3729 % 3730 % Most title ``pages'' are actually two pages long, with space 3731 % at the top of the second. We don't want the ragged left on the second. 3732 \let\oldpage = \page 3733 \def\page{% 3734 \iffinishedtitlepage\else 3735 \finishtitlepage 3736 \fi 3737 \let\page = \oldpage 3738 \page 3739 \null 3740 }% 3741} 3742 3743\def\Etitlepage{% 3744 \iffinishedtitlepage\else 3745 \finishtitlepage 3746 \fi 3747 % It is important to do the page break before ending the group, 3748 % because the headline and footline are only empty inside the group. 3749 % If we use the new definition of \page, we always get a blank page 3750 % after the title page, which we certainly don't want. 3751 \oldpage 3752 \endgroup 3753 % 3754 % Need this before the \...aftertitlepage checks so that if they are 3755 % in effect the toc pages will come out with page numbers. 3756 \HEADINGSon 3757} 3758 3759\def\finishtitlepage{% 3760 \vskip4pt \hrule height 2pt width \hsize 3761 \vskip\titlepagebottomglue 3762 \finishedtitlepagetrue 3763} 3764 3765% Settings used for typesetting titles: no hyphenation, no indentation, 3766% don't worry much about spacing, ragged right. This should be used 3767% inside a \vbox, and fonts need to be set appropriately first. \par should 3768% be specified before the end of the \vbox, since a vbox is a group. 3769% 3770\def\raggedtitlesettings{% 3771 \rm 3772 \hyphenpenalty=10000 3773 \parindent=0pt 3774 \tolerance=5000 3775 \ptexraggedright 3776} 3777 3778% Macros to be used within @titlepage: 3779 3780\let\subtitlerm=\rmfont 3781\def\subtitlefont{\subtitlerm \normalbaselineskip = 13pt \normalbaselines} 3782 3783\parseargdef\title{% 3784 \checkenv\titlepage 3785 \vbox{\titlefonts \raggedtitlesettings #1\par}% 3786 % print a rule at the page bottom also. 3787 \finishedtitlepagefalse 3788 \vskip4pt \hrule height 4pt width \hsize \vskip4pt 3789} 3790 3791\parseargdef\subtitle{% 3792 \checkenv\titlepage 3793 {\subtitlefont \rightline{#1}}% 3794} 3795 3796% @author should come last, but may come many times. 3797% It can also be used inside @quotation. 3798% 3799\parseargdef\author{% 3800 \def\temp{\quotation}% 3801 \ifx\thisenv\temp 3802 \def\quotationauthor{#1}% printed in \Equotation. 3803 \else 3804 \checkenv\titlepage 3805 \ifseenauthor\else \vskip 0pt plus 1filll \seenauthortrue \fi 3806 {\secfonts\rm \leftline{#1}}% 3807 \fi 3808} 3809 3810 3811% Set up page headings and footings. 3812 3813\let\thispage=\folio 3814 3815\newtoks\evenheadline % headline on even pages 3816\newtoks\oddheadline % headline on odd pages 3817\newtoks\evenfootline % footline on even pages 3818\newtoks\oddfootline % footline on odd pages 3819 3820% Now make \makeheadline and \makefootline in Plain TeX use those variables 3821\headline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddheadline 3822 \else \the\evenheadline \fi}} 3823\footline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddfootline 3824 \else \the\evenfootline \fi}\HEADINGShook} 3825\let\HEADINGShook=\relax 3826 3827% Commands to set those variables. 3828% For example, this is what @headings on does 3829% @evenheading @thistitle|@thispage|@thischapter 3830% @oddheading @thischapter|@thispage|@thistitle 3831% @evenfooting @thisfile|| 3832% @oddfooting ||@thisfile 3833 3834 3835\def\evenheading{\parsearg\evenheadingxxx} 3836\def\evenheadingxxx #1{\evenheadingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish} 3837\def\evenheadingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{% 3838\global\evenheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}} 3839 3840\def\oddheading{\parsearg\oddheadingxxx} 3841\def\oddheadingxxx #1{\oddheadingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish} 3842\def\oddheadingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{% 3843\global\oddheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}} 3844 3845\parseargdef\everyheading{\oddheadingxxx{#1}\evenheadingxxx{#1}}% 3846 3847\def\evenfooting{\parsearg\evenfootingxxx} 3848\def\evenfootingxxx #1{\evenfootingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish} 3849\def\evenfootingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{% 3850\global\evenfootline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}} 3851 3852\def\oddfooting{\parsearg\oddfootingxxx} 3853\def\oddfootingxxx #1{\oddfootingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish} 3854\def\oddfootingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{% 3855 \global\oddfootline = {\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}% 3856 % 3857 % Leave some space for the footline. Hopefully ok to assume 3858 % @evenfooting will not be used by itself. 3859 \global\advance\txipageheight by -12pt 3860 \global\advance\vsize by -12pt 3861} 3862 3863\parseargdef\everyfooting{\oddfootingxxx{#1}\evenfootingxxx{#1}} 3864 3865% @evenheadingmarks top \thischapter <- chapter at the top of a page 3866% @evenheadingmarks bottom \thischapter <- chapter at the bottom of a page 3867% 3868% The same set of arguments for: 3869% 3870% @oddheadingmarks 3871% @evenfootingmarks 3872% @oddfootingmarks 3873% @everyheadingmarks 3874% @everyfootingmarks 3875 3876% These define \getoddheadingmarks, \getevenheadingmarks, 3877% \getoddfootingmarks, and \getevenfootingmarks, each to one of 3878% \gettopheadingmarks, \getbottomheadingmarks. 3879% 3880\def\evenheadingmarks{\headingmarks{even}{heading}} 3881\def\oddheadingmarks{\headingmarks{odd}{heading}} 3882\def\evenfootingmarks{\headingmarks{even}{footing}} 3883\def\oddfootingmarks{\headingmarks{odd}{footing}} 3884\parseargdef\everyheadingmarks{\headingmarks{even}{heading}{#1} 3885 \headingmarks{odd}{heading}{#1} } 3886\parseargdef\everyfootingmarks{\headingmarks{even}{footing}{#1} 3887 \headingmarks{odd}{footing}{#1} } 3888% #1 = even/odd, #2 = heading/footing, #3 = top/bottom. 3889\def\headingmarks#1#2#3 {% 3890 \expandafter\let\expandafter\temp \csname get#3headingmarks\endcsname 3891 \global\expandafter\let\csname get#1#2marks\endcsname \temp 3892} 3893 3894\everyheadingmarks bottom 3895\everyfootingmarks bottom 3896 3897% @headings double turns headings on for double-sided printing. 3898% @headings single turns headings on for single-sided printing. 3899% @headings off turns them off. 3900% @headings on same as @headings double, retained for compatibility. 3901% @headings after turns on double-sided headings after this page. 3902% @headings doubleafter turns on double-sided headings after this page. 3903% @headings singleafter turns on single-sided headings after this page. 3904% By default, they are off at the start of a document, 3905% and turned `on' after @end titlepage. 3906 3907\parseargdef\headings{\csname HEADINGS#1\endcsname} 3908 3909\def\headingsoff{% non-global headings elimination 3910 \evenheadline={\hfil}\evenfootline={\hfil}% 3911 \oddheadline={\hfil}\oddfootline={\hfil}% 3912} 3913 3914\def\HEADINGSoff{{\globaldefs=1 \headingsoff}} % global setting 3915\HEADINGSoff % it's the default 3916 3917% When we turn headings on, set the page number to 1. 3918% For double-sided printing, put current file name in lower left corner, 3919% chapter name on inside top of right hand pages, document 3920% title on inside top of left hand pages, and page numbers on outside top 3921% edge of all pages. 3922\def\HEADINGSdouble{% 3923\global\pageno=1 3924\global\evenfootline={\hfil} 3925\global\oddfootline={\hfil} 3926\global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}} 3927\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapterheading\hfil\folio}} 3928\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage 3929} 3930\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager 3931 3932% For single-sided printing, chapter title goes across top left of page, 3933% page number on top right. 3934\def\HEADINGSsingle{% 3935\global\pageno=1 3936\global\evenfootline={\hfil} 3937\global\oddfootline={\hfil} 3938\global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapterheading\hfil\folio}} 3939\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapterheading\hfil\folio}} 3940\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager 3941} 3942\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble} 3943 3944\def\HEADINGSafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSdoublex} 3945\let\HEADINGSdoubleafter=\HEADINGSafter 3946\def\HEADINGSdoublex{% 3947\global\evenfootline={\hfil} 3948\global\oddfootline={\hfil} 3949\global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}} 3950\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapterheading\hfil\folio}} 3951\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage 3952} 3953 3954\def\HEADINGSsingleafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSsinglex} 3955\def\HEADINGSsinglex{% 3956\global\evenfootline={\hfil} 3957\global\oddfootline={\hfil} 3958\global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapterheading\hfil\folio}} 3959\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapterheading\hfil\folio}} 3960\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager 3961} 3962 3963% Subroutines used in generating headings 3964% This produces Day Month Year style of output. 3965% Only define if not already defined, in case a txi-??.tex file has set 3966% up a different format (e.g., txi-cs.tex does this). 3967\ifx\today\thisisundefined 3968\def\today{% 3969 \number\day\space 3970 \ifcase\month 3971 \or\putwordMJan\or\putwordMFeb\or\putwordMMar\or\putwordMApr 3972 \or\putwordMMay\or\putwordMJun\or\putwordMJul\or\putwordMAug 3973 \or\putwordMSep\or\putwordMOct\or\putwordMNov\or\putwordMDec 3974 \fi 3975 \space\number\year} 3976\fi 3977 3978% @settitle line... specifies the title of the document, for headings. 3979% It generates no output of its own. 3980\def\thistitle{\putwordNoTitle} 3981\def\settitle{\parsearg{\gdef\thistitle}} 3982 3983 3984\message{tables,} 3985% Tables -- @table, @ftable, @vtable, @item(x). 3986 3987% default indentation of table text 3988\newdimen\tableindent \tableindent=.8in 3989% default indentation of @itemize and @enumerate text 3990\newdimen\itemindent \itemindent=.3in 3991% margin between end of table item and start of table text. 3992\newdimen\itemmargin \itemmargin=.1in 3993 3994% used internally for \itemindent minus \itemmargin 3995\newdimen\itemmax 3996 3997% Note @table, @ftable, and @vtable define @item, @itemx, etc., with 3998% these defs. 3999% They also define \itemindex 4000% to index the item name in whatever manner is desired (perhaps none). 4001 4002\newif\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip 4003 4004\def\itemxpar{\par\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip\nobreak\vskip-\parskip\nobreak\fi} 4005 4006\def\internalBitem{\smallbreak \parsearg\itemzzz} 4007\def\internalBitemx{\itemxpar \parsearg\itemzzz} 4008 4009\def\itemzzz #1{\begingroup % 4010 \advance\hsize by -\rightskip 4011 \advance\hsize by -\tableindent 4012 \setbox0=\hbox{\itemindicate{#1}}% 4013 \itemindex{#1}% 4014 \nobreak % This prevents a break before @itemx. 4015 % 4016 % If the item text does not fit in the space we have, put it on a line 4017 % by itself, and do not allow a page break either before or after that 4018 % line. We do not start a paragraph here because then if the next 4019 % command is, e.g., @kindex, the whatsit would get put into the 4020 % horizontal list on a line by itself, resulting in extra blank space. 4021 \ifdim \wd0>\itemmax 4022 % 4023 % Make this a paragraph so we get the \parskip glue and wrapping, 4024 % but leave it ragged-right. 4025 \begingroup 4026 \advance\leftskip by-\tableindent 4027 \advance\hsize by\tableindent 4028 \advance\rightskip by0pt plus1fil\relax 4029 \leavevmode\unhbox0\par 4030 \endgroup 4031 % 4032 % We're going to be starting a paragraph, but we don't want the 4033 % \parskip glue -- logically it's part of the @item we just started. 4034 \nobreak \vskip-\parskip 4035 % 4036 % Stop a page break at the \parskip glue coming up. However, if 4037 % what follows is an environment such as @example, there will be no 4038 % \parskip glue; then the negative vskip we just inserted would 4039 % cause the example and the item to crash together. So we use this 4040 % bizarre value of 10001 as a signal to \aboveenvbreak to insert 4041 % \parskip glue after all. Section titles are handled this way also. 4042 % 4043 \penalty 10001 4044 \endgroup 4045 \itemxneedsnegativevskipfalse 4046 \else 4047 % The item text fits into the space. Start a paragraph, so that the 4048 % following text (if any) will end up on the same line. 4049 \noindent 4050 % Do this with kerns and \unhbox so that if there is a footnote in 4051 % the item text, it can migrate to the main vertical list and 4052 % eventually be printed. 4053 \nobreak\kern-\tableindent 4054 \dimen0 = \itemmax \advance\dimen0 by \itemmargin \advance\dimen0 by -\wd0 4055 \unhbox0 4056 \nobreak\kern\dimen0 4057 \endgroup 4058 \itemxneedsnegativevskiptrue 4059 \fi 4060} 4061 4062\def\item{\errmessage{@item while not in a list environment}} 4063\def\itemx{\errmessage{@itemx while not in a list environment}} 4064 4065% @table, @ftable, @vtable. 4066\envdef\table{% 4067 \let\itemindex\gobble 4068 \tablecheck{table}% 4069} 4070\envdef\ftable{% 4071 \def\itemindex ##1{\doind {fn}{\code{##1}}}% 4072 \tablecheck{ftable}% 4073} 4074\envdef\vtable{% 4075 \def\itemindex ##1{\doind {vr}{\code{##1}}}% 4076 \tablecheck{vtable}% 4077} 4078\def\tablecheck#1{% 4079 \ifnum \the\catcode`\^^M=\active 4080 \endgroup 4081 \errmessage{This command won't work in this context; perhaps the problem is 4082 that we are \inenvironment\thisenv}% 4083 \def\next{\doignore{#1}}% 4084 \else 4085 \let\next\tablex 4086 \fi 4087 \next 4088} 4089\def\tablex#1{% 4090 \def\itemindicate{#1}% 4091 \parsearg\tabley 4092} 4093\def\tabley#1{% 4094 {% 4095 \makevalueexpandable 4096 \edef\temp{\noexpand\tablez #1\space\space\space}% 4097 \expandafter 4098 }\temp \endtablez 4099} 4100\def\tablez #1 #2 #3 #4\endtablez{% 4101 \aboveenvbreak 4102 \ifnum 0#1>0 \advance \leftskip by #1\mil \fi 4103 \ifnum 0#2>0 \tableindent=#2\mil \fi 4104 \ifnum 0#3>0 \advance \rightskip by #3\mil \fi 4105 \itemmax=\tableindent 4106 \advance \itemmax by -\itemmargin 4107 \advance \leftskip by \tableindent 4108 \exdentamount=\tableindent 4109 \parindent = 0pt 4110 \parskip = \smallskipamount 4111 \ifdim \parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi 4112 \let\item = \internalBitem 4113 \let\itemx = \internalBitemx 4114} 4115\def\Etable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak} 4116\let\Eftable\Etable 4117\let\Evtable\Etable 4118\let\Eitemize\Etable 4119\let\Eenumerate\Etable 4120 4121% This is the counter used by @enumerate, which is really @itemize 4122 4123\newcount \itemno 4124 4125\envdef\itemize{\parsearg\doitemize} 4126 4127\def\doitemize#1{% 4128 \aboveenvbreak 4129 \itemmax=\itemindent 4130 \advance\itemmax by -\itemmargin 4131 \advance\leftskip by \itemindent 4132 \exdentamount=\itemindent 4133 \parindent=0pt 4134 \parskip=\smallskipamount 4135 \ifdim\parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi 4136 % 4137 % Try typesetting the item mark so that if the document erroneously says 4138 % something like @itemize @samp (intending @table), there's an error 4139 % right away at the @itemize. It's not the best error message in the 4140 % world, but it's better than leaving it to the @item. This means if 4141 % the user wants an empty mark, they have to say @w{} not just @w. 4142 \def\itemcontents{#1}% 4143 \setbox0 = \hbox{\itemcontents}% 4144 % 4145 % @itemize with no arg is equivalent to @itemize @bullet. 4146 \ifx\itemcontents\empty\def\itemcontents{\bullet}\fi 4147 % 4148 \let\item=\itemizeitem 4149} 4150 4151% Definition of @item while inside @itemize and @enumerate. 4152% 4153\def\itemizeitem{% 4154 \advance\itemno by 1 % for enumerations 4155 {\let\par=\endgraf \smallbreak}% reasonable place to break 4156 {% 4157 % If the document has an @itemize directly after a section title, a 4158 % \nobreak will be last on the list, and \sectionheading will have 4159 % done a \vskip-\parskip. In that case, we don't want to zero 4160 % parskip, or the item text will crash with the heading. On the 4161 % other hand, when there is normal text preceding the item (as there 4162 % usually is), we do want to zero parskip, or there would be too much 4163 % space. In that case, we won't have a \nobreak before. At least 4164 % that's the theory. 4165 \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 \parskip=0in \fi 4166 \noindent 4167 \hbox to 0pt{\hss \itemcontents \kern\itemmargin}% 4168 % 4169 \ifinner\else 4170 \vadjust{\penalty 1200}% not good to break after first line of item. 4171 \fi 4172 % We can be in inner vertical mode in a footnote, although an 4173 % @itemize looks awful there. 4174 }% 4175 \flushcr 4176} 4177 4178% \splitoff TOKENS\endmark defines \first to be the first token in 4179% TOKENS, and \rest to be the remainder. 4180% 4181\def\splitoff#1#2\endmark{\def\first{#1}\def\rest{#2}}% 4182 4183% Allow an optional argument of an uppercase letter, lowercase letter, 4184% or number, to specify the first label in the enumerated list. No 4185% argument is the same as `1'. 4186% 4187\envparseargdef\enumerate{\enumeratey #1 \endenumeratey} 4188\def\enumeratey #1 #2\endenumeratey{% 4189 % If we were given no argument, pretend we were given `1'. 4190 \def\thearg{#1}% 4191 \ifx\thearg\empty \def\thearg{1}\fi 4192 % 4193 % Detect if the argument is a single token. If so, it might be a 4194 % letter. Otherwise, the only valid thing it can be is a number. 4195 % (We will always have one token, because of the test we just made. 4196 % This is a good thing, since \splitoff doesn't work given nothing at 4197 % all -- the first parameter is undelimited.) 4198 \expandafter\splitoff\thearg\endmark 4199 \ifx\rest\empty 4200 % Only one token in the argument. It could still be anything. 4201 % A ``lowercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is nonzero. 4202 % An ``uppercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is both nonzero, and 4203 % not equal to itself. 4204 % Otherwise, we assume it's a number. 4205 % 4206 % We need the \relax at the end of the \ifnum lines to stop TeX from 4207 % continuing to look for a <number>. 4208 % 4209 \ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=0\relax 4210 \numericenumerate % a number (we hope) 4211 \else 4212 % It's a letter. 4213 \ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=\expandafter`\thearg\relax 4214 \lowercaseenumerate % lowercase letter 4215 \else 4216 \uppercaseenumerate % uppercase letter 4217 \fi 4218 \fi 4219 \else 4220 % Multiple tokens in the argument. We hope it's a number. 4221 \numericenumerate 4222 \fi 4223} 4224 4225% An @enumerate whose labels are integers. The starting integer is 4226% given in \thearg. 4227% 4228\def\numericenumerate{% 4229 \itemno = \thearg 4230 \startenumeration{\the\itemno}% 4231} 4232 4233% The starting (lowercase) letter is in \thearg. 4234\def\lowercaseenumerate{% 4235 \itemno = \expandafter`\thearg 4236 \startenumeration{% 4237 % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet. 4238 \ifnum\itemno=0 4239 \errmessage{No more lowercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger 4240 alphabet}% 4241 \fi 4242 \char\lccode\itemno 4243 }% 4244} 4245 4246% The starting (uppercase) letter is in \thearg. 4247\def\uppercaseenumerate{% 4248 \itemno = \expandafter`\thearg 4249 \startenumeration{% 4250 % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet. 4251 \ifnum\itemno=0 4252 \errmessage{No more uppercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger 4253 alphabet} 4254 \fi 4255 \char\uccode\itemno 4256 }% 4257} 4258 4259% Call \doitemize, adding a period to the first argument and supplying the 4260% common last two arguments. Also subtract one from the initial value in 4261% \itemno, since @item increments \itemno. 4262% 4263\def\startenumeration#1{% 4264 \advance\itemno by -1 4265 \doitemize{#1.}\flushcr 4266} 4267 4268% @alphaenumerate and @capsenumerate are abbreviations for giving an arg 4269% to @enumerate. 4270% 4271\def\alphaenumerate{\enumerate{a}} 4272\def\capsenumerate{\enumerate{A}} 4273\def\Ealphaenumerate{\Eenumerate} 4274\def\Ecapsenumerate{\Eenumerate} 4275 4276 4277% @multitable macros 4278% Amy Hendrickson, 8/18/94, 3/6/96 4279% 4280% @multitable ... @end multitable will make as many columns as desired. 4281% Contents of each column will wrap at width given in preamble. Width 4282% can be specified either with sample text given in a template line, 4283% or in percent of \hsize, the current width of text on page. 4284 4285% Table can continue over pages but will only break between lines. 4286 4287% To make preamble: 4288% 4289% Either define widths of columns in terms of percent of \hsize: 4290% @multitable @columnfractions .25 .3 .45 4291% @item ... 4292% 4293% Numbers following @columnfractions are the percent of the total 4294% current hsize to be used for each column. You may use as many 4295% columns as desired. 4296 4297 4298% Or use a template: 4299% @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template} 4300% @item ... 4301% using the widest term desired in each column. 4302 4303% Each new table line starts with @item, each subsequent new column 4304% starts with @tab. Empty columns may be produced by supplying @tab's 4305% with nothing between them for as many times as empty columns are needed, 4306% ie, @tab@tab@tab will produce two empty columns. 4307 4308% @item, @tab do not need to be on their own lines, but it will not hurt 4309% if they are. 4310 4311% Sample multitable: 4312 4313% @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template} 4314% @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff @tab third col 4315% @item 4316% first col stuff 4317% @tab 4318% second col stuff 4319% @tab 4320% third col 4321% @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff 4322% @tab Many paragraphs of text may be used in any column. 4323% 4324% They will wrap at the width determined by the template. 4325% @item@tab@tab This will be in third column. 4326% @end multitable 4327 4328% Default dimensions may be reset by user. 4329% @multitableparskip is vertical space between paragraphs in table. 4330% @multitableparindent is paragraph indent in table. 4331% @multitablecolmargin is horizontal space to be left between columns. 4332% @multitablelinespace is space to leave between table items, baseline 4333% to baseline. 4334% 0pt means it depends on current normal line spacing. 4335% 4336\newskip\multitableparskip 4337\newskip\multitableparindent 4338\newdimen\multitablecolspace 4339\newskip\multitablelinespace 4340\multitableparskip=0pt 4341\multitableparindent=6pt 4342\multitablecolspace=12pt 4343\multitablelinespace=0pt 4344 4345% Macros used to set up halign preamble: 4346% 4347\let\endsetuptable\relax 4348\def\xendsetuptable{\endsetuptable} 4349\let\columnfractions\relax 4350\def\xcolumnfractions{\columnfractions} 4351\newif\ifsetpercent 4352 4353% #1 is the @columnfraction, usually a decimal number like .5, but might 4354% be just 1. We just use it, whatever it is. 4355% 4356\def\pickupwholefraction#1 {% 4357 \global\advance\colcount by 1 4358 \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{#1\hsize}% 4359 \setuptable 4360} 4361 4362\newcount\colcount 4363\def\setuptable#1{% 4364 \def\firstarg{#1}% 4365 \ifx\firstarg\xendsetuptable 4366 \let\go = \relax 4367 \else 4368 \ifx\firstarg\xcolumnfractions 4369 \global\setpercenttrue 4370 \else 4371 \ifsetpercent 4372 \let\go\pickupwholefraction 4373 \else 4374 \global\advance\colcount by 1 4375 \setbox0=\hbox{#1\unskip\space}% Add a normal word space as a 4376 % separator; typically that is always in the input, anyway. 4377 \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{\the\wd0}% 4378 \fi 4379 \fi 4380 \ifx\go\pickupwholefraction 4381 % Put the argument back for the \pickupwholefraction call, so 4382 % we'll always have a period there to be parsed. 4383 \def\go{\pickupwholefraction#1}% 4384 \else 4385 \let\go = \setuptable 4386 \fi% 4387 \fi 4388 \go 4389} 4390 4391% multitable-only commands. 4392% 4393% @headitem starts a heading row, which we typeset in bold. Assignments 4394% have to be global since we are inside the implicit group of an 4395% alignment entry. \everycr below resets \everytab so we don't have to 4396% undo it ourselves. 4397\def\headitemfont{\b}% for people to use in the template row; not changeable 4398\def\headitem{% 4399 \checkenv\multitable 4400 \crcr 4401 \gdef\headitemcrhook{\nobreak}% attempt to avoid page break after headings 4402 \global\everytab={\bf}% can't use \headitemfont since the parsing differs 4403 \the\everytab % for the first item 4404}% 4405% 4406% default for tables with no headings. 4407\let\headitemcrhook=\relax 4408% 4409% A \tab used to include \hskip1sp. But then the space in a template 4410% line is not enough. That is bad. So let's go back to just `&' until 4411% we again encounter the problem the 1sp was intended to solve. 4412% --karl, nathan@acm.org, 20apr99. 4413\def\tab{\checkenv\multitable &\the\everytab}% 4414 4415% @multitable ... @end multitable definitions: 4416% 4417\newtoks\everytab % insert after every tab. 4418% 4419\envdef\multitable{% 4420 \vskip\parskip 4421 \startsavinginserts 4422 % 4423 % @item within a multitable starts a normal row. 4424 % We use \def instead of \let so that if one of the multitable entries 4425 % contains an @itemize, we don't choke on the \item (seen as \crcr aka 4426 % \endtemplate) expanding \doitemize. 4427 \def\item{\crcr}% 4428 % 4429 \tolerance=9500 4430 \hbadness=9500 4431 \setmultitablespacing 4432 \parskip=\multitableparskip 4433 \parindent=\multitableparindent 4434 \overfullrule=0pt 4435 \global\colcount=0 4436 % 4437 \everycr = {% 4438 \noalign{% 4439 \global\everytab={}% Reset from possible headitem. 4440 \global\colcount=0 % Reset the column counter. 4441 % 4442 % Check for saved footnotes, etc.: 4443 \checkinserts 4444 % 4445 % Perhaps a \nobreak, then reset: 4446 \headitemcrhook 4447 \global\let\headitemcrhook=\relax 4448 }% 4449 }% 4450 % 4451 \parsearg\domultitable 4452} 4453\def\domultitable#1{% 4454 % To parse everything between @multitable and @item: 4455 \setuptable#1 \endsetuptable 4456 % 4457 % This preamble sets up a generic column definition, which will 4458 % be used as many times as user calls for columns. 4459 % \vtop will set a single line and will also let text wrap and 4460 % continue for many paragraphs if desired. 4461 \halign\bgroup &% 4462 \global\advance\colcount by 1 4463 \multistrut 4464 \vtop{% 4465 % Use the current \colcount to find the correct column width: 4466 \hsize=\expandafter\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname 4467 % 4468 % In order to keep entries from bumping into each other 4469 % we will add a \leftskip of \multitablecolspace to all columns after 4470 % the first one. 4471 % 4472 % If a template has been used, we will add \multitablecolspace 4473 % to the width of each template entry. 4474 % 4475 % If the user has set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize we will 4476 % use that dimension as the width of the column, and the \leftskip 4477 % will keep entries from bumping into each other. Table will start at 4478 % left margin and final column will justify at right margin. 4479 % 4480 % Make sure we don't inherit \rightskip from the outer environment. 4481 \rightskip=0pt 4482 \ifnum\colcount=1 4483 % The first column will be indented with the surrounding text. 4484 \advance\hsize by\leftskip 4485 \else 4486 \ifsetpercent \else 4487 % If user has not set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize 4488 % we will advance \hsize by \multitablecolspace. 4489 \advance\hsize by \multitablecolspace 4490 \fi 4491 % In either case we will make \leftskip=\multitablecolspace: 4492 \leftskip=\multitablecolspace 4493 \fi 4494 % Ignoring space at the beginning and end avoids an occasional spurious 4495 % blank line, when TeX decides to break the line at the space before the 4496 % box from the multistrut, so the strut ends up on a line by itself. 4497 % For example: 4498 % @multitable @columnfractions .11 .89 4499 % @item @code{#} 4500 % @tab Legal holiday which is valid in major parts of the whole country. 4501 % Is automatically provided with highlighting sequences respectively 4502 % marking characters. 4503 \noindent\ignorespaces##\unskip\multistrut 4504 }\cr 4505} 4506\def\Emultitable{% 4507 \crcr 4508 \egroup % end the \halign 4509 \global\setpercentfalse 4510} 4511 4512\def\setmultitablespacing{% 4513 \def\multistrut{\strut}% just use the standard line spacing 4514 % 4515 % Compute \multitablelinespace (if not defined by user) for use in 4516 % \multitableparskip calculation. We used define \multistrut based on 4517 % this, but (ironically) that caused the spacing to be off. 4518 % See bug-texinfo report from Werner Lemberg, 31 Oct 2004 12:52:20 +0100. 4519\ifdim\multitablelinespace=0pt 4520\setbox0=\vbox{X}\global\multitablelinespace=\the\baselineskip 4521\global\advance\multitablelinespace by-\ht0 4522\fi 4523% Test to see if parskip is larger than space between lines of 4524% table. If not, do nothing. 4525% If so, set to same dimension as multitablelinespace. 4526\ifdim\multitableparskip>\multitablelinespace 4527\global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace 4528\global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt % to keep parskip somewhat smaller 4529 % than skip between lines in the table. 4530\fi% 4531\ifdim\multitableparskip=0pt 4532\global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace 4533\global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt % to keep parskip somewhat smaller 4534 % than skip between lines in the table. 4535\fi} 4536 4537 4538\message{conditionals,} 4539 4540% @iftex, @ifnotdocbook, @ifnothtml, @ifnotinfo, @ifnotplaintext, 4541% @ifnotxml always succeed. They currently do nothing; we don't 4542% attempt to check whether the conditionals are properly nested. But we 4543% have to remember that they are conditionals, so that @end doesn't 4544% attempt to close an environment group. 4545% 4546\def\makecond#1{% 4547 \expandafter\let\csname #1\endcsname = \relax 4548 \expandafter\let\csname iscond.#1\endcsname = 1 4549} 4550\makecond{iftex} 4551\makecond{ifnotdocbook} 4552\makecond{ifnothtml} 4553\makecond{ifnotinfo} 4554\makecond{ifnotplaintext} 4555\makecond{ifnotxml} 4556 4557% Ignore @ignore, @ifhtml, @ifinfo, and the like. 4558% 4559\def\direntry{\doignore{direntry}} 4560\def\documentdescription{\doignore{documentdescription}} 4561\def\docbook{\doignore{docbook}} 4562\def\html{\doignore{html}} 4563\def\ifdocbook{\doignore{ifdocbook}} 4564\def\ifhtml{\doignore{ifhtml}} 4565\def\ifinfo{\doignore{ifinfo}} 4566\def\ifnottex{\doignore{ifnottex}} 4567\def\ifplaintext{\doignore{ifplaintext}} 4568\def\ifxml{\doignore{ifxml}} 4569\def\ignore{\doignore{ignore}} 4570\def\menu{\doignore{menu}} 4571\def\xml{\doignore{xml}} 4572 4573% Ignore text until a line `@end #1', keeping track of nested conditionals. 4574% 4575% A count to remember the depth of nesting. 4576\newcount\doignorecount 4577 4578\def\doignore#1{\begingroup 4579 % Scan in ``verbatim'' mode: 4580 \obeylines 4581 \catcode`\@ = \other 4582 \catcode`\{ = \other 4583 \catcode`\} = \other 4584 % 4585 % Make sure that spaces turn into tokens that match what \doignoretext wants. 4586 \spaceisspace 4587 % 4588 % Count number of #1's that we've seen. 4589 \doignorecount = 0 4590 % 4591 % Swallow text until we reach the matching `@end #1'. 4592 \dodoignore{#1}% 4593} 4594 4595{ \catcode`_=11 % We want to use \_STOP_ which cannot appear in texinfo source. 4596 \obeylines % 4597 % 4598 \gdef\dodoignore#1{% 4599 % #1 contains the command name as a string, e.g., `ifinfo'. 4600 % 4601 % Define a command to find the next `@end #1'. 4602 \long\def\doignoretext##1^^M@end #1{% 4603 \doignoretextyyy##1^^M@#1\_STOP_}% 4604 % 4605 % And this command to find another #1 command, at the beginning of a 4606 % line. (Otherwise, we would consider a line `@c @ifset', for 4607 % example, to count as an @ifset for nesting.) 4608 \long\def\doignoretextyyy##1^^M@#1##2\_STOP_{\doignoreyyy{##2}\_STOP_}% 4609 % 4610 % And now expand that command. 4611 \doignoretext ^^M% 4612 }% 4613} 4614 4615\def\doignoreyyy#1{% 4616 \def\temp{#1}% 4617 \ifx\temp\empty % Nothing found. 4618 \let\next\doignoretextzzz 4619 \else % Found a nested condition, ... 4620 \advance\doignorecount by 1 4621 \let\next\doignoretextyyy % ..., look for another. 4622 % If we're here, #1 ends with ^^M\ifinfo (for example). 4623 \fi 4624 \next #1% the token \_STOP_ is present just after this macro. 4625} 4626 4627% We have to swallow the remaining "\_STOP_". 4628% 4629\def\doignoretextzzz#1{% 4630 \ifnum\doignorecount = 0 % We have just found the outermost @end. 4631 \let\next\enddoignore 4632 \else % Still inside a nested condition. 4633 \advance\doignorecount by -1 4634 \let\next\doignoretext % Look for the next @end. 4635 \fi 4636 \next 4637} 4638 4639% Finish off ignored text. 4640{ \obeylines% 4641 % Ignore anything after the last `@end #1'; this matters in verbatim 4642 % environments, where otherwise the newline after an ignored conditional 4643 % would result in a blank line in the output. 4644 \gdef\enddoignore#1^^M{\endgroup\ignorespaces}% 4645} 4646 4647 4648% @set VAR sets the variable VAR to an empty value. 4649% @set VAR REST-OF-LINE sets VAR to the value REST-OF-LINE. 4650% 4651% Since we want to separate VAR from REST-OF-LINE (which might be 4652% empty), we can't just use \parsearg; we have to insert a space of our 4653% own to delimit the rest of the line, and then take it out again if we 4654% didn't need it. 4655% We rely on the fact that \parsearg sets \catcode`\ =10. 4656% 4657\parseargdef\set{\setyyy#1 \endsetyyy} 4658\def\setyyy#1 #2\endsetyyy{% 4659 {% 4660 \makevalueexpandable 4661 \def\temp{#2}% 4662 \edef\next{\gdef\makecsname{SET#1}}% 4663 \ifx\temp\empty 4664 \next{}% 4665 \else 4666 \setzzz#2\endsetzzz 4667 \fi 4668 }% 4669} 4670% Remove the trailing space \setxxx inserted. 4671\def\setzzz#1 \endsetzzz{\next{#1}} 4672 4673% @clear VAR clears (i.e., unsets) the variable VAR. 4674% 4675\parseargdef\clear{% 4676 {% 4677 \makevalueexpandable 4678 \global\expandafter\let\csname SET#1\endcsname=\relax 4679 }% 4680} 4681 4682% @value{foo} gets the text saved in variable foo. 4683\def\value{\begingroup\makevalueexpandable\valuexxx} 4684\def\valuexxx#1{\expandablevalue{#1}\endgroup} 4685{ 4686 \catcode`\-=\active \catcode`\_=\active 4687 % 4688 \gdef\makevalueexpandable{% 4689 \let\value = \expandablevalue 4690 % We don't want these characters active, ... 4691 \catcode`\-=\other \catcode`\_=\other 4692 % ..., but we might end up with active ones in the argument if 4693 % we're called from @code, as @code{@value{foo-bar_}}, though. 4694 % So \let them to their normal equivalents. 4695 \let-\normaldash \let_\normalunderscore 4696 } 4697} 4698 4699% We have this subroutine so that we can handle at least some @value's 4700% properly in indexes (we call \makevalueexpandable in \indexdummies). 4701% The command has to be fully expandable (if the variable is set), since 4702% the result winds up in the index file. This means that if the 4703% variable's value contains other Texinfo commands, it's almost certain 4704% it will fail (although perhaps we could fix that with sufficient work 4705% to do a one-level expansion on the result, instead of complete). 4706% 4707% Unfortunately, this has the consequence that when _ is in the *value* 4708% of an @set, it does not print properly in the roman fonts (get the cmr 4709% dot accent at position 126 instead). No fix comes to mind, and it's 4710% been this way since 2003 or earlier, so just ignore it. 4711% 4712\def\expandablevalue#1{% 4713 \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax 4714 {[No value for ``#1'']}% 4715 \message{Variable `#1', used in @value, is not set.}% 4716 \else 4717 \csname SET#1\endcsname 4718 \fi 4719} 4720 4721% Like \expandablevalue, but completely expandable (the \message in the 4722% definition above operates at the execution level of TeX). Used when 4723% writing to auxiliary files, due to the expansion that \write does. 4724% If flag is undefined, pass through an unexpanded @value command: maybe it 4725% will be set by the time it is read back in. 4726% 4727% NB flag names containing - or _ may not work here. 4728\def\dummyvalue#1{% 4729 \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax 4730 \noexpand\value{#1}% 4731 \else 4732 \csname SET#1\endcsname 4733 \fi 4734} 4735 4736% Used for @value's in index entries to form the sort key: expand the @value 4737% if possible, otherwise sort late. 4738\def\indexnofontsvalue#1{% 4739 \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax 4740 ZZZZZZZ 4741 \else 4742 \csname SET#1\endcsname 4743 \fi 4744} 4745 4746% @ifset VAR ... @end ifset reads the `...' iff VAR has been defined 4747% with @set. 4748% 4749% To get the special treatment we need for `@end ifset,' we call 4750% \makecond and then redefine. 4751% 4752\makecond{ifset} 4753\def\ifset{\parsearg{\doifset{\let\next=\ifsetfail}}} 4754\def\doifset#1#2{% 4755 {% 4756 \makevalueexpandable 4757 \let\next=\empty 4758 \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#2\endcsname\relax 4759 #1% If not set, redefine \next. 4760 \fi 4761 \expandafter 4762 }\next 4763} 4764\def\ifsetfail{\doignore{ifset}} 4765 4766% @ifclear VAR ... @end executes the `...' iff VAR has never been 4767% defined with @set, or has been undefined with @clear. 4768% 4769% The `\else' inside the `\doifset' parameter is a trick to reuse the 4770% above code: if the variable is not set, do nothing, if it is set, 4771% then redefine \next to \ifclearfail. 4772% 4773\makecond{ifclear} 4774\def\ifclear{\parsearg{\doifset{\else \let\next=\ifclearfail}}} 4775\def\ifclearfail{\doignore{ifclear}} 4776 4777% @ifcommandisdefined CMD ... @end executes the `...' if CMD (written 4778% without the @) is in fact defined. We can only feasibly check at the 4779% TeX level, so something like `mathcode' is going to considered 4780% defined even though it is not a Texinfo command. 4781% 4782\makecond{ifcommanddefined} 4783\def\ifcommanddefined{\parsearg{\doifcmddefined{\let\next=\ifcmddefinedfail}}} 4784% 4785\def\doifcmddefined#1#2{{% 4786 \makevalueexpandable 4787 \let\next=\empty 4788 \expandafter\ifx\csname #2\endcsname\relax 4789 #1% If not defined, \let\next as above. 4790 \fi 4791 \expandafter 4792 }\next 4793} 4794\def\ifcmddefinedfail{\doignore{ifcommanddefined}} 4795 4796% @ifcommandnotdefined CMD ... handled similar to @ifclear above. 4797\makecond{ifcommandnotdefined} 4798\def\ifcommandnotdefined{% 4799 \parsearg{\doifcmddefined{\else \let\next=\ifcmdnotdefinedfail}}} 4800\def\ifcmdnotdefinedfail{\doignore{ifcommandnotdefined}} 4801 4802% Set the `txicommandconditionals' variable, so documents have a way to 4803% test if the @ifcommand...defined conditionals are available. 4804\set txicommandconditionals 4805 4806% @dircategory CATEGORY -- specify a category of the dir file 4807% which this file should belong to. Ignore this in TeX. 4808\let\dircategory=\comment 4809 4810% @defininfoenclose. 4811\let\definfoenclose=\comment 4812 4813 4814\message{indexing,} 4815% Index generation facilities 4816 4817% Define \newwrite to be identical to plain tex's \newwrite 4818% except not \outer, so it can be used within macros and \if's. 4819\edef\newwrite{\makecsname{ptexnewwrite}} 4820 4821% \newindex {foo} defines an index named IX. 4822% It automatically defines \IXindex such that 4823% \IXindex ...rest of line... puts an entry in the index IX. 4824% It also defines \IXindfile to be the number of the output channel for 4825% the file that accumulates this index. The file's extension is IX. 4826% The name of an index should be no more than 2 characters long 4827% for the sake of vms. 4828% 4829\def\newindex#1{% 4830 \expandafter\chardef\csname#1indfile\endcsname=0 4831 \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{% % Define @#1index 4832 \noexpand\doindex{#1}} 4833} 4834 4835% @defindex foo == \newindex{foo} 4836% 4837\def\defindex{\parsearg\newindex} 4838 4839% Define @defcodeindex, like @defindex except put all entries in @code. 4840% 4841\def\defcodeindex{\parsearg\newcodeindex} 4842% 4843\def\newcodeindex#1{% 4844 \expandafter\chardef\csname#1indfile\endcsname=0 4845 \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{% 4846 \noexpand\docodeindex{#1}}% 4847} 4848 4849% The default indices: 4850\newindex{cp}% concepts, 4851\newcodeindex{fn}% functions, 4852\newcodeindex{vr}% variables, 4853\newcodeindex{tp}% types, 4854\newcodeindex{ky}% keys 4855\newcodeindex{pg}% and programs. 4856 4857 4858% @synindex foo bar makes index foo feed into index bar. 4859% Do this instead of @defindex foo if you don't want it as a separate index. 4860% 4861% @syncodeindex foo bar similar, but put all entries made for index foo 4862% inside @code. 4863% 4864\def\synindex#1 #2 {\dosynindex\doindex{#1}{#2}} 4865\def\syncodeindex#1 #2 {\dosynindex\docodeindex{#1}{#2}} 4866 4867% #1 is \doindex or \docodeindex, #2 the index getting redefined (foo), 4868% #3 the target index (bar). 4869\def\dosynindex#1#2#3{% 4870 \requireopenindexfile{#3}% 4871 % redefine \fooindfile: 4872 \expandafter\let\expandafter\temp\expandafter=\csname#3indfile\endcsname 4873 \expandafter\let\csname#2indfile\endcsname=\temp 4874 % redefine \fooindex: 4875 \expandafter\xdef\csname#2index\endcsname{\noexpand#1{#3}}% 4876} 4877 4878% Define \doindex, the driver for all index macros. 4879% Argument #1 is generated by the calling \fooindex macro, 4880% and it is the two-letter name of the index. 4881 4882\def\doindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\doindexxxx} 4883\def\doindexxxx #1{\doind{\indexname}{#1}} 4884 4885% like the previous two, but they put @code around the argument. 4886\def\docodeindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\docodeindexxxx} 4887\def\docodeindexxxx #1{\doind{\indexname}{\code{#1}}} 4888 4889 4890% Used when writing an index entry out to an index file to prevent 4891% expansion of Texinfo commands that can appear in an index entry. 4892% 4893\def\indexdummies{% 4894 \escapechar = `\\ % use backslash in output files. 4895 \definedummyletter\@% 4896 \definedummyletter\ % 4897 % 4898 % For texindex which always views { and } as separators. 4899 \def\{{\lbracechar{}}% 4900 \def\}{\rbracechar{}}% 4901 % 4902 % Do the redefinitions. 4903 \definedummies 4904} 4905 4906% Used for the aux and toc files, where @ is the escape character. 4907% 4908\def\atdummies{% 4909 \definedummyletter\@% 4910 \definedummyletter\ % 4911 \definedummyletter\{% 4912 \definedummyletter\}% 4913 % 4914 % Do the redefinitions. 4915 \definedummies 4916 \otherbackslash 4917} 4918 4919% \definedummyword defines \#1 as \string\#1\space, thus effectively 4920% preventing its expansion. This is used only for control words, 4921% not control letters, because the \space would be incorrect for 4922% control characters, but is needed to separate the control word 4923% from whatever follows. 4924% 4925% These can be used both for control words that take an argument and 4926% those that do not. If it is followed by {arg} in the input, then 4927% that will dutifully get written to the index (or wherever). 4928% 4929% For control letters, we have \definedummyletter, which omits the 4930% space. 4931% 4932\def\definedummyword #1{\def#1{\string#1\space}}% 4933\def\definedummyletter#1{\def#1{\string#1}}% 4934\let\definedummyaccent\definedummyletter 4935 4936% Called from \indexdummies and \atdummies, to effectively prevent 4937% the expansion of commands. 4938% 4939\def\definedummies{% 4940 % 4941 \let\commondummyword\definedummyword 4942 \let\commondummyletter\definedummyletter 4943 \let\commondummyaccent\definedummyaccent 4944 \commondummiesnofonts 4945 % 4946 \definedummyletter\_% 4947 \definedummyletter\-% 4948 % 4949 % Non-English letters. 4950 \definedummyword\AA 4951 \definedummyword\AE 4952 \definedummyword\DH 4953 \definedummyword\L 4954 \definedummyword\O 4955 \definedummyword\OE 4956 \definedummyword\TH 4957 \definedummyword\aa 4958 \definedummyword\ae 4959 \definedummyword\dh 4960 \definedummyword\exclamdown 4961 \definedummyword\l 4962 \definedummyword\o 4963 \definedummyword\oe 4964 \definedummyword\ordf 4965 \definedummyword\ordm 4966 \definedummyword\questiondown 4967 \definedummyword\ss 4968 \definedummyword\th 4969 % 4970 % Although these internal commands shouldn't show up, sometimes they do. 4971 \definedummyword\bf 4972 \definedummyword\gtr 4973 \definedummyword\hat 4974 \definedummyword\less 4975 \definedummyword\sf 4976 \definedummyword\sl 4977 \definedummyword\tclose 4978 \definedummyword\tt 4979 % 4980 \definedummyword\LaTeX 4981 \definedummyword\TeX 4982 % 4983 % Assorted special characters. 4984 \definedummyword\atchar 4985 \definedummyword\arrow 4986 \definedummyword\bullet 4987 \definedummyword\comma 4988 \definedummyword\copyright 4989 \definedummyword\registeredsymbol 4990 \definedummyword\dots 4991 \definedummyword\enddots 4992 \definedummyword\entrybreak 4993 \definedummyword\equiv 4994 \definedummyword\error 4995 \definedummyword\euro 4996 \definedummyword\expansion 4997 \definedummyword\geq 4998 \definedummyword\guillemetleft 4999 \definedummyword\guillemetright 5000 \definedummyword\guilsinglleft 5001 \definedummyword\guilsinglright 5002 \definedummyword\lbracechar 5003 \definedummyword\leq 5004 \definedummyword\mathopsup 5005 \definedummyword\minus 5006 \definedummyword\ogonek 5007 \definedummyword\pounds 5008 \definedummyword\point 5009 \definedummyword\print 5010 \definedummyword\quotedblbase 5011 \definedummyword\quotedblleft 5012 \definedummyword\quotedblright 5013 \definedummyword\quoteleft 5014 \definedummyword\quoteright 5015 \definedummyword\quotesinglbase 5016 \definedummyword\rbracechar 5017 \definedummyword\result 5018 \definedummyword\sub 5019 \definedummyword\sup 5020 \definedummyword\textdegree 5021 % 5022 % We want to disable all macros so that they are not expanded by \write. 5023 \macrolist 5024 \let\value\dummyvalue 5025 % 5026 \normalturnoffactive 5027} 5028 5029% \commondummiesnofonts: common to \definedummies and \indexnofonts. 5030% Define \commondummyletter, \commondummyaccent and \commondummyword before 5031% using. Used for accents, font commands, and various control letters. 5032% 5033\def\commondummiesnofonts{% 5034 % Control letters and accents. 5035 \commondummyletter\!% 5036 \commondummyaccent\"% 5037 \commondummyaccent\'% 5038 \commondummyletter\*% 5039 \commondummyaccent\,% 5040 \commondummyletter\.% 5041 \commondummyletter\/% 5042 \commondummyletter\:% 5043 \commondummyaccent\=% 5044 \commondummyletter\?% 5045 \commondummyaccent\^% 5046 \commondummyaccent\`% 5047 \commondummyaccent\~% 5048 \commondummyword\u 5049 \commondummyword\v 5050 \commondummyword\H 5051 \commondummyword\dotaccent 5052 \commondummyword\ogonek 5053 \commondummyword\ringaccent 5054 \commondummyword\tieaccent 5055 \commondummyword\ubaraccent 5056 \commondummyword\udotaccent 5057 \commondummyword\dotless 5058 % 5059 % Texinfo font commands. 5060 \commondummyword\b 5061 \commondummyword\i 5062 \commondummyword\r 5063 \commondummyword\sansserif 5064 \commondummyword\sc 5065 \commondummyword\slanted 5066 \commondummyword\t 5067 % 5068 % Commands that take arguments. 5069 \commondummyword\abbr 5070 \commondummyword\acronym 5071 \commondummyword\anchor 5072 \commondummyword\cite 5073 \commondummyword\code 5074 \commondummyword\command 5075 \commondummyword\dfn 5076 \commondummyword\dmn 5077 \commondummyword\email 5078 \commondummyword\emph 5079 \commondummyword\env 5080 \commondummyword\file 5081 \commondummyword\image 5082 \commondummyword\indicateurl 5083 \commondummyword\inforef 5084 \commondummyword\kbd 5085 \commondummyword\key 5086 \commondummyword\math 5087 \commondummyword\option 5088 \commondummyword\pxref 5089 \commondummyword\ref 5090 \commondummyword\samp 5091 \commondummyword\strong 5092 \commondummyword\tie 5093 \commondummyword\U 5094 \commondummyword\uref 5095 \commondummyword\url 5096 \commondummyword\var 5097 \commondummyword\verb 5098 \commondummyword\w 5099 \commondummyword\xref 5100} 5101 5102% For testing: output @{ and @} in index sort strings as \{ and \}. 5103\newif\ifusebracesinindexes 5104 5105\let\indexlbrace\relax 5106\let\indexrbrace\relax 5107 5108{\catcode`\@=0 5109\catcode`\\=13 5110 @gdef@backslashdisappear{@def\{}} 5111} 5112 5113{ 5114\catcode`\<=13 5115\catcode`\-=13 5116\catcode`\`=13 5117 \gdef\indexnonalnumdisappear{% 5118 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxiindexlquoteignore\endcsname\relax\else 5119 % @set txiindexlquoteignore makes us ignore left quotes in the sort term. 5120 % (Introduced for FSFS 2nd ed.) 5121 \let`=\empty 5122 \fi 5123 % 5124 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxiindexbackslashignore\endcsname\relax\else 5125 \backslashdisappear 5126 \fi 5127 % 5128 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxiindexhyphenignore\endcsname\relax\else 5129 \def-{}% 5130 \fi 5131 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxiindexlessthanignore\endcsname\relax\else 5132 \def<{}% 5133 \fi 5134 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxiindexatsignignore\endcsname\relax\else 5135 \def\@{}% 5136 \fi 5137 } 5138 5139 \gdef\indexnonalnumreappear{% 5140 \useindexbackslash 5141 \let-\normaldash 5142 \let<\normalless 5143 \def\@{@}% 5144 } 5145} 5146 5147 5148% \indexnofonts is used when outputting the strings to sort the index 5149% by, and when constructing control sequence names. It eliminates all 5150% control sequences and just writes whatever the best ASCII sort string 5151% would be for a given command (usually its argument). 5152% 5153\def\indexnofonts{% 5154 % Accent commands should become @asis. 5155 \def\commondummyaccent##1{\let##1\asis}% 5156 % We can just ignore other control letters. 5157 \def\commondummyletter##1{\let##1\empty}% 5158 % All control words become @asis by default; overrides below. 5159 \let\commondummyword\commondummyaccent 5160 \commondummiesnofonts 5161 % 5162 % Don't no-op \tt, since it isn't a user-level command 5163 % and is used in the definitions of the active chars like <, >, |, etc. 5164 % Likewise with the other plain tex font commands. 5165 %\let\tt=\asis 5166 % 5167 \def\ { }% 5168 \def\@{@}% 5169 \def\_{\normalunderscore}% 5170 \def\-{}% @- shouldn't affect sorting 5171 % 5172 \uccode`\1=`\{ \uppercase{\def\{{1}}% 5173 \uccode`\1=`\} \uppercase{\def\}{1}}% 5174 \let\lbracechar\{% 5175 \let\rbracechar\}% 5176 % 5177 % Non-English letters. 5178 \def\AA{AA}% 5179 \def\AE{AE}% 5180 \def\DH{DZZ}% 5181 \def\L{L}% 5182 \def\OE{OE}% 5183 \def\O{O}% 5184 \def\TH{TH}% 5185 \def\aa{aa}% 5186 \def\ae{ae}% 5187 \def\dh{dzz}% 5188 \def\exclamdown{!}% 5189 \def\l{l}% 5190 \def\oe{oe}% 5191 \def\ordf{a}% 5192 \def\ordm{o}% 5193 \def\o{o}% 5194 \def\questiondown{?}% 5195 \def\ss{ss}% 5196 \def\th{th}% 5197 % 5198 \def\LaTeX{LaTeX}% 5199 \def\TeX{TeX}% 5200 % 5201 % Assorted special characters. \defglyph gives the control sequence a 5202 % definition that removes the {} that follows its use. 5203 \defglyph\atchar{@}% 5204 \defglyph\arrow{->}% 5205 \defglyph\bullet{bullet}% 5206 \defglyph\comma{,}% 5207 \defglyph\copyright{copyright}% 5208 \defglyph\dots{...}% 5209 \defglyph\enddots{...}% 5210 \defglyph\equiv{==}% 5211 \defglyph\error{error}% 5212 \defglyph\euro{euro}% 5213 \defglyph\expansion{==>}% 5214 \defglyph\geq{>=}% 5215 \defglyph\guillemetleft{<<}% 5216 \defglyph\guillemetright{>>}% 5217 \defglyph\guilsinglleft{<}% 5218 \defglyph\guilsinglright{>}% 5219 \defglyph\leq{<=}% 5220 \defglyph\lbracechar{\{}% 5221 \defglyph\minus{-}% 5222 \defglyph\point{.}% 5223 \defglyph\pounds{pounds}% 5224 \defglyph\print{-|}% 5225 \defglyph\quotedblbase{"}% 5226 \defglyph\quotedblleft{"}% 5227 \defglyph\quotedblright{"}% 5228 \defglyph\quoteleft{`}% 5229 \defglyph\quoteright{'}% 5230 \defglyph\quotesinglbase{,}% 5231 \defglyph\rbracechar{\}}% 5232 \defglyph\registeredsymbol{R}% 5233 \defglyph\result{=>}% 5234 \defglyph\textdegree{o}% 5235 % 5236 % We need to get rid of all macros, leaving only the arguments (if present). 5237 % Of course this is not nearly correct, but it is the best we can do for now. 5238 % makeinfo does not expand macros in the argument to @deffn, which ends up 5239 % writing an index entry, and texindex isn't prepared for an index sort entry 5240 % that starts with \. 5241 % 5242 % Since macro invocations are followed by braces, we can just redefine them 5243 % to take a single TeX argument. The case of a macro invocation that 5244 % goes to end-of-line is not handled. 5245 % 5246 \macrolist 5247 \let\value\indexnofontsvalue 5248} 5249\def\defglyph#1#2{\def#1##1{#2}} % see above 5250 5251 5252 5253 5254\let\SETmarginindex=\relax % put index entries in margin (undocumented)? 5255 5256% Most index entries go through here, but \dosubind is the general case. 5257% #1 is the index name, #2 is the entry text. 5258\def\doind#1#2{\dosubind{#1}{#2}{}} 5259 5260% There is also \dosubind {index}{topic}{subtopic} 5261% which makes an entry in a two-level index such as the operation index. 5262% TODO: Two-level index? Operation index? 5263 5264% Workhorse for all indexes. 5265% #1 is name of index, #2 is stuff to put there, #3 is subentry -- 5266% empty if called from \doind, as we usually are (the main exception 5267% is with most defuns, which call us directly). 5268% 5269\def\dosubind#1#2#3{% 5270 \iflinks 5271 {% 5272 \requireopenindexfile{#1}% 5273 % Store the main index entry text (including the third arg). 5274 \toks0 = {#2}% 5275 % If third arg is present, precede it with a space. 5276 \def\thirdarg{#3}% 5277 \ifx\thirdarg\empty \else 5278 \toks0 = \expandafter{\the\toks0 \space #3}% 5279 \fi 5280 % 5281 \edef\writeto{\csname#1indfile\endcsname}% 5282 % 5283 \safewhatsit\dosubindwrite 5284 }% 5285 \fi 5286} 5287 5288% Check if an index file has been opened, and if not, open it. 5289\def\requireopenindexfile#1{% 5290\ifnum\csname #1indfile\endcsname=0 5291 \expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname 5292 \edef\suffix{#1}% 5293 % A .fls suffix would conflict with the file extension for the output 5294 % of -recorder, so use .f1s instead. 5295 \ifx\suffix\indexisfl\def\suffix{f1}\fi 5296 % Open the file 5297 \immediate\openout\csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.\suffix 5298 % Using \immediate above here prevents an object entering into the current 5299 % box, which could confound checks such as those in \safewhatsit for 5300 % preceding skips. 5301 \typeout{Writing index file \jobname.\suffix}% 5302\fi} 5303\def\indexisfl{fl} 5304 5305% Output \ as {\indexbackslash}, because \ is an escape character in 5306% the index files. 5307\let\indexbackslash=\relax 5308{\catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=\active 5309 @gdef@useindexbackslash{@def\{{@indexbackslash}}} 5310} 5311 5312% Definition for writing index entry text. 5313\def\sortas#1{\ignorespaces}% 5314 5315% Definition for writing index entry sort key. Should occur at the at 5316% the beginning of the index entry, like 5317% @cindex @sortas{september} \september 5318% The \ignorespaces takes care of following space, but there's no way 5319% to remove space before it. 5320{ 5321\catcode`\-=13 5322\gdef\indexwritesortas{% 5323 \begingroup 5324 \indexnonalnumreappear 5325 \indexwritesortasxxx} 5326\gdef\indexwritesortasxxx#1{% 5327 \xdef\indexsortkey{#1}\endgroup} 5328} 5329 5330 5331% Write the entry in \toks0 to the index file. 5332% 5333\def\dosubindwrite{% 5334 % Put the index entry in the margin if desired. 5335 \ifx\SETmarginindex\relax\else 5336 \insert\margin{\hbox{\vrule height8pt depth3pt width0pt \the\toks0}}% 5337 \fi 5338 % 5339 % Remember, we are within a group. 5340 \indexdummies % Must do this here, since \bf, etc expand at this stage 5341 \useindexbackslash % \indexbackslash isn't defined now so it will be output 5342 % as is; and it will print as backslash. 5343 % The braces around \indexbrace are recognized by texindex. 5344 % 5345 % Get the string to sort by, by processing the index entry with all 5346 % font commands turned off. 5347 {\indexnofonts 5348 \def\lbracechar{{\indexlbrace}}% 5349 \def\rbracechar{{\indexrbrace}}% 5350 \let\{=\lbracechar 5351 \let\}=\rbracechar 5352 \indexnonalnumdisappear 5353 \xdef\indexsortkey{}% 5354 \let\sortas=\indexwritesortas 5355 \edef\temp{\the\toks0}% 5356 \setbox\dummybox = \hbox{\temp}% Make sure to execute any \sortas 5357 \ifx\indexsortkey\empty 5358 \xdef\indexsortkey{\temp}% 5359 \ifx\indexsortkey\empty\xdef\indexsortkey{ }\fi 5360 \fi 5361 }% 5362 % 5363 % Set up the complete index entry, with both the sort key and 5364 % the original text, including any font commands. We write 5365 % three arguments to \entry to the .?? file (four in the 5366 % subentry case), texindex reduces to two when writing the .??s 5367 % sorted result. 5368 \edef\temp{% 5369 \write\writeto{% 5370 \string\entry{\indexsortkey}{\noexpand\folio}{\the\toks0}}% 5371 }% 5372 \temp 5373} 5374\newbox\dummybox % used above 5375 5376% Take care of unwanted page breaks/skips around a whatsit: 5377% 5378% If a skip is the last thing on the list now, preserve it 5379% by backing up by \lastskip, doing the \write, then inserting 5380% the skip again. Otherwise, the whatsit generated by the 5381% \write or \pdfdest will make \lastskip zero. The result is that 5382% sequences like this: 5383% @end defun 5384% @tindex whatever 5385% @defun ... 5386% will have extra space inserted, because the \medbreak in the 5387% start of the @defun won't see the skip inserted by the @end of 5388% the previous defun. 5389% 5390% But don't do any of this if we're not in vertical mode. We 5391% don't want to do a \vskip and prematurely end a paragraph. 5392% 5393% Avoid page breaks due to these extra skips, too. 5394% 5395% But wait, there is a catch there: 5396% We'll have to check whether \lastskip is zero skip. \ifdim is not 5397% sufficient for this purpose, as it ignores stretch and shrink parts 5398% of the skip. The only way seems to be to check the textual 5399% representation of the skip. 5400% 5401% The following is almost like \def\zeroskipmacro{0.0pt} except that 5402% the ``p'' and ``t'' characters have catcode \other, not 11 (letter). 5403% 5404\edef\zeroskipmacro{\expandafter\the\csname z@skip\endcsname} 5405% 5406\newskip\whatsitskip 5407\newcount\whatsitpenalty 5408% 5409% ..., ready, GO: 5410% 5411\def\safewhatsit#1{\ifhmode 5412 #1% 5413 \else 5414 % \lastskip and \lastpenalty cannot both be nonzero simultaneously. 5415 \whatsitskip = \lastskip 5416 \edef\lastskipmacro{\the\lastskip}% 5417 \whatsitpenalty = \lastpenalty 5418 % 5419 % If \lastskip is nonzero, that means the last item was a 5420 % skip. And since a skip is discardable, that means this 5421 % -\whatsitskip glue we're inserting is preceded by a 5422 % non-discardable item, therefore it is not a potential 5423 % breakpoint, therefore no \nobreak needed. 5424 \ifx\lastskipmacro\zeroskipmacro 5425 \else 5426 \vskip-\whatsitskip 5427 \fi 5428 % 5429 #1% 5430 % 5431 \ifx\lastskipmacro\zeroskipmacro 5432 % If \lastskip was zero, perhaps the last item was a penalty, and 5433 % perhaps it was >=10000, e.g., a \nobreak. In that case, we want 5434 % to re-insert the same penalty (values >10000 are used for various 5435 % signals); since we just inserted a non-discardable item, any 5436 % following glue (such as a \parskip) would be a breakpoint. For example: 5437 % @deffn deffn-whatever 5438 % @vindex index-whatever 5439 % Description. 5440 % would allow a break between the index-whatever whatsit 5441 % and the "Description." paragraph. 5442 \ifnum\whatsitpenalty>9999 \penalty\whatsitpenalty \fi 5443 \else 5444 % On the other hand, if we had a nonzero \lastskip, 5445 % this make-up glue would be preceded by a non-discardable item 5446 % (the whatsit from the \write), so we must insert a \nobreak. 5447 \nobreak\vskip\whatsitskip 5448 \fi 5449\fi} 5450 5451% The index entry written in the file actually looks like 5452% \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic} 5453% or 5454% \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic}{subtopic} 5455% The texindex program reads in these files and writes files 5456% containing these kinds of lines: 5457% \initial {c} 5458% before the first topic whose initial is c 5459% \entry {topic}{pagelist} 5460% for a topic that is used without subtopics 5461% \primary {topic} 5462% for the beginning of a topic that is used with subtopics 5463% \secondary {subtopic}{pagelist} 5464% for each subtopic. 5465 5466% Define the user-accessible indexing commands 5467% @findex, @vindex, @kindex, @cindex. 5468 5469\def\findex {\fnindex} 5470\def\kindex {\kyindex} 5471\def\cindex {\cpindex} 5472\def\vindex {\vrindex} 5473\def\tindex {\tpindex} 5474\def\pindex {\pgindex} 5475 5476\def\cindexsub {\begingroup\obeylines\cindexsub} 5477{\obeylines % 5478\gdef\cindexsub "#1" #2^^M{\endgroup % 5479\dosubind{cp}{#2}{#1}}} 5480 5481% Define the macros used in formatting output of the sorted index material. 5482 5483% @printindex causes a particular index (the ??s file) to get printed. 5484% It does not print any chapter heading (usually an @unnumbered). 5485% 5486\parseargdef\printindex{\begingroup 5487 \dobreak \chapheadingskip{10000}% 5488 % 5489 \smallfonts \rm 5490 \tolerance = 9500 5491 \plainfrenchspacing 5492 \everypar = {}% don't want the \kern\-parindent from indentation suppression. 5493 % 5494 % See if the index file exists and is nonempty. 5495 % Change catcode of @ here so that if the index file contains 5496 % \initial {@} 5497 % as its first line, TeX doesn't complain about mismatched braces 5498 % (because it thinks @} is a control sequence). 5499 \catcode`\@ = 12 5500 % See comment in \requireopenindexfile. 5501 \def\indexname{#1}\ifx\indexname\indexisfl\def\indexname{f1}\fi 5502 \openin 1 \jobname.\indexname s 5503 \ifeof 1 5504 % \enddoublecolumns gets confused if there is no text in the index, 5505 % and it loses the chapter title and the aux file entries for the 5506 % index. The easiest way to prevent this problem is to make sure 5507 % there is some text. 5508 \putwordIndexNonexistent 5509 \typeout{No file \jobname.\indexname s.}% 5510 \else 5511 \catcode`\\ = 0 5512 % 5513 % If the index file exists but is empty, then \openin leaves \ifeof 5514 % false. We have to make TeX try to read something from the file, so 5515 % it can discover if there is anything in it. 5516 \read 1 to \thisline 5517 \ifeof 1 5518 \putwordIndexIsEmpty 5519 \else 5520 % Index files are almost Texinfo source, but we use \ as the escape 5521 % character. It would be better to use @, but that's too big a change 5522 % to make right now. 5523 \def\indexbackslash{\ttbackslash}% 5524 \let\indexlbrace\{ % Likewise, set these sequences for braces 5525 \let\indexrbrace\} % used in the sort key. 5526 \begindoublecolumns 5527 \let\dotheinsertentrybox\dotheinsertentryboxwithpenalty 5528 % 5529 % Read input from the index file line by line. 5530 \loopdo 5531 \ifeof1 \else 5532 \read 1 to \nextline 5533 \fi 5534 % 5535 \indexinputprocessing 5536 \thisline 5537 % 5538 \ifeof1\else 5539 \let\thisline\nextline 5540 \repeat 5541 %% 5542 \enddoublecolumns 5543 \fi 5544 \fi 5545 \closein 1 5546\endgroup} 5547\def\loopdo#1\repeat{\def\body{#1}\loopdoxxx} 5548\def\loopdoxxx{\let\next=\relax\body\let\next=\loopdoxxx\fi\next} 5549 5550\def\indexinputprocessing{% 5551 \ifeof1 5552 \let\firsttoken\relax 5553 \else 5554 \edef\act{\gdef\noexpand\firsttoken{\getfirsttoken\nextline}}% 5555 \act 5556 \fi 5557} 5558\def\getfirsttoken#1{\expandafter\getfirsttokenx#1\endfirsttoken} 5559\long\def\getfirsttokenx#1#2\endfirsttoken{\noexpand#1} 5560 5561 5562% These macros are used by the sorted index file itself. 5563% Change them to control the appearance of the index. 5564 5565{\catcode`\/=13 \catcode`\-=13 \catcode`\^=13 \catcode`\~=13 \catcode`\_=13 5566\catcode`\|=13 \catcode`\<=13 \catcode`\>=13 \catcode`\+=13 \catcode`\"=13 5567\catcode`\$=3 5568\gdef\initialglyphs{% 5569 % Some changes for non-alphabetic characters. Using the glyphs from the 5570 % math fonts looks more consistent than the typewriter font used elsewhere 5571 % for these characters. 5572 \def\indexbackslash{\math{\backslash}}% 5573 \let\\=\indexbackslash 5574 % 5575 % Can't get bold backslash so don't use bold forward slash 5576 \catcode`\/=13 5577 \def/{{\secrmnotbold \normalslash}}% 5578 \def-{{\normaldash\normaldash}}% en dash `--' 5579 \def^{{\chapbf \normalcaret}}% 5580 \def~{{\chapbf \normaltilde}}% 5581 \def\_{% 5582 \leavevmode \kern.07em \vbox{\hrule width.3em height.1ex}\kern .07em }% 5583 \def|{$\vert$}% 5584 \def<{$\less$}% 5585 \def>{$\gtr$}% 5586 \def+{$\normalplus$}% 5587}} 5588 5589\def\initial{% 5590 \bgroup 5591 \initialglyphs 5592 \initialx 5593} 5594 5595\def\initialx#1{% 5596 % Remove any glue we may have, we'll be inserting our own. 5597 \removelastskip 5598 % 5599 % We like breaks before the index initials, so insert a bonus. 5600 % The glue before the bonus allows a little bit of space at the 5601 % bottom of a column to reduce an increase in inter-line spacing. 5602 \nobreak 5603 \vskip 0pt plus 5\baselineskip 5604 \penalty -300 5605 \vskip 0pt plus -5\baselineskip 5606 % 5607 % Typeset the initial. Making this add up to a whole number of 5608 % baselineskips increases the chance of the dots lining up from column 5609 % to column. It still won't often be perfect, because of the stretch 5610 % we need before each entry, but it's better. 5611 % 5612 % No shrink because it confuses \balancecolumns. 5613 \vskip 1.67\baselineskip plus 1\baselineskip 5614 \leftline{\secfonts \kern-0.05em \secbf #1}% 5615 % \secfonts is inside the argument of \leftline so that the change of 5616 % \baselineskip will not affect any glue inserted before the vbox that 5617 % \leftline creates. 5618 % Do our best not to break after the initial. 5619 \nobreak 5620 \vskip .33\baselineskip plus .1\baselineskip 5621 \egroup % \initialglyphs 5622} 5623 5624\newdimen\entryrightmargin 5625\entryrightmargin=0pt 5626 5627% \entry typesets a paragraph consisting of the text (#1), dot leaders, and 5628% then page number (#2) flushed to the right margin. It is used for index 5629% and table of contents entries. The paragraph is indented by \leftskip. 5630% 5631\def\entry{% 5632 \begingroup 5633 % 5634 % For pdfTeX and XeTeX. 5635 % The redefinition of \domark stops marks being added in \pdflink to 5636 % preserve coloured links across page boundaries. Otherwise the marks 5637 % would get in the way of \lastbox in \insertentrybox. 5638 \let\domark\relax 5639 % 5640 % Start a new paragraph if necessary, so our assignments below can't 5641 % affect previous text. 5642 \par 5643 % 5644 % No extra space above this paragraph. 5645 \parskip = 0in 5646 % 5647 % When reading the text of entry, convert explicit line breaks 5648 % from @* into spaces. The user might give these in long section 5649 % titles, for instance. 5650 \def\*{\unskip\space\ignorespaces}% 5651 \def\entrybreak{\hfil\break}% An undocumented command 5652 % 5653 % Swallow the left brace of the text (first parameter): 5654 \afterassignment\doentry 5655 \let\temp = 5656} 5657\def\entrybreak{\unskip\space\ignorespaces}% 5658\def\doentry{% 5659 % Save the text of the entry 5660 \global\setbox\boxA=\hbox\bgroup 5661 \bgroup % Instead of the swallowed brace. 5662 \noindent 5663 \aftergroup\finishentry 5664 % And now comes the text of the entry. 5665 % Not absorbing as a macro argument reduces the chance of problems 5666 % with catcodes occurring. 5667} 5668{\catcode`\@=11 5669\gdef\finishentry#1{% 5670 \egroup % end box A 5671 \dimen@ = \wd\boxA % Length of text of entry 5672 \global\setbox\boxA=\hbox\bgroup\unhbox\boxA 5673 % #1 is the page number. 5674 % 5675 % Get the width of the page numbers, and only use 5676 % leaders if they are present. 5677 \global\setbox\boxB = \hbox{#1}% 5678 \ifdim\wd\boxB = 0pt 5679 \null\nobreak\hfill\ % 5680 \else 5681 % 5682 \null\nobreak\indexdotfill % Have leaders before the page number. 5683 % 5684 \ifpdf 5685 \pdfgettoks#1.% 5686 \hskip\skip\thinshrinkable\the\toksA 5687 \else 5688 \ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined 5689 \hskip\skip\thinshrinkable #1% 5690 \else 5691 \pdfgettoks#1.% 5692 \hskip\skip\thinshrinkable\the\toksA 5693 \fi 5694 \fi 5695 \fi 5696 \egroup % end \boxA 5697 \ifdim\wd\boxB = 0pt 5698 \global\setbox\entrybox=\vbox{\unhbox\boxA}% 5699 \else 5700 \global\setbox\entrybox=\vbox\bgroup 5701 % We want the text of the entries to be aligned to the left, and the 5702 % page numbers to be aligned to the right. 5703 % 5704 \parindent = 0pt 5705 \advance\leftskip by 0pt plus 1fil 5706 \advance\leftskip by 0pt plus -1fill 5707 \rightskip = 0pt plus -1fil 5708 \advance\rightskip by 0pt plus 1fill 5709 % Cause last line, which could consist of page numbers on their own 5710 % if the list of page numbers is long, to be aligned to the right. 5711 \parfillskip=0pt plus -1fill 5712 % 5713 \advance\rightskip by \entryrightmargin 5714 % Determine how far we can stretch into the margin. 5715 % This allows, e.g., "Appendix H GNU Free Documentation License" to 5716 % fit on one line in @letterpaper format. 5717 \ifdim\entryrightmargin>2.1em 5718 \dimen@i=2.1em 5719 \else 5720 \dimen@i=0em 5721 \fi 5722 \advance \parfillskip by 0pt minus 1\dimen@i 5723 % 5724 \dimen@ii = \hsize 5725 \advance\dimen@ii by -1\leftskip 5726 \advance\dimen@ii by -1\entryrightmargin 5727 \advance\dimen@ii by 1\dimen@i 5728 \ifdim\wd\boxA > \dimen@ii % If the entry doesn't fit in one line 5729 \ifdim\dimen@ > 0.8\dimen@ii % due to long index text 5730 % Try to split the text roughly evenly. \dimen@ will be the length of 5731 % the first line. 5732 \dimen@ = 0.7\dimen@ 5733 \dimen@ii = \hsize 5734 \ifnum\dimen@>\dimen@ii 5735 % If the entry is too long (for example, if it needs more than 5736 % two lines), use all the space in the first line. 5737 \dimen@ = \dimen@ii 5738 \fi 5739 \advance\leftskip by 0pt plus 1fill % ragged right 5740 \advance \dimen@ by 1\rightskip 5741 \parshape = 2 0pt \dimen@ 0em \dimen@ii 5742 % Ideally we'd add a finite glue at the end of the first line only, 5743 % instead of using \parshape with explicit line lengths, but TeX 5744 % doesn't seem to provide a way to do such a thing. 5745 % 5746 % Indent all lines but the first one. 5747 \advance\leftskip by 1em 5748 \advance\parindent by -1em 5749 \fi\fi 5750 \indent % start paragraph 5751 \unhbox\boxA 5752 % 5753 % Do not prefer a separate line ending with a hyphen to fewer lines. 5754 \finalhyphendemerits = 0 5755 % 5756 % Word spacing - no stretch 5757 \spaceskip=\fontdimen2\font minus \fontdimen4\font 5758 % 5759 \linepenalty=1000 % Discourage line breaks. 5760 \hyphenpenalty=5000 % Discourage hyphenation. 5761 % 5762 \par % format the paragraph 5763 \egroup % The \vbox 5764 \fi 5765 \endgroup 5766 \dotheinsertentrybox 5767}} 5768 5769\newskip\thinshrinkable 5770\skip\thinshrinkable=.15em minus .15em 5771 5772\newbox\entrybox 5773\def\insertentrybox{% 5774 \ourunvbox\entrybox 5775} 5776 5777% default definition 5778\let\dotheinsertentrybox\insertentrybox 5779 5780% Use \lastbox to take apart vbox box by box, and add each sub-box 5781% to the current vertical list. 5782\def\ourunvbox#1{% 5783\bgroup % for local binding of \delayedbox 5784 % Remove the last box from box #1 5785 \global\setbox#1=\vbox{% 5786 \unvbox#1% 5787 \unskip % remove any glue 5788 \unpenalty 5789 \global\setbox\interbox=\lastbox 5790 }% 5791 \setbox\delayedbox=\box\interbox 5792 \ifdim\ht#1=0pt\else 5793 \ourunvbox#1 % Repeat on what's left of the box 5794 \nobreak 5795 \fi 5796 \box\delayedbox 5797\egroup 5798} 5799\newbox\delayedbox 5800\newbox\interbox 5801 5802% Used from \printindex. \firsttoken should be the first token 5803% after the \entry. If it's not another \entry, we are at the last 5804% line of a group of index entries, so insert a penalty to discourage 5805% widowed index entries. 5806\def\dotheinsertentryboxwithpenalty{% 5807 \ifx\firsttoken\isentry 5808 \else 5809 \penalty 9000 5810 \fi 5811 \insertentrybox 5812} 5813\def\isentry{\entry}% 5814 5815% Like plain.tex's \dotfill, except uses up at least 1 em. 5816% The filll stretch here overpowers both the fil and fill stretch to push 5817% the page number to the right. 5818\def\indexdotfill{\cleaders 5819 \hbox{$\mathsurround=0pt \mkern1.5mu.\mkern1.5mu$}\hskip 1em plus 1filll} 5820 5821 5822\def\primary #1{\line{#1\hfil}} 5823 5824\newskip\secondaryindent \secondaryindent=0.5cm 5825\def\secondary#1#2{{% 5826 \parfillskip=0in 5827 \parskip=0in 5828 \hangindent=1in 5829 \hangafter=1 5830 \noindent\hskip\secondaryindent\hbox{#1}\indexdotfill 5831 \ifpdf 5832 \pdfgettoks#2.\ \the\toksA % The page number ends the paragraph. 5833 \else 5834 \ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined 5835 #2 5836 \else 5837 \pdfgettoks#2.\ \the\toksA % The page number ends the paragraph. 5838 \fi 5839 \fi 5840 \par 5841}} 5842 5843% Define two-column mode, which we use to typeset indexes. 5844% Adapted from the TeXbook, page 416, which is to say, 5845% the manmac.tex format used to print the TeXbook itself. 5846\catcode`\@=11 % private names 5847 5848\newbox\partialpage 5849\newdimen\doublecolumnhsize 5850 5851% Use inside an output routine to save \topmark and \firstmark 5852\def\savemarks{% 5853 \global\savedtopmark=\expandafter{\topmark }% 5854 \global\savedfirstmark=\expandafter{\firstmark }% 5855} 5856\newtoks\savedtopmark 5857\newtoks\savedfirstmark 5858 5859% Set \topmark and \firstmark for next time \output runs. 5860% Can't be run from withinside \output (because any material 5861% added while an output routine is active, including 5862% penalties, is saved for after it finishes). The page so far 5863% should be empty, otherwise what's on it will be thrown away. 5864\def\restoremarks{% 5865 \mark{\the\savedtopmark}% 5866 \bgroup\output = {% 5867 \setbox\dummybox=\box\PAGE 5868 }abc\eject\egroup 5869 % "abc" because output routine doesn't fire for a completely empty page. 5870 \mark{\the\savedfirstmark}% 5871} 5872 5873\def\begindoublecolumns{\begingroup % ended by \enddoublecolumns 5874 % If not much space left on page, start a new page. 5875 \ifdim\pagetotal>0.8\vsize\vfill\eject\fi 5876 % 5877 % Grab any single-column material above us. 5878 \output = {% 5879 % 5880 % Here is a possibility not foreseen in manmac: if we accumulate a 5881 % whole lot of material, we might end up calling this \output 5882 % routine twice in a row (see the doublecol-lose test, which is 5883 % essentially a couple of indexes with @setchapternewpage off). In 5884 % that case we just ship out what is in \partialpage with the normal 5885 % output routine. Generally, \partialpage will be empty when this 5886 % runs and this will be a no-op. See the indexspread.tex test case. 5887 \ifvoid\partialpage \else 5888 \onepageout{\pagecontents\partialpage}% 5889 \fi 5890 % 5891 \global\setbox\partialpage = \vbox{% 5892 % Unvbox the main output page. 5893 \unvbox\PAGE 5894 \kern-\topskip \kern\baselineskip 5895 }% 5896 \savemarks 5897 }% 5898 \eject % run that output routine to set \partialpage 5899 \restoremarks 5900 % 5901 % We recover the two marks that the last output routine saved in order 5902 % to propagate the information in marks added around a chapter heading, 5903 % which could be otherwise be lost by the time the final page is output. 5904 % 5905 % 5906 % Use the double-column output routine for subsequent pages. 5907 \output = {\doublecolumnout}% 5908 % 5909 % Change the page size parameters. We could do this once outside this 5910 % routine, in each of @smallbook, @afourpaper, and the default 8.5x11 5911 % format, but then we repeat the same computation. Repeating a couple 5912 % of assignments once per index is clearly meaningless for the 5913 % execution time, so we may as well do it in one place. 5914 % 5915 % First we halve the line length, less a little for the gutter between 5916 % the columns. We compute the gutter based on the line length, so it 5917 % changes automatically with the paper format. The magic constant 5918 % below is chosen so that the gutter has the same value (well, +-<1pt) 5919 % as it did when we hard-coded it. 5920 % 5921 % We put the result in a separate register, \doublecolumhsize, so we 5922 % can restore it in \pagesofar, after \hsize itself has (potentially) 5923 % been clobbered. 5924 % 5925 \doublecolumnhsize = \hsize 5926 \advance\doublecolumnhsize by -.04154\hsize 5927 \divide\doublecolumnhsize by 2 5928 \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize 5929 % 5930 % Double the \vsize as well. 5931 \advance\vsize by -\ht\partialpage 5932 \vsize = 2\vsize 5933 % 5934 % For the benefit of balancing columns 5935 \advance\baselineskip by 0pt plus 0.5pt 5936} 5937 5938% The double-column output routine for all double-column pages except 5939% the last, which is done by \balancecolumns. 5940% 5941\def\doublecolumnout{% 5942 % 5943 \splittopskip=\topskip \splitmaxdepth=\maxdepth 5944 % Get the available space for the double columns -- the normal 5945 % (undoubled) page height minus any material left over from the 5946 % previous page. 5947 \dimen@ = \vsize 5948 \divide\dimen@ by 2 5949 % 5950 % box0 will be the left-hand column, box2 the right. 5951 \setbox0=\vsplit\PAGE to\dimen@ \setbox2=\vsplit\PAGE to\dimen@ 5952 \global\advance\vsize by 2\ht\partialpage 5953 \onepageout\pagesofar 5954 \unvbox\PAGE 5955 \penalty\outputpenalty 5956} 5957% 5958% Re-output the contents of the output page -- any previous material, 5959% followed by the two boxes we just split, in box0 and box2. 5960\def\pagesofar{% 5961 \unvbox\partialpage 5962 % 5963 \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize 5964 \wd0=\hsize \wd2=\hsize 5965 \hbox to\txipagewidth{\box0\hfil\box2}% 5966} 5967 5968 5969% Finished with with double columns. 5970\def\enddoublecolumns{% 5971 % The following penalty ensures that the page builder is exercised 5972 % _before_ we change the output routine. This is necessary in the 5973 % following situation: 5974 % 5975 % The last section of the index consists only of a single entry. 5976 % Before this section, \pagetotal is less than \pagegoal, so no 5977 % break occurs before the last section starts. However, the last 5978 % section, consisting of \initial and the single \entry, does not 5979 % fit on the page and has to be broken off. Without the following 5980 % penalty the page builder will not be exercised until \eject 5981 % below, and by that time we'll already have changed the output 5982 % routine to the \balancecolumns version, so the next-to-last 5983 % double-column page will be processed with \balancecolumns, which 5984 % is wrong: The two columns will go to the main vertical list, with 5985 % the broken-off section in the recent contributions. As soon as 5986 % the output routine finishes, TeX starts reconsidering the page 5987 % break. The two columns and the broken-off section both fit on the 5988 % page, because the two columns now take up only half of the page 5989 % goal. When TeX sees \eject from below which follows the final 5990 % section, it invokes the new output routine that we've set after 5991 % \balancecolumns below; \onepageout will try to fit the two columns 5992 % and the final section into the vbox of \txipageheight (see 5993 % \pagebody), causing an overfull box. 5994 % 5995 % Note that glue won't work here, because glue does not exercise the 5996 % page builder, unlike penalties (see The TeXbook, pp. 280-281). 5997 \penalty0 5998 % 5999 \output = {% 6000 % Split the last of the double-column material. 6001 \savemarks 6002 \balancecolumns 6003 }% 6004 \eject % call the \output just set 6005 \ifdim\pagetotal=0pt 6006 % Having called \balancecolumns once, we do not 6007 % want to call it again. Therefore, reset \output to its normal 6008 % definition right away. 6009 \global\output = {\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}}% 6010 % 6011 \endgroup % started in \begindoublecolumns 6012 \restoremarks 6013 % Leave the double-column material on the current page, no automatic 6014 % page break. 6015 \box\balancedcolumns 6016 % 6017 % \pagegoal was set to the doubled \vsize above, since we restarted 6018 % the current page. We're now back to normal single-column 6019 % typesetting, so reset \pagegoal to the normal \vsize. 6020 \global\vsize = \txipageheight % 6021 \pagegoal = \txipageheight % 6022 \else 6023 % We had some left-over material. This might happen when \doublecolumnout 6024 % is called in \balancecolumns. Try again. 6025 \expandafter\enddoublecolumns 6026 \fi 6027} 6028\newbox\balancedcolumns 6029\setbox\balancedcolumns=\vbox{shouldnt see this}% 6030% 6031% Only called for the last of the double column material. \doublecolumnout 6032% does the others. 6033\def\balancecolumns{% 6034 \setbox0 = \vbox{\unvbox\PAGE}% like \box255 but more efficient, see p.120. 6035 \dimen@ = \ht0 6036 \advance\dimen@ by \topskip 6037 \advance\dimen@ by-\baselineskip 6038 \ifdim\dimen@<5\baselineskip 6039 % Don't split a short final column in two. 6040 \setbox2=\vbox{}% 6041 \global\setbox\balancedcolumns=\vbox{\pagesofar}% 6042 \else 6043 \divide\dimen@ by 2 % target to split to 6044 \dimen@ii = \dimen@ 6045 \splittopskip = \topskip 6046 % Loop until left column is at least as high as the right column. 6047 {% 6048 \vbadness = 10000 6049 \loop 6050 \global\setbox3 = \copy0 6051 \global\setbox1 = \vsplit3 to \dimen@ 6052 \ifdim\ht1<\ht3 6053 \global\advance\dimen@ by 1pt 6054 \repeat 6055 }% 6056 % Now the left column is in box 1, and the right column in box 3. 6057 % 6058 % Check whether the left column has come out higher than the page itself. 6059 % (Note that we have doubled \vsize for the double columns, so 6060 % the actual height of the page is 0.5\vsize). 6061 \ifdim2\ht1>\vsize 6062 % It appears that we have been called upon to balance too much material. 6063 % Output some of it with \doublecolumnout, leaving the rest on the page. 6064 \setbox\PAGE=\box0 6065 \doublecolumnout 6066 \else 6067 % Compare the heights of the two columns. 6068 \ifdim4\ht1>5\ht3 6069 % Column heights are too different, so don't make their bottoms 6070 % flush with each other. 6071 \setbox2=\vbox to \ht1 {\unvbox3\vfill}% 6072 \setbox0=\vbox to \ht1 {\unvbox1\vfill}% 6073 \else 6074 % Make column bottoms flush with each other. 6075 \setbox2=\vbox to\ht1{\unvbox3\unskip}% 6076 \setbox0=\vbox to\ht1{\unvbox1\unskip}% 6077 \fi 6078 \global\setbox\balancedcolumns=\vbox{\pagesofar}% 6079 \fi 6080 \fi 6081 % 6082} 6083\catcode`\@ = \other 6084 6085 6086\message{sectioning,} 6087% Chapters, sections, etc. 6088 6089% Let's start with @part. 6090\outer\parseargdef\part{\partzzz{#1}} 6091\def\partzzz#1{% 6092 \chapoddpage 6093 \null 6094 \vskip.3\vsize % move it down on the page a bit 6095 \begingroup 6096 \noindent \titlefonts\rm #1\par % the text 6097 \let\lastnode=\empty % no node to associate with 6098 \writetocentry{part}{#1}{}% but put it in the toc 6099 \headingsoff % no headline or footline on the part page 6100 % This outputs a mark at the end of the page that clears \thischapter 6101 % and \thissection, as is done in \startcontents. 6102 \let\pchapsepmacro\relax 6103 \chapmacro{}{Yomitfromtoc}{}% 6104 \chapoddpage 6105 \endgroup 6106} 6107 6108% \unnumberedno is an oxymoron. But we count the unnumbered 6109% sections so that we can refer to them unambiguously in the pdf 6110% outlines by their "section number". We avoid collisions with chapter 6111% numbers by starting them at 10000. (If a document ever has 10000 6112% chapters, we're in trouble anyway, I'm sure.) 6113\newcount\unnumberedno \unnumberedno = 10000 6114\newcount\chapno 6115\newcount\secno \secno=0 6116\newcount\subsecno \subsecno=0 6117\newcount\subsubsecno \subsubsecno=0 6118 6119% This counter is funny since it counts through charcodes of letters A, B, ... 6120\newcount\appendixno \appendixno = `\@ 6121% 6122% \def\appendixletter{\char\the\appendixno} 6123% We do the following ugly conditional instead of the above simple 6124% construct for the sake of pdftex, which needs the actual 6125% letter in the expansion, not just typeset. 6126% 6127\def\appendixletter{% 6128 \ifnum\appendixno=`A A% 6129 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`B B% 6130 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`C C% 6131 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`D D% 6132 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`E E% 6133 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`F F% 6134 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`G G% 6135 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`H H% 6136 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`I I% 6137 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`J J% 6138 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`K K% 6139 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`L L% 6140 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`M M% 6141 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`N N% 6142 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`O O% 6143 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`P P% 6144 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Q Q% 6145 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`R R% 6146 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`S S% 6147 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`T T% 6148 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`U U% 6149 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`V V% 6150 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`W W% 6151 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`X X% 6152 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Y Y% 6153 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Z Z% 6154 % The \the is necessary, despite appearances, because \appendixletter is 6155 % expanded while writing the .toc file. \char\appendixno is not 6156 % expandable, thus it is written literally, thus all appendixes come out 6157 % with the same letter (or @) in the toc without it. 6158 \else\char\the\appendixno 6159 \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi 6160 \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi} 6161 6162% Each @chapter defines these (using marks) as the number+name, number 6163% and name of the chapter. Page headings and footings can use 6164% these. @section does likewise. 6165\def\thischapter{} 6166\def\thischapternum{} 6167\def\thischaptername{} 6168\def\thissection{} 6169\def\thissectionnum{} 6170\def\thissectionname{} 6171 6172\newcount\absseclevel % used to calculate proper heading level 6173\newcount\secbase\secbase=0 % @raisesections/@lowersections modify this count 6174 6175% @raisesections: treat @section as chapter, @subsection as section, etc. 6176\def\raisesections{\global\advance\secbase by -1} 6177\let\up=\raisesections % original BFox name 6178 6179% @lowersections: treat @chapter as section, @section as subsection, etc. 6180\def\lowersections{\global\advance\secbase by 1} 6181\let\down=\lowersections % original BFox name 6182 6183% we only have subsub. 6184\chardef\maxseclevel = 3 6185% 6186% A numbered section within an unnumbered changes to unnumbered too. 6187% To achieve this, remember the "biggest" unnum. sec. we are currently in: 6188\chardef\unnlevel = \maxseclevel 6189% 6190% Trace whether the current chapter is an appendix or not: 6191% \chapheadtype is "N" or "A", unnumbered chapters are ignored. 6192\def\chapheadtype{N} 6193 6194% Choose a heading macro 6195% #1 is heading type 6196% #2 is heading level 6197% #3 is text for heading 6198\def\genhead#1#2#3{% 6199 % Compute the abs. sec. level: 6200 \absseclevel=#2 6201 \advance\absseclevel by \secbase 6202 % Make sure \absseclevel doesn't fall outside the range: 6203 \ifnum \absseclevel < 0 6204 \absseclevel = 0 6205 \else 6206 \ifnum \absseclevel > 3 6207 \absseclevel = 3 6208 \fi 6209 \fi 6210 % The heading type: 6211 \def\headtype{#1}% 6212 \if \headtype U% 6213 \ifnum \absseclevel < \unnlevel 6214 \chardef\unnlevel = \absseclevel 6215 \fi 6216 \else 6217 % Check for appendix sections: 6218 \ifnum \absseclevel = 0 6219 \edef\chapheadtype{\headtype}% 6220 \else 6221 \if \headtype A\if \chapheadtype N% 6222 \errmessage{@appendix... within a non-appendix chapter}% 6223 \fi\fi 6224 \fi 6225 % Check for numbered within unnumbered: 6226 \ifnum \absseclevel > \unnlevel 6227 \def\headtype{U}% 6228 \else 6229 \chardef\unnlevel = 3 6230 \fi 6231 \fi 6232 % Now print the heading: 6233 \if \headtype U% 6234 \ifcase\absseclevel 6235 \unnumberedzzz{#3}% 6236 \or \unnumberedseczzz{#3}% 6237 \or \unnumberedsubseczzz{#3}% 6238 \or \unnumberedsubsubseczzz{#3}% 6239 \fi 6240 \else 6241 \if \headtype A% 6242 \ifcase\absseclevel 6243 \appendixzzz{#3}% 6244 \or \appendixsectionzzz{#3}% 6245 \or \appendixsubseczzz{#3}% 6246 \or \appendixsubsubseczzz{#3}% 6247 \fi 6248 \else 6249 \ifcase\absseclevel 6250 \chapterzzz{#3}% 6251 \or \seczzz{#3}% 6252 \or \numberedsubseczzz{#3}% 6253 \or \numberedsubsubseczzz{#3}% 6254 \fi 6255 \fi 6256 \fi 6257 \suppressfirstparagraphindent 6258} 6259 6260% an interface: 6261\def\numhead{\genhead N} 6262\def\apphead{\genhead A} 6263\def\unnmhead{\genhead U} 6264 6265% @chapter, @appendix, @unnumbered. Increment top-level counter, reset 6266% all lower-level sectioning counters to zero. 6267% 6268% Also set \chaplevelprefix, which we prepend to @float sequence numbers 6269% (e.g., figures), q.v. By default (before any chapter), that is empty. 6270\let\chaplevelprefix = \empty 6271% 6272\outer\parseargdef\chapter{\numhead0{#1}} % normally numhead0 calls chapterzzz 6273\def\chapterzzz#1{% 6274 % section resetting is \global in case the chapter is in a group, such 6275 % as an @include file. 6276 \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 6277 \global\advance\chapno by 1 6278 % 6279 % Used for \float. 6280 \gdef\chaplevelprefix{\the\chapno.}% 6281 \resetallfloatnos 6282 % 6283 % \putwordChapter can contain complex things in translations. 6284 \toks0=\expandafter{\putwordChapter}% 6285 \message{\the\toks0 \space \the\chapno}% 6286 % 6287 % Write the actual heading. 6288 \chapmacro{#1}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno}% 6289 % 6290 % So @section and the like are numbered underneath this chapter. 6291 \global\let\section = \numberedsec 6292 \global\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec 6293 \global\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec 6294} 6295 6296\outer\parseargdef\appendix{\apphead0{#1}} % normally calls appendixzzz 6297% 6298\def\appendixzzz#1{% 6299 \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 6300 \global\advance\appendixno by 1 6301 \gdef\chaplevelprefix{\appendixletter.}% 6302 \resetallfloatnos 6303 % 6304 % \putwordAppendix can contain complex things in translations. 6305 \toks0=\expandafter{\putwordAppendix}% 6306 \message{\the\toks0 \space \appendixletter}% 6307 % 6308 \chapmacro{#1}{Yappendix}{\appendixletter}% 6309 % 6310 \global\let\section = \appendixsec 6311 \global\let\subsection = \appendixsubsec 6312 \global\let\subsubsection = \appendixsubsubsec 6313} 6314 6315% normally unnmhead0 calls unnumberedzzz: 6316\outer\parseargdef\unnumbered{\unnmhead0{#1}} 6317\def\unnumberedzzz#1{% 6318 \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 6319 \global\advance\unnumberedno by 1 6320 % 6321 % Since an unnumbered has no number, no prefix for figures. 6322 \global\let\chaplevelprefix = \empty 6323 \resetallfloatnos 6324 % 6325 % This used to be simply \message{#1}, but TeX fully expands the 6326 % argument to \message. Therefore, if #1 contained @-commands, TeX 6327 % expanded them. For example, in `@unnumbered The @cite{Book}', TeX 6328 % expanded @cite (which turns out to cause errors because \cite is meant 6329 % to be executed, not expanded). 6330 % 6331 % Anyway, we don't want the fully-expanded definition of @cite to appear 6332 % as a result of the \message, we just want `@cite' itself. We use 6333 % \the<toks register> to achieve this: TeX expands \the<toks> only once, 6334 % simply yielding the contents of <toks register>. (We also do this for 6335 % the toc entries.) 6336 \toks0 = {#1}% 6337 \message{(\the\toks0)}% 6338 % 6339 \chapmacro{#1}{Ynothing}{\the\unnumberedno}% 6340 % 6341 \global\let\section = \unnumberedsec 6342 \global\let\subsection = \unnumberedsubsec 6343 \global\let\subsubsection = \unnumberedsubsubsec 6344} 6345 6346% @centerchap is like @unnumbered, but the heading is centered. 6347\outer\parseargdef\centerchap{% 6348 \let\centerparametersmaybe = \centerparameters 6349 \unnmhead0{#1}% 6350 \let\centerparametersmaybe = \relax 6351} 6352 6353% @top is like @unnumbered. 6354\let\top\unnumbered 6355 6356% Sections. 6357% 6358\outer\parseargdef\numberedsec{\numhead1{#1}} % normally calls seczzz 6359\def\seczzz#1{% 6360 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\secno by 1 6361 \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno.\the\secno}% 6362} 6363 6364% normally calls appendixsectionzzz: 6365\outer\parseargdef\appendixsection{\apphead1{#1}} 6366\def\appendixsectionzzz#1{% 6367 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\secno by 1 6368 \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Yappendix}{\appendixletter.\the\secno}% 6369} 6370\let\appendixsec\appendixsection 6371 6372% normally calls unnumberedseczzz: 6373\outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsec{\unnmhead1{#1}} 6374\def\unnumberedseczzz#1{% 6375 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\secno by 1 6376 \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Ynothing}{\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno}% 6377} 6378 6379% Subsections. 6380% 6381% normally calls numberedsubseczzz: 6382\outer\parseargdef\numberedsubsec{\numhead2{#1}} 6383\def\numberedsubseczzz#1{% 6384 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\subsecno by 1 6385 \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}% 6386} 6387 6388% normally calls appendixsubseczzz: 6389\outer\parseargdef\appendixsubsec{\apphead2{#1}} 6390\def\appendixsubseczzz#1{% 6391 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\subsecno by 1 6392 \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Yappendix}% 6393 {\appendixletter.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}% 6394} 6395 6396% normally calls unnumberedsubseczzz: 6397\outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsubsec{\unnmhead2{#1}} 6398\def\unnumberedsubseczzz#1{% 6399 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\subsecno by 1 6400 \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Ynothing}% 6401 {\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}% 6402} 6403 6404% Subsubsections. 6405% 6406% normally numberedsubsubseczzz: 6407\outer\parseargdef\numberedsubsubsec{\numhead3{#1}} 6408\def\numberedsubsubseczzz#1{% 6409 \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1 6410 \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Ynumbered}% 6411 {\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}% 6412} 6413 6414% normally appendixsubsubseczzz: 6415\outer\parseargdef\appendixsubsubsec{\apphead3{#1}} 6416\def\appendixsubsubseczzz#1{% 6417 \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1 6418 \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Yappendix}% 6419 {\appendixletter.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}% 6420} 6421 6422% normally unnumberedsubsubseczzz: 6423\outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsubsubsec{\unnmhead3{#1}} 6424\def\unnumberedsubsubseczzz#1{% 6425 \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1 6426 \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Ynothing}% 6427 {\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}% 6428} 6429 6430% These macros control what the section commands do, according 6431% to what kind of chapter we are in (ordinary, appendix, or unnumbered). 6432% Define them by default for a numbered chapter. 6433\let\section = \numberedsec 6434\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec 6435\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec 6436 6437% Define @majorheading, @heading and @subheading 6438 6439\def\majorheading{% 6440 {\advance\chapheadingskip by 10pt \chapbreak }% 6441 \parsearg\chapheadingzzz 6442} 6443 6444\def\chapheading{\chapbreak \parsearg\chapheadingzzz} 6445\def\chapheadingzzz#1{% 6446 \vbox{\chapfonts \raggedtitlesettings #1\par}% 6447 \nobreak\bigskip \nobreak 6448 \suppressfirstparagraphindent 6449} 6450 6451% @heading, @subheading, @subsubheading. 6452\parseargdef\heading{\sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Yomitfromtoc}{} 6453 \suppressfirstparagraphindent} 6454\parseargdef\subheading{\sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Yomitfromtoc}{} 6455 \suppressfirstparagraphindent} 6456\parseargdef\subsubheading{\sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Yomitfromtoc}{} 6457 \suppressfirstparagraphindent} 6458 6459% These macros generate a chapter, section, etc. heading only 6460% (including whitespace, linebreaking, etc. around it), 6461% given all the information in convenient, parsed form. 6462 6463% Args are the skip and penalty (usually negative) 6464\def\dobreak#1#2{\par\ifdim\lastskip<#1\removelastskip\penalty#2\vskip#1\fi} 6465 6466% Parameter controlling skip before chapter headings (if needed) 6467\newskip\chapheadingskip 6468 6469% Define plain chapter starts, and page on/off switching for it. 6470\def\chapbreak{\dobreak \chapheadingskip {-4000}} 6471 6472% Start a new page 6473\def\chappager{\par\vfill\supereject} 6474 6475% \chapoddpage - start on an odd page for a new chapter 6476% Because \domark is called before \chapoddpage, the filler page will 6477% get the headings for the next chapter, which is wrong. But we don't 6478% care -- we just disable all headings on the filler page. 6479\def\chapoddpage{% 6480 \chappager 6481 \ifodd\pageno \else 6482 \begingroup 6483 \headingsoff 6484 \null 6485 \chappager 6486 \endgroup 6487 \fi 6488} 6489 6490\parseargdef\setchapternewpage{\csname CHAPPAG#1\endcsname} 6491 6492\def\CHAPPAGoff{% 6493\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager 6494\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapbreak 6495\global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager} 6496 6497\def\CHAPPAGon{% 6498\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager 6499\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chappager 6500\global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager 6501\global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSsingle}} 6502 6503\def\CHAPPAGodd{% 6504\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage 6505\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapoddpage 6506\global\let\pagealignmacro=\chapoddpage 6507\global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble}} 6508 6509\CHAPPAGon 6510 6511% \chapmacro - Chapter opening. 6512% 6513% #1 is the text, #2 is the section type (Ynumbered, Ynothing, 6514% Yappendix, Yomitfromtoc), #3 the chapter number. 6515% Not used for @heading series. 6516% 6517% To test against our argument. 6518\def\Ynothingkeyword{Ynothing} 6519\def\Yappendixkeyword{Yappendix} 6520\def\Yomitfromtockeyword{Yomitfromtoc} 6521% 6522\def\chapmacro#1#2#3{% 6523 \expandafter\ifx\thisenv\titlepage\else 6524 \checkenv{}% chapters, etc., should not start inside an environment. 6525 \fi 6526 % FIXME: \chapmacro is currently called from inside \titlepage when 6527 % \setcontentsaftertitlepage to print the "Table of Contents" heading, but 6528 % this should probably be done by \sectionheading with an option to print 6529 % in chapter size. 6530 % 6531 % Insert the first mark before the heading break (see notes for \domark). 6532 \let\prevchapterdefs=\lastchapterdefs 6533 \let\prevsectiondefs=\lastsectiondefs 6534 \gdef\lastsectiondefs{\gdef\thissectionname{}\gdef\thissectionnum{}% 6535 \gdef\thissection{}}% 6536 % 6537 \def\temptype{#2}% 6538 \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword 6539 \gdef\lastchapterdefs{\gdef\thischaptername{#1}\gdef\thischapternum{}% 6540 \gdef\thischapter{\thischaptername}}% 6541 \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword 6542 \gdef\lastchapterdefs{\gdef\thischaptername{#1}\gdef\thischapternum{}% 6543 \gdef\thischapter{}}% 6544 \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword 6545 \toks0={#1}% 6546 \xdef\lastchapterdefs{% 6547 \gdef\noexpand\thischaptername{\the\toks0}% 6548 \gdef\noexpand\thischapternum{\appendixletter}% 6549 % \noexpand\putwordAppendix avoids expanding indigestible 6550 % commands in some of the translations. 6551 \gdef\noexpand\thischapter{\noexpand\putwordAppendix{} 6552 \noexpand\thischapternum: 6553 \noexpand\thischaptername}% 6554 }% 6555 \else 6556 \toks0={#1}% 6557 \xdef\lastchapterdefs{% 6558 \gdef\noexpand\thischaptername{\the\toks0}% 6559 \gdef\noexpand\thischapternum{\the\chapno}% 6560 % \noexpand\putwordChapter avoids expanding indigestible 6561 % commands in some of the translations. 6562 \gdef\noexpand\thischapter{\noexpand\putwordChapter{} 6563 \noexpand\thischapternum: 6564 \noexpand\thischaptername}% 6565 }% 6566 \fi\fi\fi 6567 % 6568 % Output the mark. Pass it through \safewhatsit, to take care of 6569 % the preceding space. 6570 \safewhatsit\domark 6571 % 6572 % Insert the chapter heading break. 6573 \pchapsepmacro 6574 % 6575 % Now the second mark, after the heading break. No break points 6576 % between here and the heading. 6577 \let\prevchapterdefs=\lastchapterdefs 6578 \let\prevsectiondefs=\lastsectiondefs 6579 \domark 6580 % 6581 {% 6582 \chapfonts \rm 6583 \let\footnote=\errfootnoteheading % give better error message 6584 % 6585 % Have to define \lastsection before calling \donoderef, because the 6586 % xref code eventually uses it. On the other hand, it has to be called 6587 % after \pchapsepmacro, or the headline will change too soon. 6588 \gdef\lastsection{#1}% 6589 % 6590 % Only insert the separating space if we have a chapter/appendix 6591 % number, and don't print the unnumbered ``number''. 6592 \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword 6593 \setbox0 = \hbox{}% 6594 \def\toctype{unnchap}% 6595 \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword 6596 \setbox0 = \hbox{}% contents like unnumbered, but no toc entry 6597 \def\toctype{omit}% 6598 \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword 6599 \setbox0 = \hbox{\putwordAppendix{} #3\enspace}% 6600 \def\toctype{app}% 6601 \else 6602 \setbox0 = \hbox{#3\enspace}% 6603 \def\toctype{numchap}% 6604 \fi\fi\fi 6605 % 6606 % Write the toc entry for this chapter. Must come before the 6607 % \donoderef, because we include the current node name in the toc 6608 % entry, and \donoderef resets it to empty. 6609 \writetocentry{\toctype}{#1}{#3}% 6610 % 6611 % For pdftex, we have to write out the node definition (aka, make 6612 % the pdfdest) after any page break, but before the actual text has 6613 % been typeset. If the destination for the pdf outline is after the 6614 % text, then jumping from the outline may wind up with the text not 6615 % being visible, for instance under high magnification. 6616 \donoderef{#2}% 6617 % 6618 % Typeset the actual heading. 6619 \nobreak % Avoid page breaks at the interline glue. 6620 \vbox{\raggedtitlesettings \hangindent=\wd0 \centerparametersmaybe 6621 \unhbox0 #1\par}% 6622 }% 6623 \nobreak\bigskip % no page break after a chapter title 6624 \nobreak 6625} 6626 6627% @centerchap -- centered and unnumbered. 6628\let\centerparametersmaybe = \relax 6629\def\centerparameters{% 6630 \advance\rightskip by 3\rightskip 6631 \leftskip = \rightskip 6632 \parfillskip = 0pt 6633} 6634 6635 6636% Section titles. These macros combine the section number parts and 6637% call the generic \sectionheading to do the printing. 6638% 6639\newskip\secheadingskip 6640\def\secheadingbreak{\dobreak \secheadingskip{-1000}} 6641 6642% Subsection titles. 6643\newskip\subsecheadingskip 6644\def\subsecheadingbreak{\dobreak \subsecheadingskip{-500}} 6645 6646% Subsubsection titles. 6647\def\subsubsecheadingskip{\subsecheadingskip} 6648\def\subsubsecheadingbreak{\subsecheadingbreak} 6649 6650 6651% Print any size, any type, section title. 6652% 6653% #1 is the text of the title, 6654% #2 is the section level (sec/subsec/subsubsec), 6655% #3 is the section type (Ynumbered, Ynothing, Yappendix, Yomitfromtoc), 6656% #4 is the section number. 6657% 6658\def\seckeyword{sec} 6659% 6660\def\sectionheading#1#2#3#4{% 6661 {% 6662 \def\sectionlevel{#2}% 6663 \def\temptype{#3}% 6664 % 6665 % It is ok for the @heading series commands to appear inside an 6666 % environment (it's been historically allowed, though the logic is 6667 % dubious), but not the others. 6668 \ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword\else 6669 \checkenv{}% non-@*heading should not be in an environment. 6670 \fi 6671 \let\footnote=\errfootnoteheading 6672 % 6673 % Switch to the right set of fonts. 6674 \csname #2fonts\endcsname \rm 6675 % 6676 % Insert first mark before the heading break (see notes for \domark). 6677 \let\prevsectiondefs=\lastsectiondefs 6678 \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword 6679 \ifx\sectionlevel\seckeyword 6680 \gdef\lastsectiondefs{\gdef\thissectionname{#1}\gdef\thissectionnum{}% 6681 \gdef\thissection{\thissectionname}}% 6682 \fi 6683 \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword 6684 % Don't redefine \thissection. 6685 \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword 6686 \ifx\sectionlevel\seckeyword 6687 \toks0={#1}% 6688 \xdef\lastsectiondefs{% 6689 \gdef\noexpand\thissectionname{\the\toks0}% 6690 \gdef\noexpand\thissectionnum{#4}% 6691 % \noexpand\putwordSection avoids expanding indigestible 6692 % commands in some of the translations. 6693 \gdef\noexpand\thissection{\noexpand\putwordSection{} 6694 \noexpand\thissectionnum: 6695 \noexpand\thissectionname}% 6696 }% 6697 \fi 6698 \else 6699 \ifx\sectionlevel\seckeyword 6700 \toks0={#1}% 6701 \xdef\lastsectiondefs{% 6702 \gdef\noexpand\thissectionname{\the\toks0}% 6703 \gdef\noexpand\thissectionnum{#4}% 6704 % \noexpand\putwordSection avoids expanding indigestible 6705 % commands in some of the translations. 6706 \gdef\noexpand\thissection{\noexpand\putwordSection{} 6707 \noexpand\thissectionnum: 6708 \noexpand\thissectionname}% 6709 }% 6710 \fi 6711 \fi\fi\fi 6712 % 6713 % Go into vertical mode. Usually we'll already be there, but we 6714 % don't want the following whatsit to end up in a preceding paragraph 6715 % if the document didn't happen to have a blank line. 6716 \par 6717 % 6718 % Output the mark. Pass it through \safewhatsit, to take care of 6719 % the preceding space. 6720 \safewhatsit\domark 6721 % 6722 % Insert space above the heading. 6723 \csname #2headingbreak\endcsname 6724 % 6725 % Now the second mark, after the heading break. No break points 6726 % between here and the heading. 6727 \global\let\prevsectiondefs=\lastsectiondefs 6728 \domark 6729 % 6730 % Only insert the space after the number if we have a section number. 6731 \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword 6732 \setbox0 = \hbox{}% 6733 \def\toctype{unn}% 6734 \gdef\lastsection{#1}% 6735 \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword 6736 % for @headings -- no section number, don't include in toc, 6737 % and don't redefine \lastsection. 6738 \setbox0 = \hbox{}% 6739 \def\toctype{omit}% 6740 \let\sectionlevel=\empty 6741 \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword 6742 \setbox0 = \hbox{#4\enspace}% 6743 \def\toctype{app}% 6744 \gdef\lastsection{#1}% 6745 \else 6746 \setbox0 = \hbox{#4\enspace}% 6747 \def\toctype{num}% 6748 \gdef\lastsection{#1}% 6749 \fi\fi\fi 6750 % 6751 % Write the toc entry (before \donoderef). See comments in \chapmacro. 6752 \writetocentry{\toctype\sectionlevel}{#1}{#4}% 6753 % 6754 % Write the node reference (= pdf destination for pdftex). 6755 % Again, see comments in \chapmacro. 6756 \donoderef{#3}% 6757 % 6758 % Interline glue will be inserted when the vbox is completed. 6759 % That glue will be a valid breakpoint for the page, since it'll be 6760 % preceded by a whatsit (usually from the \donoderef, or from the 6761 % \writetocentry if there was no node). We don't want to allow that 6762 % break, since then the whatsits could end up on page n while the 6763 % section is on page n+1, thus toc/etc. are wrong. Debian bug 276000. 6764 \nobreak 6765 % 6766 % Output the actual section heading. 6767 \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \ptexraggedright 6768 \hangindent=\wd0 % zero if no section number 6769 \unhbox0 #1}% 6770 }% 6771 % Add extra space after the heading -- half of whatever came above it. 6772 % Don't allow stretch, though. 6773 \kern .5 \csname #2headingskip\endcsname 6774 % 6775 % Do not let the kern be a potential breakpoint, as it would be if it 6776 % was followed by glue. 6777 \nobreak 6778 % 6779 % We'll almost certainly start a paragraph next, so don't let that 6780 % glue accumulate. (Not a breakpoint because it's preceded by a 6781 % discardable item.) However, when a paragraph is not started next 6782 % (\startdefun, \cartouche, \center, etc.), this needs to be wiped out 6783 % or the negative glue will cause weirdly wrong output, typically 6784 % obscuring the section heading with something else. 6785 \vskip-\parskip 6786 % 6787 % This is so the last item on the main vertical list is a known 6788 % \penalty > 10000, so \startdefun, etc., can recognize the situation 6789 % and do the needful. 6790 \penalty 10001 6791} 6792 6793 6794\message{toc,} 6795% Table of contents. 6796\newwrite\tocfile 6797 6798% Write an entry to the toc file, opening it if necessary. 6799% Called from @chapter, etc. 6800% 6801% Example usage: \writetocentry{sec}{Section Name}{\the\chapno.\the\secno} 6802% We append the current node name (if any) and page number as additional 6803% arguments for the \{chap,sec,...}entry macros which will eventually 6804% read this. The node name is used in the pdf outlines as the 6805% destination to jump to. 6806% 6807% We open the .toc file for writing here instead of at @setfilename (or 6808% any other fixed time) so that @contents can be anywhere in the document. 6809% But if #1 is `omit', then we don't do anything. This is used for the 6810% table of contents chapter openings themselves. 6811% 6812\newif\iftocfileopened 6813\def\omitkeyword{omit}% 6814% 6815\def\writetocentry#1#2#3{% 6816 \edef\writetoctype{#1}% 6817 \ifx\writetoctype\omitkeyword \else 6818 \iftocfileopened\else 6819 \immediate\openout\tocfile = \jobname.toc 6820 \global\tocfileopenedtrue 6821 \fi 6822 % 6823 \iflinks 6824 {\atdummies 6825 \edef\temp{% 6826 \write\tocfile{@#1entry{#2}{#3}{\lastnode}{\noexpand\folio}}}% 6827 \temp 6828 }% 6829 \fi 6830 \fi 6831 % 6832 % Tell \shipout to create a pdf destination on each page, if we're 6833 % writing pdf. These are used in the table of contents. We can't 6834 % just write one on every page because the title pages are numbered 6835 % 1 and 2 (the page numbers aren't printed), and so are the first 6836 % two pages of the document. Thus, we'd have two destinations named 6837 % `1', and two named `2'. 6838 \ifpdf 6839 \global\pdfmakepagedesttrue 6840 \else 6841 \ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined 6842 \else 6843 \global\pdfmakepagedesttrue 6844 \fi 6845 \fi 6846} 6847 6848 6849% These characters do not print properly in the Computer Modern roman 6850% fonts, so we must take special care. This is more or less redundant 6851% with the Texinfo input format setup at the end of this file. 6852% 6853\def\activecatcodes{% 6854 \catcode`\"=\active 6855 \catcode`\$=\active 6856 \catcode`\<=\active 6857 \catcode`\>=\active 6858 \catcode`\\=\active 6859 \catcode`\^=\active 6860 \catcode`\_=\active 6861 \catcode`\|=\active 6862 \catcode`\~=\active 6863} 6864 6865 6866% Read the toc file, which is essentially Texinfo input. 6867\def\readtocfile{% 6868 \setupdatafile 6869 \activecatcodes 6870 \input \tocreadfilename 6871} 6872 6873\newskip\contentsrightmargin \contentsrightmargin=1in 6874\newcount\savepageno 6875\newcount\lastnegativepageno \lastnegativepageno = -1 6876 6877% Prepare to read what we've written to \tocfile. 6878% 6879\def\startcontents#1{% 6880 % If @setchapternewpage on, and @headings double, the contents should 6881 % start on an odd page, unlike chapters. Thus, we maintain 6882 % \contentsalignmacro in parallel with \pagealignmacro. 6883 % From: Torbjorn Granlund <tege@matematik.su.se> 6884 \contentsalignmacro 6885 \immediate\closeout\tocfile 6886 % 6887 % Don't need to put `Contents' or `Short Contents' in the headline. 6888 % It is abundantly clear what they are. 6889 \chapmacro{#1}{Yomitfromtoc}{}% 6890 % 6891 \savepageno = \pageno 6892 \begingroup % Set up to handle contents files properly. 6893 \raggedbottom % Worry more about breakpoints than the bottom. 6894 \entryrightmargin=\contentsrightmargin % Don't use the full line length. 6895 % 6896 % Roman numerals for page numbers. 6897 \ifnum \pageno>0 \global\pageno = \lastnegativepageno \fi 6898} 6899 6900% redefined for the two-volume lispref. We always output on 6901% \jobname.toc even if this is redefined. 6902% 6903\def\tocreadfilename{\jobname.toc} 6904 6905% Normal (long) toc. 6906% 6907\def\contents{% 6908 \startcontents{\putwordTOC}% 6909 \openin 1 \tocreadfilename\space 6910 \ifeof 1 \else 6911 \readtocfile 6912 \fi 6913 \vfill \eject 6914 \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect 6915 \ifeof 1 \else 6916 \pdfmakeoutlines 6917 \fi 6918 \closein 1 6919 \endgroup 6920 \lastnegativepageno = \pageno 6921 \global\pageno = \savepageno 6922} 6923 6924% And just the chapters. 6925\def\summarycontents{% 6926 \startcontents{\putwordShortTOC}% 6927 % 6928 \let\partentry = \shortpartentry 6929 \let\numchapentry = \shortchapentry 6930 \let\appentry = \shortchapentry 6931 \let\unnchapentry = \shortunnchapentry 6932 % We want a true roman here for the page numbers. 6933 \secfonts 6934 \let\rm=\shortcontrm \let\bf=\shortcontbf 6935 \let\sl=\shortcontsl \let\tt=\shortconttt 6936 \rm 6937 \hyphenpenalty = 10000 6938 \advance\baselineskip by 1pt % Open it up a little. 6939 \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{} 6940 \let\appsecentry = \numsecentry 6941 \let\unnsecentry = \numsecentry 6942 \let\numsubsecentry = \numsecentry 6943 \let\appsubsecentry = \numsecentry 6944 \let\unnsubsecentry = \numsecentry 6945 \let\numsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry 6946 \let\appsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry 6947 \let\unnsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry 6948 \openin 1 \tocreadfilename\space 6949 \ifeof 1 \else 6950 \readtocfile 6951 \fi 6952 \closein 1 6953 \vfill \eject 6954 \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect 6955 \endgroup 6956 \lastnegativepageno = \pageno 6957 \global\pageno = \savepageno 6958} 6959\let\shortcontents = \summarycontents 6960 6961% Typeset the label for a chapter or appendix for the short contents. 6962% The arg is, e.g., `A' for an appendix, or `3' for a chapter. 6963% 6964\def\shortchaplabel#1{% 6965 % This space should be enough, since a single number is .5em, and the 6966 % widest letter (M) is 1em, at least in the Computer Modern fonts. 6967 % But use \hss just in case. 6968 % (This space doesn't include the extra space that gets added after 6969 % the label; that gets put in by \shortchapentry above.) 6970 % 6971 % We'd like to right-justify chapter numbers, but that looks strange 6972 % with appendix letters. And right-justifying numbers and 6973 % left-justifying letters looks strange when there is less than 10 6974 % chapters. Have to read the whole toc once to know how many chapters 6975 % there are before deciding ... 6976 \hbox to 1em{#1\hss}% 6977} 6978 6979% These macros generate individual entries in the table of contents. 6980% The first argument is the chapter or section name. 6981% The last argument is the page number. 6982% The arguments in between are the chapter number, section number, ... 6983 6984% Parts, in the main contents. Replace the part number, which doesn't 6985% exist, with an empty box. Let's hope all the numbers have the same width. 6986% Also ignore the page number, which is conventionally not printed. 6987\def\numeralbox{\setbox0=\hbox{8}\hbox to \wd0{\hfil}} 6988\def\partentry#1#2#3#4{% 6989 % Add stretch and a bonus for breaking the page before the part heading. 6990 % This reduces the chance of the page being broken immediately after the 6991 % part heading, before a following chapter heading. 6992 \vskip 0pt plus 5\baselineskip 6993 \penalty-300 6994 \vskip 0pt plus -5\baselineskip 6995 \dochapentry{\numeralbox\labelspace#1}{}% 6996} 6997% 6998% Parts, in the short toc. 6999\def\shortpartentry#1#2#3#4{% 7000 \penalty-300 7001 \vskip.5\baselineskip plus.15\baselineskip minus.1\baselineskip 7002 \shortchapentry{{\bf #1}}{\numeralbox}{}{}% 7003} 7004 7005% Chapters, in the main contents. 7006\def\numchapentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}} 7007 7008% Chapters, in the short toc. 7009% See comments in \dochapentry re vbox and related settings. 7010\def\shortchapentry#1#2#3#4{% 7011 \tocentry{\shortchaplabel{#2}\labelspace #1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#4\egroup}% 7012} 7013 7014% Appendices, in the main contents. 7015% Need the word Appendix, and a fixed-size box. 7016% 7017\def\appendixbox#1{% 7018 % We use M since it's probably the widest letter. 7019 \setbox0 = \hbox{\putwordAppendix{} M}% 7020 \hbox to \wd0{\putwordAppendix{} #1\hss}} 7021% 7022\def\appentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{\appendixbox{#2}\hskip.7em#1}{#4}} 7023 7024% Unnumbered chapters. 7025\def\unnchapentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{#1}{#4}} 7026\def\shortunnchapentry#1#2#3#4{\tocentry{#1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#4\egroup}} 7027 7028% Sections. 7029\def\numsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}} 7030\let\appsecentry=\numsecentry 7031\def\unnsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#1}{#4}} 7032 7033% Subsections. 7034\def\numsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}} 7035\let\appsubsecentry=\numsubsecentry 7036\def\unnsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsecentry{#1}{#4}} 7037 7038% And subsubsections. 7039\def\numsubsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsubsecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}} 7040\let\appsubsubsecentry=\numsubsubsecentry 7041\def\unnsubsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsubsecentry{#1}{#4}} 7042 7043% This parameter controls the indentation of the various levels. 7044% Same as \defaultparindent. 7045\newdimen\tocindent \tocindent = 15pt 7046 7047% Now for the actual typesetting. In all these, #1 is the text and #2 is the 7048% page number. 7049% 7050% If the toc has to be broken over pages, we want it to be at chapters 7051% if at all possible; hence the \penalty. 7052\def\dochapentry#1#2{% 7053 \penalty-300 \vskip1\baselineskip plus.33\baselineskip minus.25\baselineskip 7054 \begingroup 7055 % Move the page numbers slightly to the right 7056 \advance\entryrightmargin by -0.05em 7057 \chapentryfonts 7058 \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}% 7059 \endgroup 7060 \nobreak\vskip .25\baselineskip plus.1\baselineskip 7061} 7062 7063\def\dosecentry#1#2{\begingroup 7064 \secentryfonts \leftskip=\tocindent 7065 \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}% 7066\endgroup} 7067 7068\def\dosubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup 7069 \subsecentryfonts \leftskip=2\tocindent 7070 \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}% 7071\endgroup} 7072 7073\def\dosubsubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup 7074 \subsubsecentryfonts \leftskip=3\tocindent 7075 \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}% 7076\endgroup} 7077 7078% We use the same \entry macro as for the index entries. 7079\let\tocentry = \entry 7080 7081% Space between chapter (or whatever) number and the title. 7082\def\labelspace{\hskip1em \relax} 7083 7084\def\dopageno#1{{\rm #1}} 7085\def\doshortpageno#1{{\rm #1}} 7086 7087\def\chapentryfonts{\secfonts \rm} 7088\def\secentryfonts{\textfonts} 7089\def\subsecentryfonts{\textfonts} 7090\def\subsubsecentryfonts{\textfonts} 7091 7092 7093\message{environments,} 7094% @foo ... @end foo. 7095 7096% @tex ... @end tex escapes into raw TeX temporarily. 7097% One exception: @ is still an escape character, so that @end tex works. 7098% But \@ or @@ will get a plain @ character. 7099 7100\envdef\tex{% 7101 \setupmarkupstyle{tex}% 7102 \catcode `\\=0 \catcode `\{=1 \catcode `\}=2 7103 \catcode `\$=3 \catcode `\&=4 \catcode `\#=6 7104 \catcode `\^=7 \catcode `\_=8 \catcode `\~=\active \let~=\tie 7105 \catcode `\%=14 7106 \catcode `\+=\other 7107 \catcode `\"=\other 7108 \catcode `\|=\other 7109 \catcode `\<=\other 7110 \catcode `\>=\other 7111 \catcode `\`=\other 7112 \catcode `\'=\other 7113 % 7114 % ' is active in math mode (mathcode"8000). So reset it, and all our 7115 % other math active characters (just in case), to plain's definitions. 7116 \mathactive 7117 % 7118 % Inverse of the list at the beginning of the file. 7119 \let\b=\ptexb 7120 \let\bullet=\ptexbullet 7121 \let\c=\ptexc 7122 \let\,=\ptexcomma 7123 \let\.=\ptexdot 7124 \let\dots=\ptexdots 7125 \let\equiv=\ptexequiv 7126 \let\!=\ptexexclam 7127 \let\i=\ptexi 7128 \let\indent=\ptexindent 7129 \let\noindent=\ptexnoindent 7130 \let\{=\ptexlbrace 7131 \let\+=\tabalign 7132 \let\}=\ptexrbrace 7133 \let\/=\ptexslash 7134 \let\sp=\ptexsp 7135 \let\*=\ptexstar 7136 %\let\sup=\ptexsup % do not redefine, we want @sup to work in math mode 7137 \let\t=\ptext 7138 \expandafter \let\csname top\endcsname=\ptextop % we've made it outer 7139 \let\frenchspacing=\plainfrenchspacing 7140 % 7141 \def\endldots{\mathinner{\ldots\ldots\ldots\ldots}}% 7142 \def\enddots{\relax\ifmmode\endldots\else$\mathsurround=0pt \endldots\,$\fi}% 7143 \def\@{@}% 7144} 7145% There is no need to define \Etex. 7146 7147% Define @lisp ... @end lisp. 7148% @lisp environment forms a group so it can rebind things, 7149% including the definition of @end lisp (which normally is erroneous). 7150 7151% Amount to narrow the margins by for @lisp. 7152\newskip\lispnarrowing \lispnarrowing=0.4in 7153 7154% This is the definition that ^^M gets inside @lisp, @example, and other 7155% such environments. \null is better than a space, since it doesn't 7156% have any width. 7157\def\lisppar{\null\endgraf} 7158 7159% This space is always present above and below environments. 7160\newskip\envskipamount \envskipamount = 0pt 7161 7162% Make spacing and below environment symmetrical. We use \parskip here 7163% to help in doing that, since in @example-like environments \parskip 7164% is reset to zero; thus the \afterenvbreak inserts no space -- but the 7165% start of the next paragraph will insert \parskip. 7166% 7167\def\aboveenvbreak{{% 7168 % =10000 instead of <10000 because of a special case in \itemzzz and 7169 % \sectionheading, q.v. 7170 \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else 7171 \advance\envskipamount by \parskip 7172 \endgraf 7173 \ifdim\lastskip<\envskipamount 7174 \removelastskip 7175 \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 7176 % Penalize breaking before the environment, because preceding text 7177 % often leads into it. 7178 \penalty100 7179 \fi 7180 \vskip\envskipamount 7181 \fi 7182 \fi 7183}} 7184 7185\def\afterenvbreak{{% 7186 % =10000 instead of <10000 because of a special case in \itemzzz and 7187 % \sectionheading, q.v. 7188 \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else 7189 \advance\envskipamount by \parskip 7190 \endgraf 7191 \ifdim\lastskip<\envskipamount 7192 \removelastskip 7193 % it's not a good place to break if the last penalty was \nobreak 7194 % or better ... 7195 \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 \penalty-50 \fi 7196 \vskip\envskipamount 7197 \fi 7198 \fi 7199}} 7200 7201% \nonarrowing is a flag. If "set", @lisp etc don't narrow margins; it will 7202% also clear it, so that its embedded environments do the narrowing again. 7203\let\nonarrowing=\relax 7204 7205% @cartouche ... @end cartouche: draw rectangle w/rounded corners around 7206% environment contents. 7207\font\circle=lcircle10 7208\newdimen\circthick 7209\newdimen\cartouter\newdimen\cartinner 7210\newskip\normbskip\newskip\normpskip\newskip\normlskip 7211\circthick=\fontdimen8\circle 7212% 7213\def\ctl{{\circle\char'013\hskip -6pt}}% 6pt from pl file: 1/2charwidth 7214\def\ctr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'010}} 7215\def\cbl{{\circle\char'012\hskip -6pt}} 7216\def\cbr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'011}} 7217\def\carttop{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip 7218 \ctl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\ctr 7219 \hskip\rskip}} 7220\def\cartbot{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip 7221 \cbl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\cbr 7222 \hskip\rskip}} 7223% 7224\newskip\lskip\newskip\rskip 7225 7226\envdef\cartouche{% 7227 \ifhmode\par\fi % can't be in the midst of a paragraph. 7228 \startsavinginserts 7229 \lskip=\leftskip \rskip=\rightskip 7230 \leftskip=0pt\rightskip=0pt % we want these *outside*. 7231 \cartinner=\hsize \advance\cartinner by-\lskip 7232 \advance\cartinner by-\rskip 7233 \cartouter=\hsize 7234 \advance\cartouter by 18.4pt % allow for 3pt kerns on either 7235 % side, and for 6pt waste from 7236 % each corner char, and rule thickness 7237 \normbskip=\baselineskip \normpskip=\parskip \normlskip=\lineskip 7238 % 7239 % If this cartouche directly follows a sectioning command, we need the 7240 % \parskip glue (backspaced over by default) or the cartouche can 7241 % collide with the section heading. 7242 \ifnum\lastpenalty>10000 \vskip\parskip \penalty\lastpenalty \fi 7243 % 7244 \setbox\groupbox=\vbox\bgroup 7245 \baselineskip=0pt\parskip=0pt\lineskip=0pt 7246 \carttop 7247 \hbox\bgroup 7248 \hskip\lskip 7249 \vrule\kern3pt 7250 \vbox\bgroup 7251 \kern3pt 7252 \hsize=\cartinner 7253 \baselineskip=\normbskip 7254 \lineskip=\normlskip 7255 \parskip=\normpskip 7256 \vskip -\parskip 7257 \comment % For explanation, see the end of def\group. 7258} 7259\def\Ecartouche{% 7260 \ifhmode\par\fi 7261 \kern3pt 7262 \egroup 7263 \kern3pt\vrule 7264 \hskip\rskip 7265 \egroup 7266 \cartbot 7267 \egroup 7268 \addgroupbox 7269 \checkinserts 7270} 7271 7272 7273% This macro is called at the beginning of all the @example variants, 7274% inside a group. 7275\newdimen\nonfillparindent 7276\def\nonfillstart{% 7277 \aboveenvbreak 7278 \ifdim\hfuzz < 12pt \hfuzz = 12pt \fi % Don't be fussy 7279 \sepspaces % Make spaces be word-separators rather than space tokens. 7280 \let\par = \lisppar % don't ignore blank lines 7281 \obeylines % each line of input is a line of output 7282 \parskip = 0pt 7283 % Turn off paragraph indentation but redefine \indent to emulate 7284 % the normal \indent. 7285 \nonfillparindent=\parindent 7286 \parindent = 0pt 7287 \let\indent\nonfillindent 7288 % 7289 \emergencystretch = 0pt % don't try to avoid overfull boxes 7290 \ifx\nonarrowing\relax 7291 \advance \leftskip by \lispnarrowing 7292 \exdentamount=\lispnarrowing 7293 \else 7294 \let\nonarrowing = \relax 7295 \fi 7296 \let\exdent=\nofillexdent 7297} 7298 7299\begingroup 7300\obeyspaces 7301% We want to swallow spaces (but not other tokens) after the fake 7302% @indent in our nonfill-environments, where spaces are normally 7303% active and set to @tie, resulting in them not being ignored after 7304% @indent. 7305\gdef\nonfillindent{\futurelet\temp\nonfillindentcheck}% 7306\gdef\nonfillindentcheck{% 7307\ifx\temp % 7308\expandafter\nonfillindentgobble% 7309\else% 7310\leavevmode\nonfillindentbox% 7311\fi% 7312}% 7313\endgroup 7314\def\nonfillindentgobble#1{\nonfillindent} 7315\def\nonfillindentbox{\hbox to \nonfillparindent{\hss}} 7316 7317% If you want all examples etc. small: @set dispenvsize small. 7318% If you want even small examples the full size: @set dispenvsize nosmall. 7319% This affects the following displayed environments: 7320% @example, @display, @format, @lisp 7321% 7322\def\smallword{small} 7323\def\nosmallword{nosmall} 7324\let\SETdispenvsize\relax 7325\def\setnormaldispenv{% 7326 \ifx\SETdispenvsize\smallword 7327 % end paragraph for sake of leading, in case document has no blank 7328 % line. This is redundant with what happens in \aboveenvbreak, but 7329 % we need to do it before changing the fonts, and it's inconvenient 7330 % to change the fonts afterward. 7331 \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else \endgraf \fi 7332 \smallexamplefonts \rm 7333 \fi 7334} 7335\def\setsmalldispenv{% 7336 \ifx\SETdispenvsize\nosmallword 7337 \else 7338 \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else \endgraf \fi 7339 \smallexamplefonts \rm 7340 \fi 7341} 7342 7343% We often define two environments, @foo and @smallfoo. 7344% Let's do it in one command. #1 is the env name, #2 the definition. 7345\def\makedispenvdef#1#2{% 7346 \expandafter\envdef\csname#1\endcsname {\setnormaldispenv #2}% 7347 \expandafter\envdef\csname small#1\endcsname {\setsmalldispenv #2}% 7348 \expandafter\let\csname E#1\endcsname \afterenvbreak 7349 \expandafter\let\csname Esmall#1\endcsname \afterenvbreak 7350} 7351 7352% Define two environment synonyms (#1 and #2) for an environment. 7353\def\maketwodispenvdef#1#2#3{% 7354 \makedispenvdef{#1}{#3}% 7355 \makedispenvdef{#2}{#3}% 7356} 7357% 7358% @lisp: indented, narrowed, typewriter font; 7359% @example: same as @lisp. 7360% 7361% @smallexample and @smalllisp: use smaller fonts. 7362% Originally contributed by Pavel@xerox. 7363% 7364\maketwodispenvdef{lisp}{example}{% 7365 \nonfillstart 7366 \tt\setupmarkupstyle{example}% 7367 \let\kbdfont = \kbdexamplefont % Allow @kbd to do something special. 7368 \gobble % eat return 7369} 7370% @display/@smalldisplay: same as @lisp except keep current font. 7371% 7372\makedispenvdef{display}{% 7373 \nonfillstart 7374 \gobble 7375} 7376 7377% @format/@smallformat: same as @display except don't narrow margins. 7378% 7379\makedispenvdef{format}{% 7380 \let\nonarrowing = t% 7381 \nonfillstart 7382 \gobble 7383} 7384 7385% @flushleft: same as @format, but doesn't obey \SETdispenvsize. 7386\envdef\flushleft{% 7387 \let\nonarrowing = t% 7388 \nonfillstart 7389 \gobble 7390} 7391\let\Eflushleft = \afterenvbreak 7392 7393% @flushright. 7394% 7395\envdef\flushright{% 7396 \let\nonarrowing = t% 7397 \nonfillstart 7398 \advance\leftskip by 0pt plus 1fill\relax 7399 \gobble 7400} 7401\let\Eflushright = \afterenvbreak 7402 7403 7404% @raggedright does more-or-less normal line breaking but no right 7405% justification. From plain.tex. Don't stretch around special 7406% characters in urls in this environment, since the stretch at the right 7407% should be enough. 7408\envdef\raggedright{% 7409 \rightskip0pt plus2.4em \spaceskip.3333em \xspaceskip.5em\relax 7410 \def\urefprestretchamount{0pt}% 7411 \def\urefpoststretchamount{0pt}% 7412} 7413\let\Eraggedright\par 7414 7415\envdef\raggedleft{% 7416 \parindent=0pt \leftskip0pt plus2em 7417 \spaceskip.3333em \xspaceskip.5em \parfillskip=0pt 7418 \hbadness=10000 % Last line will usually be underfull, so turn off 7419 % badness reporting. 7420} 7421\let\Eraggedleft\par 7422 7423\envdef\raggedcenter{% 7424 \parindent=0pt \rightskip0pt plus1em \leftskip0pt plus1em 7425 \spaceskip.3333em \xspaceskip.5em \parfillskip=0pt 7426 \hbadness=10000 % Last line will usually be underfull, so turn off 7427 % badness reporting. 7428} 7429\let\Eraggedcenter\par 7430 7431 7432% @quotation does normal linebreaking (hence we can't use \nonfillstart) 7433% and narrows the margins. We keep \parskip nonzero in general, since 7434% we're doing normal filling. So, when using \aboveenvbreak and 7435% \afterenvbreak, temporarily make \parskip 0. 7436% 7437\makedispenvdef{quotation}{\quotationstart} 7438% 7439\def\quotationstart{% 7440 \indentedblockstart % same as \indentedblock, but increase right margin too. 7441 \ifx\nonarrowing\relax 7442 \advance\rightskip by \lispnarrowing 7443 \fi 7444 \parsearg\quotationlabel 7445} 7446 7447% We have retained a nonzero parskip for the environment, since we're 7448% doing normal filling. 7449% 7450\def\Equotation{% 7451 \par 7452 \ifx\quotationauthor\thisisundefined\else 7453 % indent a bit. 7454 \leftline{\kern 2\leftskip \sl ---\quotationauthor}% 7455 \fi 7456 {\parskip=0pt \afterenvbreak}% 7457} 7458\def\Esmallquotation{\Equotation} 7459 7460% If we're given an argument, typeset it in bold with a colon after. 7461\def\quotationlabel#1{% 7462 \def\temp{#1}% 7463 \ifx\temp\empty \else 7464 {\bf #1: }% 7465 \fi 7466} 7467 7468% @indentedblock is like @quotation, but indents only on the left and 7469% has no optional argument. 7470% 7471\makedispenvdef{indentedblock}{\indentedblockstart} 7472% 7473\def\indentedblockstart{% 7474 {\parskip=0pt \aboveenvbreak}% because \aboveenvbreak inserts \parskip 7475 \parindent=0pt 7476 % 7477 % @cartouche defines \nonarrowing to inhibit narrowing at next level down. 7478 \ifx\nonarrowing\relax 7479 \advance\leftskip by \lispnarrowing 7480 \exdentamount = \lispnarrowing 7481 \else 7482 \let\nonarrowing = \relax 7483 \fi 7484} 7485 7486% Keep a nonzero parskip for the environment, since we're doing normal filling. 7487% 7488\def\Eindentedblock{% 7489 \par 7490 {\parskip=0pt \afterenvbreak}% 7491} 7492\def\Esmallindentedblock{\Eindentedblock} 7493 7494 7495% LaTeX-like @verbatim...@end verbatim and @verb{<char>...<char>} 7496% If we want to allow any <char> as delimiter, 7497% we need the curly braces so that makeinfo sees the @verb command, eg: 7498% `@verbx...x' would look like the '@verbx' command. --janneke@gnu.org 7499% 7500% [Knuth]: Donald Ervin Knuth, 1996. The TeXbook. 7501% 7502% [Knuth] p.344; only we need to do the other characters Texinfo sets 7503% active too. Otherwise, they get lost as the first character on a 7504% verbatim line. 7505\def\dospecials{% 7506 \do\ \do\\\do\{\do\}\do\$\do\&% 7507 \do\#\do\^\do\^^K\do\_\do\^^A\do\%\do\~% 7508 \do\<\do\>\do\|\do\@\do+\do\"% 7509 % Don't do the quotes -- if we do, @set txicodequoteundirected and 7510 % @set txicodequotebacktick will not have effect on @verb and 7511 % @verbatim, and ?` and !` ligatures won't get disabled. 7512 %\do\`\do\'% 7513} 7514% 7515% [Knuth] p. 380 7516\def\uncatcodespecials{% 7517 \def\do##1{\catcode`##1=\other}\dospecials} 7518% 7519% Setup for the @verb command. 7520% 7521% Eight spaces for a tab 7522\begingroup 7523 \catcode`\^^I=\active 7524 \gdef\tabeightspaces{\catcode`\^^I=\active\def^^I{\ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ }} 7525\endgroup 7526% 7527\def\setupverb{% 7528 \tt % easiest (and conventionally used) font for verbatim 7529 \def\par{\leavevmode\endgraf}% 7530 \setupmarkupstyle{verb}% 7531 \tabeightspaces 7532 % Respect line breaks, 7533 % print special symbols as themselves, and 7534 % make each space count 7535 % must do in this order: 7536 \obeylines \uncatcodespecials \sepspaces 7537} 7538 7539% Setup for the @verbatim environment 7540% 7541% Real tab expansion. 7542\newdimen\tabw \setbox0=\hbox{\tt\space} \tabw=8\wd0 % tab amount 7543% 7544% We typeset each line of the verbatim in an \hbox, so we can handle 7545% tabs. The \global is in case the verbatim line starts with an accent, 7546% or some other command that starts with a begin-group. Otherwise, the 7547% entire \verbbox would disappear at the corresponding end-group, before 7548% it is typeset. Meanwhile, we can't have nested verbatim commands 7549% (can we?), so the \global won't be overwriting itself. 7550\newbox\verbbox 7551\def\starttabbox{\global\setbox\verbbox=\hbox\bgroup} 7552% 7553\begingroup 7554 \catcode`\^^I=\active 7555 \gdef\tabexpand{% 7556 \catcode`\^^I=\active 7557 \def^^I{\leavevmode\egroup 7558 \dimen\verbbox=\wd\verbbox % the width so far, or since the previous tab 7559 \divide\dimen\verbbox by\tabw 7560 \multiply\dimen\verbbox by\tabw % compute previous multiple of \tabw 7561 \advance\dimen\verbbox by\tabw % advance to next multiple of \tabw 7562 \wd\verbbox=\dimen\verbbox \box\verbbox \starttabbox 7563 }% 7564 } 7565\endgroup 7566 7567% start the verbatim environment. 7568\def\setupverbatim{% 7569 \let\nonarrowing = t% 7570 \nonfillstart 7571 \tt % easiest (and conventionally used) font for verbatim 7572 % The \leavevmode here is for blank lines. Otherwise, we would 7573 % never \starttabox and the \egroup would end verbatim mode. 7574 \def\par{\leavevmode\egroup\box\verbbox\endgraf}% 7575 \tabexpand 7576 \setupmarkupstyle{verbatim}% 7577 % Respect line breaks, 7578 % print special symbols as themselves, and 7579 % make each space count. 7580 % Must do in this order: 7581 \obeylines \uncatcodespecials \sepspaces 7582 \everypar{\starttabbox}% 7583} 7584 7585% Do the @verb magic: verbatim text is quoted by unique 7586% delimiter characters. Before first delimiter expect a 7587% right brace, after last delimiter expect closing brace: 7588% 7589% \def\doverb'{'<char>#1<char>'}'{#1} 7590% 7591% [Knuth] p. 382; only eat outer {} 7592\begingroup 7593 \catcode`[=1\catcode`]=2\catcode`\{=\other\catcode`\}=\other 7594 \gdef\doverb{#1[\def\next##1#1}[##1\endgroup]\next] 7595\endgroup 7596% 7597\def\verb{\begingroup\setupverb\doverb} 7598% 7599% 7600% Do the @verbatim magic: define the macro \doverbatim so that 7601% the (first) argument ends when '@end verbatim' is reached, ie: 7602% 7603% \def\doverbatim#1@end verbatim{#1} 7604% 7605% For Texinfo it's a lot easier than for LaTeX, 7606% because texinfo's \verbatim doesn't stop at '\end{verbatim}': 7607% we need not redefine '\', '{' and '}'. 7608% 7609% Inspired by LaTeX's verbatim command set [latex.ltx] 7610% 7611\begingroup 7612 \catcode`\ =\active 7613 \obeylines % 7614 % ignore everything up to the first ^^M, that's the newline at the end 7615 % of the @verbatim input line itself. Otherwise we get an extra blank 7616 % line in the output. 7617 \xdef\doverbatim#1^^M#2@end verbatim{#2\noexpand\end\gobble verbatim}% 7618 % We really want {...\end verbatim} in the body of the macro, but 7619 % without the active space; thus we have to use \xdef and \gobble. 7620\endgroup 7621% 7622\envdef\verbatim{% 7623 \setupverbatim\doverbatim 7624} 7625\let\Everbatim = \afterenvbreak 7626 7627 7628% @verbatiminclude FILE - insert text of file in verbatim environment. 7629% 7630\def\verbatiminclude{\parseargusing\filenamecatcodes\doverbatiminclude} 7631% 7632\def\doverbatiminclude#1{% 7633 {% 7634 \makevalueexpandable 7635 \setupverbatim 7636 \indexnofonts % Allow `@@' and other weird things in file names. 7637 \wlog{texinfo.tex: doing @verbatiminclude of #1^^J}% 7638 \input #1 7639 \afterenvbreak 7640 }% 7641} 7642 7643% @copying ... @end copying. 7644% Save the text away for @insertcopying later. 7645% 7646% We save the uninterpreted tokens, rather than creating a box. 7647% Saving the text in a box would be much easier, but then all the 7648% typesetting commands (@smallbook, font changes, etc.) have to be done 7649% beforehand -- and a) we want @copying to be done first in the source 7650% file; b) letting users define the frontmatter in as flexible order as 7651% possible is desirable. 7652% 7653\def\copying{\checkenv{}\begingroup\scanargctxt\docopying} 7654\def\docopying#1@end copying{\endgroup\def\copyingtext{#1}} 7655% 7656\def\insertcopying{% 7657 \begingroup 7658 \parindent = 0pt % paragraph indentation looks wrong on title page 7659 \scanexp\copyingtext 7660 \endgroup 7661} 7662 7663 7664\message{defuns,} 7665% @defun etc. 7666 7667\newskip\defbodyindent \defbodyindent=.4in 7668\newskip\defargsindent \defargsindent=50pt 7669\newskip\deflastargmargin \deflastargmargin=18pt 7670\newcount\defunpenalty 7671 7672% Start the processing of @deffn: 7673\def\startdefun{% 7674 \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 7675 \medbreak 7676 \defunpenalty=10003 % Will keep this @deffn together with the 7677 % following @def command, see below. 7678 \else 7679 % If there are two @def commands in a row, we'll have a \nobreak, 7680 % which is there to keep the function description together with its 7681 % header. But if there's nothing but headers, we need to allow a 7682 % break somewhere. Check specifically for penalty 10002, inserted 7683 % by \printdefunline, instead of 10000, since the sectioning 7684 % commands also insert a nobreak penalty, and we don't want to allow 7685 % a break between a section heading and a defun. 7686 % 7687 % As a further refinement, we avoid "club" headers by signalling 7688 % with penalty of 10003 after the very first @deffn in the 7689 % sequence (see above), and penalty of 10002 after any following 7690 % @def command. 7691 \ifnum\lastpenalty=10002 \penalty2000 \else \defunpenalty=10002 \fi 7692 % 7693 % Similarly, after a section heading, do not allow a break. 7694 % But do insert the glue. 7695 \medskip % preceded by discardable penalty, so not a breakpoint 7696 \fi 7697 % 7698 \parindent=0in 7699 \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent 7700 \exdentamount=\defbodyindent 7701} 7702 7703\def\dodefunx#1{% 7704 % First, check whether we are in the right environment: 7705 \checkenv#1% 7706 % 7707 % As above, allow line break if we have multiple x headers in a row. 7708 % It's not a great place, though. 7709 \ifnum\lastpenalty=10002 \penalty3000 \else \defunpenalty=10002 \fi 7710 % 7711 % And now, it's time to reuse the body of the original defun: 7712 \expandafter\gobbledefun#1% 7713} 7714\def\gobbledefun#1\startdefun{} 7715 7716% \printdefunline \deffnheader{text} 7717% 7718\def\printdefunline#1#2{% 7719 \begingroup 7720 % call \deffnheader: 7721 #1#2 \endheader 7722 % common ending: 7723 \interlinepenalty = 10000 7724 \advance\rightskip by 0pt plus 1fil\relax 7725 \endgraf 7726 \nobreak\vskip -\parskip 7727 \penalty\defunpenalty % signal to \startdefun and \dodefunx 7728 % Some of the @defun-type tags do not enable magic parentheses, 7729 % rendering the following check redundant. But we don't optimize. 7730 \checkparencounts 7731 \endgroup 7732} 7733 7734\def\Edefun{\endgraf\medbreak} 7735 7736% \makedefun{deffn} creates \deffn, \deffnx and \Edeffn; 7737% the only thing remaining is to define \deffnheader. 7738% 7739\def\makedefun#1{% 7740 \expandafter\let\csname E#1\endcsname = \Edefun 7741 \edef\temp{\noexpand\domakedefun 7742 \makecsname{#1}\makecsname{#1x}\makecsname{#1header}}% 7743 \temp 7744} 7745 7746% \domakedefun \deffn \deffnx \deffnheader { (defn. of \deffnheader) } 7747% 7748% Define \deffn and \deffnx, without parameters. 7749% \deffnheader has to be defined explicitly. 7750% 7751\def\domakedefun#1#2#3{% 7752 \envdef#1{% 7753 \startdefun 7754 \doingtypefnfalse % distinguish typed functions from all else 7755 \parseargusing\activeparens{\printdefunline#3}% 7756 }% 7757 \def#2{\dodefunx#1}% 7758 \def#3% 7759} 7760 7761\newif\ifdoingtypefn % doing typed function? 7762\newif\ifrettypeownline % typeset return type on its own line? 7763 7764% @deftypefnnewline on|off says whether the return type of typed functions 7765% are printed on their own line. This affects @deftypefn, @deftypefun, 7766% @deftypeop, and @deftypemethod. 7767% 7768\parseargdef\deftypefnnewline{% 7769 \def\temp{#1}% 7770 \ifx\temp\onword 7771 \expandafter\let\csname SETtxideftypefnnl\endcsname 7772 = \empty 7773 \else\ifx\temp\offword 7774 \expandafter\let\csname SETtxideftypefnnl\endcsname 7775 = \relax 7776 \else 7777 \errhelp = \EMsimple 7778 \errmessage{Unknown @txideftypefnnl value `\temp', 7779 must be on|off}% 7780 \fi\fi 7781} 7782 7783% Untyped functions: 7784 7785% @deffn category name args 7786\makedefun{deffn}{\deffngeneral{}} 7787 7788% @deffn category class name args 7789\makedefun{defop}#1 {\defopon{#1\ \putwordon}} 7790 7791% \defopon {category on}class name args 7792\def\defopon#1#2 {\deffngeneral{\putwordon\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} } 7793 7794% \deffngeneral {subind}category name args 7795% 7796\def\deffngeneral#1#2 #3 #4\endheader{% 7797 % Remember that \dosubind{fn}{foo}{} is equivalent to \doind{fn}{foo}. 7798 \dosubind{fn}{\code{#3}}{#1}% 7799 \defname{#2}{}{#3}\magicamp\defunargs{#4\unskip}% 7800} 7801 7802% Typed functions: 7803 7804% @deftypefn category type name args 7805\makedefun{deftypefn}{\deftypefngeneral{}} 7806 7807% @deftypeop category class type name args 7808\makedefun{deftypeop}#1 {\deftypeopon{#1\ \putwordon}} 7809 7810% \deftypeopon {category on}class type name args 7811\def\deftypeopon#1#2 {\deftypefngeneral{\putwordon\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} } 7812 7813% \deftypefngeneral {subind}category type name args 7814% 7815\def\deftypefngeneral#1#2 #3 #4 #5\endheader{% 7816 \dosubind{fn}{\code{#4}}{#1}% 7817 \doingtypefntrue 7818 \defname{#2}{#3}{#4}\defunargs{#5\unskip}% 7819} 7820 7821% Typed variables: 7822 7823% @deftypevr category type var args 7824\makedefun{deftypevr}{\deftypecvgeneral{}} 7825 7826% @deftypecv category class type var args 7827\makedefun{deftypecv}#1 {\deftypecvof{#1\ \putwordof}} 7828 7829% \deftypecvof {category of}class type var args 7830\def\deftypecvof#1#2 {\deftypecvgeneral{\putwordof\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} } 7831 7832% \deftypecvgeneral {subind}category type var args 7833% 7834\def\deftypecvgeneral#1#2 #3 #4 #5\endheader{% 7835 \dosubind{vr}{\code{#4}}{#1}% 7836 \defname{#2}{#3}{#4}\defunargs{#5\unskip}% 7837} 7838 7839% Untyped variables: 7840 7841% @defvr category var args 7842\makedefun{defvr}#1 {\deftypevrheader{#1} {} } 7843 7844% @defcv category class var args 7845\makedefun{defcv}#1 {\defcvof{#1\ \putwordof}} 7846 7847% \defcvof {category of}class var args 7848\def\defcvof#1#2 {\deftypecvof{#1}#2 {} } 7849 7850% Types: 7851 7852% @deftp category name args 7853\makedefun{deftp}#1 #2 #3\endheader{% 7854 \doind{tp}{\code{#2}}% 7855 \defname{#1}{}{#2}\defunargs{#3\unskip}% 7856} 7857 7858% Remaining @defun-like shortcuts: 7859\makedefun{defun}{\deffnheader{\putwordDeffunc} } 7860\makedefun{defmac}{\deffnheader{\putwordDefmac} } 7861\makedefun{defspec}{\deffnheader{\putwordDefspec} } 7862\makedefun{deftypefun}{\deftypefnheader{\putwordDeffunc} } 7863\makedefun{defvar}{\defvrheader{\putwordDefvar} } 7864\makedefun{defopt}{\defvrheader{\putwordDefopt} } 7865\makedefun{deftypevar}{\deftypevrheader{\putwordDefvar} } 7866\makedefun{defmethod}{\defopon\putwordMethodon} 7867\makedefun{deftypemethod}{\deftypeopon\putwordMethodon} 7868\makedefun{defivar}{\defcvof\putwordInstanceVariableof} 7869\makedefun{deftypeivar}{\deftypecvof\putwordInstanceVariableof} 7870 7871% \defname, which formats the name of the @def (not the args). 7872% #1 is the category, such as "Function". 7873% #2 is the return type, if any. 7874% #3 is the function name. 7875% 7876% We are followed by (but not passed) the arguments, if any. 7877% 7878\def\defname#1#2#3{% 7879 \par 7880 % Get the values of \leftskip and \rightskip as they were outside the @def... 7881 \advance\leftskip by -\defbodyindent 7882 % 7883 % Determine if we are typesetting the return type of a typed function 7884 % on a line by itself. 7885 \rettypeownlinefalse 7886 \ifdoingtypefn % doing a typed function specifically? 7887 % then check user option for putting return type on its own line: 7888 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxideftypefnnl\endcsname\relax \else 7889 \rettypeownlinetrue 7890 \fi 7891 \fi 7892 % 7893 % How we'll format the category name. Putting it in brackets helps 7894 % distinguish it from the body text that may end up on the next line 7895 % just below it. 7896 \def\temp{#1}% 7897 \setbox0=\hbox{\kern\deflastargmargin \ifx\temp\empty\else [\rm\temp]\fi} 7898 % 7899 % Figure out line sizes for the paragraph shape. We'll always have at 7900 % least two. 7901 \tempnum = 2 7902 % 7903 % The first line needs space for \box0; but if \rightskip is nonzero, 7904 % we need only space for the part of \box0 which exceeds it: 7905 \dimen0=\hsize \advance\dimen0 by -\wd0 \advance\dimen0 by \rightskip 7906 % 7907 % If doing a return type on its own line, we'll have another line. 7908 \ifrettypeownline 7909 \advance\tempnum by 1 7910 \def\maybeshapeline{0in \hsize}% 7911 \else 7912 \def\maybeshapeline{}% 7913 \fi 7914 % 7915 % The continuations: 7916 \dimen2=\hsize \advance\dimen2 by -\defargsindent 7917 % 7918 % The final paragraph shape: 7919 \parshape \tempnum 0in \dimen0 \maybeshapeline \defargsindent \dimen2 7920 % 7921 % Put the category name at the right margin. 7922 \noindent 7923 \hbox to 0pt{% 7924 \hfil\box0 \kern-\hsize 7925 % \hsize has to be shortened this way: 7926 \kern\leftskip 7927 % Intentionally do not respect \rightskip, since we need the space. 7928 }% 7929 % 7930 % Allow all lines to be underfull without complaint: 7931 \tolerance=10000 \hbadness=10000 7932 \exdentamount=\defbodyindent 7933 {% 7934 % defun fonts. We use typewriter by default (used to be bold) because: 7935 % . we're printing identifiers, they should be in tt in principle. 7936 % . in languages with many accents, such as Czech or French, it's 7937 % common to leave accents off identifiers. The result looks ok in 7938 % tt, but exceedingly strange in rm. 7939 % . we don't want -- and --- to be treated as ligatures. 7940 % . this still does not fix the ?` and !` ligatures, but so far no 7941 % one has made identifiers using them :). 7942 \df \tt 7943 \def\temp{#2}% text of the return type 7944 \ifx\temp\empty\else 7945 \tclose{\temp}% typeset the return type 7946 \ifrettypeownline 7947 % put return type on its own line; prohibit line break following: 7948 \hfil\vadjust{\nobreak}\break 7949 \else 7950 \space % type on same line, so just followed by a space 7951 \fi 7952 \fi % no return type 7953 #3% output function name 7954 }% 7955 {\rm\enskip}% hskip 0.5 em of \rmfont 7956 % 7957 \boldbrax 7958 % arguments will be output next, if any. 7959} 7960 7961% Print arguments in slanted roman (not ttsl), inconsistently with using 7962% tt for the name. This is because literal text is sometimes needed in 7963% the argument list (groff manual), and ttsl and tt are not very 7964% distinguishable. Prevent hyphenation at `-' chars. 7965% 7966\def\defunargs#1{% 7967 % use sl by default (not ttsl), 7968 % tt for the names. 7969 \df \sl \hyphenchar\font=0 7970 % 7971 % On the other hand, if an argument has two dashes (for instance), we 7972 % want a way to get ttsl. We used to recommend @var for that, so 7973 % leave the code in, but it's strange for @var to lead to typewriter. 7974 % Nowadays we recommend @code, since the difference between a ttsl hyphen 7975 % and a tt hyphen is pretty tiny. @code also disables ?` !`. 7976 \def\var##1{{\setupmarkupstyle{var}\ttslanted{##1}}}% 7977 #1% 7978 \sl\hyphenchar\font=45 7979} 7980 7981% We want ()&[] to print specially on the defun line. 7982% 7983\def\activeparens{% 7984 \catcode`\(=\active \catcode`\)=\active 7985 \catcode`\[=\active \catcode`\]=\active 7986 \catcode`\&=\active 7987} 7988 7989% Make control sequences which act like normal parenthesis chars. 7990\let\lparen = ( \let\rparen = ) 7991 7992% Be sure that we always have a definition for `(', etc. For example, 7993% if the fn name has parens in it, \boldbrax will not be in effect yet, 7994% so TeX would otherwise complain about undefined control sequence. 7995{ 7996 \activeparens 7997 \global\let(=\lparen \global\let)=\rparen 7998 \global\let[=\lbrack \global\let]=\rbrack 7999 \global\let& = \& 8000 8001 \gdef\boldbrax{\let(=\opnr\let)=\clnr\let[=\lbrb\let]=\rbrb} 8002 \gdef\magicamp{\let&=\amprm} 8003} 8004 8005\newcount\parencount 8006 8007% If we encounter &foo, then turn on ()-hacking afterwards 8008\newif\ifampseen 8009\def\amprm#1 {\ampseentrue{\bf\ }} 8010 8011\def\parenfont{% 8012 \ifampseen 8013 % At the first level, print parens in roman, 8014 % otherwise use the default font. 8015 \ifnum \parencount=1 \rm \fi 8016 \else 8017 % The \sf parens (in \boldbrax) actually are a little bolder than 8018 % the contained text. This is especially needed for [ and ] . 8019 \sf 8020 \fi 8021} 8022\def\infirstlevel#1{% 8023 \ifampseen 8024 \ifnum\parencount=1 8025 #1% 8026 \fi 8027 \fi 8028} 8029\def\bfafterword#1 {#1 \bf} 8030 8031\def\opnr{% 8032 \global\advance\parencount by 1 8033 {\parenfont(}% 8034 \infirstlevel \bfafterword 8035} 8036\def\clnr{% 8037 {\parenfont)}% 8038 \infirstlevel \sl 8039 \global\advance\parencount by -1 8040} 8041 8042\newcount\brackcount 8043\def\lbrb{% 8044 \global\advance\brackcount by 1 8045 {\bf[}% 8046} 8047\def\rbrb{% 8048 {\bf]}% 8049 \global\advance\brackcount by -1 8050} 8051 8052\def\checkparencounts{% 8053 \ifnum\parencount=0 \else \badparencount \fi 8054 \ifnum\brackcount=0 \else \badbrackcount \fi 8055} 8056% these should not use \errmessage; the glibc manual, at least, actually 8057% has such constructs (when documenting function pointers). 8058\def\badparencount{% 8059 \message{Warning: unbalanced parentheses in @def...}% 8060 \global\parencount=0 8061} 8062\def\badbrackcount{% 8063 \message{Warning: unbalanced square brackets in @def...}% 8064 \global\brackcount=0 8065} 8066 8067 8068\message{macros,} 8069% @macro. 8070 8071% To do this right we need a feature of e-TeX, \scantokens, 8072% which we arrange to emulate with a temporary file in ordinary TeX. 8073\ifx\eTeXversion\thisisundefined 8074 \newwrite\macscribble 8075 \def\scantokens#1{% 8076 \toks0={#1}% 8077 \immediate\openout\macscribble=\jobname.tmp 8078 \immediate\write\macscribble{\the\toks0}% 8079 \immediate\closeout\macscribble 8080 \input \jobname.tmp 8081 } 8082\fi 8083 8084% alias because \c means cedilla in @tex or @math 8085\let\texinfoc=\c 8086 8087\newcount\savedcatcodeone 8088\newcount\savedcatcodetwo 8089 8090% Used at the time of macro expansion. 8091% Argument is macro body with arguments substituted 8092\def\scanmacro#1{% 8093 \newlinechar`\^^M 8094 \def\xeatspaces{\eatspaces}% 8095 % 8096 % Temporarily undo catcode changes of \printindex. Set catcode of @ to 8097 % 0 so that @-commands in macro expansions aren't printed literally when 8098 % formatting an index file, where \ is used as the escape character. 8099 \savedcatcodeone=\catcode`\@ 8100 \savedcatcodetwo=\catcode`\\ 8101 \catcode`\@=0 8102 \catcode`\\=\active 8103 % 8104 % Process the macro body under the current catcode regime. 8105 \scantokens{#1@texinfoc}% 8106 % 8107 \catcode`\@=\savedcatcodeone 8108 \catcode`\\=\savedcatcodetwo 8109 % 8110 % The \texinfoc is to remove the \newlinechar added by \scantokens, and 8111 % can be noticed by \parsearg. 8112 % We avoid surrounding the call to \scantokens with \bgroup and \egroup 8113 % to allow macros to open or close groups themselves. 8114} 8115 8116% Used for copying and captions 8117\def\scanexp#1{% 8118 \expandafter\scanmacro\expandafter{#1}% 8119} 8120 8121\newcount\paramno % Count of parameters 8122\newtoks\macname % Macro name 8123\newif\ifrecursive % Is it recursive? 8124 8125% List of all defined macros in the form 8126% \commondummyword\macro1\commondummyword\macro2... 8127% Currently is also contains all @aliases; the list can be split 8128% if there is a need. 8129\def\macrolist{} 8130 8131% Add the macro to \macrolist 8132\def\addtomacrolist#1{\expandafter \addtomacrolistxxx \csname#1\endcsname} 8133\def\addtomacrolistxxx#1{% 8134 \toks0 = \expandafter{\macrolist\commondummyword#1}% 8135 \xdef\macrolist{\the\toks0}% 8136} 8137 8138% Utility routines. 8139% This does \let #1 = #2, with \csnames; that is, 8140% \let \csname#1\endcsname = \csname#2\endcsname 8141% (except of course we have to play expansion games). 8142% 8143\def\cslet#1#2{% 8144 \expandafter\let 8145 \csname#1\expandafter\endcsname 8146 \csname#2\endcsname 8147} 8148 8149% Trim leading and trailing spaces off a string. 8150% Concepts from aro-bend problem 15 (see CTAN). 8151{\catcode`\@=11 8152\gdef\eatspaces #1{\expandafter\trim@\expandafter{#1 }} 8153\gdef\trim@ #1{\trim@@ @#1 @ #1 @ @@} 8154\gdef\trim@@ #1@ #2@ #3@@{\trim@@@\empty #2 @} 8155\def\unbrace#1{#1} 8156\unbrace{\gdef\trim@@@ #1 } #2@{#1} 8157} 8158 8159% Trim a single trailing ^^M off a string. 8160{\catcode`\^^M=\other \catcode`\Q=3% 8161\gdef\eatcr #1{\eatcra #1Q^^MQ}% 8162\gdef\eatcra#1^^MQ{\eatcrb#1Q}% 8163\gdef\eatcrb#1Q#2Q{#1}% 8164} 8165 8166% Macro bodies are absorbed as an argument in a context where 8167% all characters are catcode 10, 11 or 12, except \ which is active 8168% (as in normal texinfo). It is necessary to change the definition of \ 8169% to recognize macro arguments; this is the job of \mbodybackslash. 8170% 8171% Non-ASCII encodings make 8-bit characters active, so un-activate 8172% them to avoid their expansion. Must do this non-globally, to 8173% confine the change to the current group. 8174% 8175% It's necessary to have hard CRs when the macro is executed. This is 8176% done by making ^^M (\endlinechar) catcode 12 when reading the macro 8177% body, and then making it the \newlinechar in \scanmacro. 8178% 8179\def\scanctxt{% used as subroutine 8180 \catcode`\"=\other 8181 \catcode`\+=\other 8182 \catcode`\<=\other 8183 \catcode`\>=\other 8184 \catcode`\^=\other 8185 \catcode`\_=\other 8186 \catcode`\|=\other 8187 \catcode`\~=\other 8188 \passthroughcharstrue 8189} 8190 8191\def\scanargctxt{% used for copying and captions, not macros. 8192 \scanctxt 8193 \catcode`\@=\other 8194 \catcode`\\=\other 8195 \catcode`\^^M=\other 8196} 8197 8198\def\macrobodyctxt{% used for @macro definitions 8199 \scanctxt 8200 \catcode`\ =\other 8201 \catcode`\@=\other 8202 \catcode`\{=\other 8203 \catcode`\}=\other 8204 \catcode`\^^M=\other 8205 \usembodybackslash 8206} 8207 8208% Used when scanning braced macro arguments. Note, however, that catcode 8209% changes here are ineffectual if the macro invocation was nested inside 8210% an argument to another Texinfo command. 8211\def\macroargctxt{% 8212 \scanctxt 8213 \catcode`\ =\active 8214 \catcode`\^^M=\other 8215 \catcode`\\=\active 8216} 8217 8218\def\macrolineargctxt{% used for whole-line arguments without braces 8219 \scanctxt 8220 \catcode`\{=\other 8221 \catcode`\}=\other 8222} 8223 8224% \mbodybackslash is the definition of \ in @macro bodies. 8225% It maps \foo\ => \csname macarg.foo\endcsname => #N 8226% where N is the macro parameter number. 8227% We define \csname macarg.\endcsname to be \realbackslash, so 8228% \\ in macro replacement text gets you a backslash. 8229% 8230{\catcode`@=0 @catcode`@\=@active 8231 @gdef@usembodybackslash{@let\=@mbodybackslash} 8232 @gdef@mbodybackslash#1\{@csname macarg.#1@endcsname} 8233} 8234\expandafter\def\csname macarg.\endcsname{\realbackslash} 8235 8236\def\margbackslash#1{\char`\#1 } 8237 8238\def\macro{\recursivefalse\parsearg\macroxxx} 8239\def\rmacro{\recursivetrue\parsearg\macroxxx} 8240 8241\def\macroxxx#1{% 8242 \getargs{#1}% now \macname is the macname and \argl the arglist 8243 \ifx\argl\empty % no arguments 8244 \paramno=0\relax 8245 \else 8246 \expandafter\parsemargdef \argl;% 8247 \if\paramno>256\relax 8248 \ifx\eTeXversion\thisisundefined 8249 \errhelp = \EMsimple 8250 \errmessage{You need eTeX to compile a file with macros with more than 256 arguments} 8251 \fi 8252 \fi 8253 \fi 8254 \if1\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname 8255 \message{Warning: redefining \the\macname}% 8256 \else 8257 \expandafter\ifx\csname \the\macname\endcsname \relax 8258 \else \errmessage{Macro name \the\macname\space already defined}\fi 8259 \global\cslet{macsave.\the\macname}{\the\macname}% 8260 \global\expandafter\let\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname=1% 8261 \addtomacrolist{\the\macname}% 8262 \fi 8263 \begingroup \macrobodyctxt 8264 \ifrecursive \expandafter\parsermacbody 8265 \else \expandafter\parsemacbody 8266 \fi} 8267 8268\parseargdef\unmacro{% 8269 \if1\csname ismacro.#1\endcsname 8270 \global\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}% 8271 \global\expandafter\let \csname ismacro.#1\endcsname=0% 8272 % Remove the macro name from \macrolist: 8273 \begingroup 8274 \expandafter\let\csname#1\endcsname \relax 8275 \let\commondummyword\unmacrodo 8276 \xdef\macrolist{\macrolist}% 8277 \endgroup 8278 \else 8279 \errmessage{Macro #1 not defined}% 8280 \fi 8281} 8282 8283% Called by \do from \dounmacro on each macro. The idea is to omit any 8284% macro definitions that have been changed to \relax. 8285% 8286\def\unmacrodo#1{% 8287 \ifx #1\relax 8288 % remove this 8289 \else 8290 \noexpand\commondummyword \noexpand#1% 8291 \fi 8292} 8293 8294% \getargs -- Parse the arguments to a @macro line. Set \macname to 8295% the name of the macro, and \argl to the braced argument list. 8296\def\getargs#1{\getargsxxx#1{}} 8297\def\getargsxxx#1#{\getmacname #1 \relax\getmacargs} 8298\def\getmacname#1 #2\relax{\macname={#1}} 8299\def\getmacargs#1{\def\argl{#1}} 8300% This made use of the feature that if the last token of a 8301% <parameter list> is #, then the preceding argument is delimited by 8302% an opening brace, and that opening brace is not consumed. 8303 8304% Parse the optional {params} list to @macro or @rmacro. 8305% Set \paramno to the number of arguments, 8306% and \paramlist to a parameter text for the macro (e.g. #1,#2,#3 for a 8307% three-param macro.) Define \macarg.BLAH for each BLAH in the params 8308% list to some hook where the argument is to be expanded. If there are 8309% less than 10 arguments that hook is to be replaced by ##N where N 8310% is the position in that list, that is to say the macro arguments are to be 8311% defined `a la TeX in the macro body. 8312% 8313% That gets used by \mbodybackslash (above). 8314% 8315% If there are 10 or more arguments, a different technique is used: see 8316% \parsemmanyargdef. 8317% 8318\def\parsemargdef#1;{% 8319 \paramno=0\def\paramlist{}% 8320 \let\hash\relax 8321 % \hash is redefined to `#' later to get it into definitions 8322 \let\xeatspaces\relax 8323 \parsemargdefxxx#1,;,% 8324 \ifnum\paramno<10\relax\else 8325 \paramno0\relax 8326 \parsemmanyargdef@@#1,;,% 10 or more arguments 8327 \fi 8328} 8329\def\parsemargdefxxx#1,{% 8330 \if#1;\let\next=\relax 8331 \else \let\next=\parsemargdefxxx 8332 \advance\paramno by 1 8333 \expandafter\edef\csname macarg.\eatspaces{#1}\endcsname 8334 {\xeatspaces{\hash\the\paramno}}% 8335 \edef\paramlist{\paramlist\hash\the\paramno,}% 8336 \fi\next} 8337 8338% \parsemacbody, \parsermacbody 8339% 8340% Read recursive and nonrecursive macro bodies. (They're different since 8341% rec and nonrec macros end differently.) 8342% 8343% We are in \macrobodyctxt, and the \xdef causes backslashshes in the macro 8344% body to be transformed. 8345% Set \macrobody to the body of the macro, and call \defmacro. 8346% 8347{\catcode`\ =\other\long\gdef\parsemacbody#1@end macro{% 8348\xdef\macrobody{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}}% 8349{\catcode`\ =\other\long\gdef\parsermacbody#1@end rmacro{% 8350\xdef\macrobody{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}}% 8351 8352% Make @ a letter, so that we can make private-to-Texinfo macro names. 8353\edef\texiatcatcode{\the\catcode`\@} 8354\catcode `@=11\relax 8355 8356%%%%%%%%%%%%%% Code for > 10 arguments only %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% 8357 8358% If there are 10 or more arguments, a different technique is used, where the 8359% hook remains in the body, and when macro is to be expanded the body is 8360% processed again to replace the arguments. 8361% 8362% In that case, the hook is \the\toks N-1, and we simply set \toks N-1 to the 8363% argument N value and then \edef the body (nothing else will expand because of 8364% the catcode regime under which the body was input). 8365% 8366% If you compile with TeX (not eTeX), and you have macros with 10 or more 8367% arguments, no macro can have more than 256 arguments (else error). 8368% 8369% In case that there are 10 or more arguments we parse again the arguments 8370% list to set new definitions for the \macarg.BLAH macros corresponding to 8371% each BLAH argument. It was anyhow needed to parse already once this list 8372% in order to count the arguments, and as macros with at most 9 arguments 8373% are by far more frequent than macro with 10 or more arguments, defining 8374% twice the \macarg.BLAH macros does not cost too much processing power. 8375\def\parsemmanyargdef@@#1,{% 8376 \if#1;\let\next=\relax 8377 \else 8378 \let\next=\parsemmanyargdef@@ 8379 \edef\tempb{\eatspaces{#1}}% 8380 \expandafter\def\expandafter\tempa 8381 \expandafter{\csname macarg.\tempb\endcsname}% 8382 % Note that we need some extra \noexpand\noexpand, this is because we 8383 % don't want \the to be expanded in the \parsermacbody as it uses an 8384 % \xdef . 8385 \expandafter\edef\tempa 8386 {\noexpand\noexpand\noexpand\the\toks\the\paramno}% 8387 \advance\paramno by 1\relax 8388 \fi\next} 8389 8390 8391\let\endargs@\relax 8392\let\nil@\relax 8393\def\nilm@{\nil@}% 8394\long\def\nillm@{\nil@}% 8395 8396% This macro is expanded during the Texinfo macro expansion, not during its 8397% definition. It gets all the arguments' values and assigns them to macros 8398% macarg.ARGNAME 8399% 8400% #1 is the macro name 8401% #2 is the list of argument names 8402% #3 is the list of argument values 8403\def\getargvals@#1#2#3{% 8404 \def\macargdeflist@{}% 8405 \def\saveparamlist@{#2}% Need to keep a copy for parameter expansion. 8406 \def\paramlist{#2,\nil@}% 8407 \def\macroname{#1}% 8408 \begingroup 8409 \macroargctxt 8410 \def\argvaluelist{#3,\nil@}% 8411 \def\@tempa{#3}% 8412 \ifx\@tempa\empty 8413 \setemptyargvalues@ 8414 \else 8415 \getargvals@@ 8416 \fi 8417} 8418\def\getargvals@@{% 8419 \ifx\paramlist\nilm@ 8420 % Some sanity check needed here that \argvaluelist is also empty. 8421 \ifx\argvaluelist\nillm@ 8422 \else 8423 \errhelp = \EMsimple 8424 \errmessage{Too many arguments in macro `\macroname'!}% 8425 \fi 8426 \let\next\macargexpandinbody@ 8427 \else 8428 \ifx\argvaluelist\nillm@ 8429 % No more arguments values passed to macro. Set remaining named-arg 8430 % macros to empty. 8431 \let\next\setemptyargvalues@ 8432 \else 8433 % pop current arg name into \@tempb 8434 \def\@tempa##1{\pop@{\@tempb}{\paramlist}##1\endargs@}% 8435 \expandafter\@tempa\expandafter{\paramlist}% 8436 % pop current argument value into \@tempc 8437 \def\@tempa##1{\longpop@{\@tempc}{\argvaluelist}##1\endargs@}% 8438 \expandafter\@tempa\expandafter{\argvaluelist}% 8439 % Here \@tempb is the current arg name and \@tempc is the current arg value. 8440 % First place the new argument macro definition into \@tempd 8441 \expandafter\macname\expandafter{\@tempc}% 8442 \expandafter\let\csname macarg.\@tempb\endcsname\relax 8443 \expandafter\def\expandafter\@tempe\expandafter{% 8444 \csname macarg.\@tempb\endcsname}% 8445 \edef\@tempd{\long\def\@tempe{\the\macname}}% 8446 \push@\@tempd\macargdeflist@ 8447 \let\next\getargvals@@ 8448 \fi 8449 \fi 8450 \next 8451} 8452 8453\def\push@#1#2{% 8454 \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\def 8455 \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter#2% 8456 \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter{% 8457 \expandafter#1#2}% 8458} 8459 8460% Replace arguments by their values in the macro body, and place the result 8461% in macro \@tempa. 8462% 8463\def\macvalstoargs@{% 8464 % To do this we use the property that token registers that are \the'ed 8465 % within an \edef expand only once. So we are going to place all argument 8466 % values into respective token registers. 8467 % 8468 % First we save the token context, and initialize argument numbering. 8469 \begingroup 8470 \paramno0\relax 8471 % Then, for each argument number #N, we place the corresponding argument 8472 % value into a new token list register \toks#N 8473 \expandafter\putargsintokens@\saveparamlist@,;,% 8474 % Then, we expand the body so that argument are replaced by their 8475 % values. The trick for values not to be expanded themselves is that they 8476 % are within tokens and that tokens expand only once in an \edef . 8477 \edef\@tempc{\csname mac.\macroname .body\endcsname}% 8478 % Now we restore the token stack pointer to free the token list registers 8479 % which we have used, but we make sure that expanded body is saved after 8480 % group. 8481 \expandafter 8482 \endgroup 8483 \expandafter\def\expandafter\@tempa\expandafter{\@tempc}% 8484 } 8485 8486% Define the named-macro outside of this group and then close this group. 8487% 8488\def\macargexpandinbody@{% 8489 \expandafter 8490 \endgroup 8491 \macargdeflist@ 8492 % First the replace in body the macro arguments by their values, the result 8493 % is in \@tempa . 8494 \macvalstoargs@ 8495 % Then we point at the \norecurse or \gobble (for recursive) macro value 8496 % with \@tempb . 8497 \expandafter\let\expandafter\@tempb\csname mac.\macroname .recurse\endcsname 8498 % Depending on whether it is recursive or not, we need some tailing 8499 % \egroup . 8500 \ifx\@tempb\gobble 8501 \let\@tempc\relax 8502 \else 8503 \let\@tempc\egroup 8504 \fi 8505 % And now we do the real job: 8506 \edef\@tempd{\noexpand\@tempb{\macroname}\noexpand\scanmacro{\@tempa}\@tempc}% 8507 \@tempd 8508} 8509 8510\def\putargsintokens@#1,{% 8511 \if#1;\let\next\relax 8512 \else 8513 \let\next\putargsintokens@ 8514 % First we allocate the new token list register, and give it a temporary 8515 % alias \@tempb . 8516 \toksdef\@tempb\the\paramno 8517 % Then we place the argument value into that token list register. 8518 \expandafter\let\expandafter\@tempa\csname macarg.#1\endcsname 8519 \expandafter\@tempb\expandafter{\@tempa}% 8520 \advance\paramno by 1\relax 8521 \fi 8522 \next 8523} 8524 8525% Trailing missing arguments are set to empty. 8526% 8527\def\setemptyargvalues@{% 8528 \ifx\paramlist\nilm@ 8529 \let\next\macargexpandinbody@ 8530 \else 8531 \expandafter\setemptyargvaluesparser@\paramlist\endargs@ 8532 \let\next\setemptyargvalues@ 8533 \fi 8534 \next 8535} 8536 8537\def\setemptyargvaluesparser@#1,#2\endargs@{% 8538 \expandafter\def\expandafter\@tempa\expandafter{% 8539 \expandafter\def\csname macarg.#1\endcsname{}}% 8540 \push@\@tempa\macargdeflist@ 8541 \def\paramlist{#2}% 8542} 8543 8544% #1 is the element target macro 8545% #2 is the list macro 8546% #3,#4\endargs@ is the list value 8547\def\pop@#1#2#3,#4\endargs@{% 8548 \def#1{#3}% 8549 \def#2{#4}% 8550} 8551\long\def\longpop@#1#2#3,#4\endargs@{% 8552 \long\def#1{#3}% 8553 \long\def#2{#4}% 8554} 8555 8556 8557%%%%%%%%%%%%%% End of code for > 10 arguments %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% 8558 8559 8560% This defines a Texinfo @macro or @rmacro, called by \parsemacbody. 8561% \macrobody has the body of the macro in it, with placeholders for 8562% its parameters, looking like "\xeatspaces{\hash 1}". 8563% \paramno is the number of parameters 8564% \paramlist is a TeX parameter text, e.g. "#1,#2,#3," 8565% There are four cases: macros of zero, one, up to nine, and many arguments. 8566% \xdef is used so that macro definitions will survive the file 8567% they're defined in: @include reads the file inside a group. 8568% 8569\def\defmacro{% 8570 \let\hash=##% convert placeholders to macro parameter chars 8571 \ifnum\paramno=1 8572 \def\xeatspaces##1{##1}% 8573 % This removes the pair of braces around the argument. We don't 8574 % use \eatspaces, because this can cause ends of lines to be lost 8575 % when the argument to \eatspaces is read, leading to line-based 8576 % commands like "@itemize" not being read correctly. 8577 \else 8578 \let\xeatspaces\relax % suppress expansion 8579 \fi 8580 \ifcase\paramno 8581 % 0 8582 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% 8583 \bgroup 8584 \noexpand\spaceisspace 8585 \noexpand\endlineisspace 8586 \noexpand\expandafter % skip any whitespace after the macro name. 8587 \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname @@@\endcsname}% 8588 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname @@@\endcsname{% 8589 \egroup 8590 \noexpand\scanmacro{\macrobody}}% 8591 \or % 1 8592 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% 8593 \bgroup 8594 \noexpand\braceorline 8595 \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname @@@\endcsname}% 8596 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname @@@\endcsname##1{% 8597 \egroup 8598 \noexpand\scanmacro{\macrobody}% 8599 }% 8600 \else % at most 9 8601 \ifnum\paramno<10\relax 8602 % @MACNAME sets the context for reading the macro argument 8603 % @MACNAME@@ gets the argument, processes backslashes and appends a 8604 % comma. 8605 % @MACNAME@@@ removes braces surrounding the argument list. 8606 % @MACNAME@@@@ scans the macro body with arguments substituted. 8607 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% 8608 \bgroup 8609 \noexpand\expandafter % This \expandafter skip any spaces after the 8610 \noexpand\macroargctxt % macro before we change the catcode of space. 8611 \noexpand\expandafter 8612 \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname @@\endcsname}% 8613 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname @@\endcsname##1{% 8614 \noexpand\passargtomacro 8615 \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname @@@\endcsname{##1,}}% 8616 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname @@@\endcsname##1{% 8617 \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname @@@@\endcsname ##1}% 8618 \expandafter\expandafter 8619 \expandafter\xdef 8620 \expandafter\expandafter 8621 \csname\the\macname @@@@\endcsname\paramlist{% 8622 \egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\macrobody}}% 8623 \else % 10 or more: 8624 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% 8625 \noexpand\getargvals@{\the\macname}{\argl}% 8626 }% 8627 \global\expandafter\let\csname mac.\the\macname .body\endcsname\macrobody 8628 \global\expandafter\let\csname mac.\the\macname .recurse\endcsname\gobble 8629 \fi 8630 \fi} 8631 8632\catcode `\@\texiatcatcode\relax % end private-to-Texinfo catcodes 8633 8634\def\norecurse#1{\bgroup\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}} 8635 8636 8637%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% 8638% 8639{\catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=13 % We need to manipulate \ so use @ as escape 8640@catcode`@_=11 % private names 8641@catcode`@!=11 % used as argument separator 8642 8643% \passargtomacro#1#2 - 8644% Call #1 with a list of tokens #2, with any doubled backslashes in #2 8645% compressed to one. 8646% 8647% This implementation works by expansion, and not execution (so we cannot use 8648% \def or similar). This reduces the risk of this failing in contexts where 8649% complete expansion is done with no execution (for example, in writing out to 8650% an auxiliary file for an index entry). 8651% 8652% State is kept in the input stream: the argument passed to 8653% @look_ahead, @gobble_and_check_finish and @add_segment is 8654% 8655% THE_MACRO ARG_RESULT ! {PENDING_BS} NEXT_TOKEN (... rest of input) 8656% 8657% where: 8658% THE_MACRO - name of the macro we want to call 8659% ARG_RESULT - argument list we build to pass to that macro 8660% PENDING_BS - either a backslash or nothing 8661% NEXT_TOKEN - used to look ahead in the input stream to see what's coming next 8662 8663@gdef@passargtomacro#1#2{% 8664 @add_segment #1!{}@relax#2\@_finish\% 8665} 8666@gdef@_finish{@_finishx} @global@let@_finishx@relax 8667 8668% #1 - THE_MACRO ARG_RESULT 8669% #2 - PENDING_BS 8670% #3 - NEXT_TOKEN 8671% #4 used to look ahead 8672% 8673% If the next token is not a backslash, process the rest of the argument; 8674% otherwise, remove the next token. 8675@gdef@look_ahead#1!#2#3#4{% 8676 @ifx#4\% 8677 @expandafter@gobble_and_check_finish 8678 @else 8679 @expandafter@add_segment 8680 @fi#1!{#2}#4#4% 8681} 8682 8683% #1 - THE_MACRO ARG_RESULT 8684% #2 - PENDING_BS 8685% #3 - NEXT_TOKEN 8686% #4 should be a backslash, which is gobbled. 8687% #5 looks ahead 8688% 8689% Double backslash found. Add a single backslash, and look ahead. 8690@gdef@gobble_and_check_finish#1!#2#3#4#5{% 8691 @add_segment#1\!{}#5#5% 8692} 8693 8694@gdef@is_fi{@fi} 8695 8696% #1 - THE_MACRO ARG_RESULT 8697% #2 - PENDING_BS 8698% #3 - NEXT_TOKEN 8699% #4 is input stream until next backslash 8700% 8701% Input stream is either at the start of the argument, or just after a 8702% backslash sequence, either a lone backslash, or a doubled backslash. 8703% NEXT_TOKEN contains the first token in the input stream: if it is \finish, 8704% finish; otherwise, append to ARG_RESULT the segment of the argument up until 8705% the next backslash. PENDING_BACKSLASH contains a backslash to represent 8706% a backslash just before the start of the input stream that has not been 8707% added to ARG_RESULT. 8708@gdef@add_segment#1!#2#3#4\{% 8709@ifx#3@_finish 8710 @call_the_macro#1!% 8711@else 8712 % append the pending backslash to the result, followed by the next segment 8713 @expandafter@is_fi@look_ahead#1#2#4!{\}@fi 8714 % this @fi is discarded by @look_ahead. 8715 % we can't get rid of it with \expandafter because we don't know how 8716 % long #4 is. 8717} 8718 8719% #1 - THE_MACRO 8720% #2 - ARG_RESULT 8721% #3 discards the res of the conditional in @add_segment, and @is_fi ends the 8722% conditional. 8723@gdef@call_the_macro#1#2!#3@fi{@is_fi #1{#2}} 8724 8725} 8726%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% 8727 8728% \braceorline MAC is used for a one-argument macro MAC. It checks 8729% whether the next non-whitespace character is a {. It sets the context 8730% for reading the argument (slightly different in the two cases). Then, 8731% to read the argument, in the whole-line case, it then calls the regular 8732% \parsearg MAC; in the lbrace case, it calls \passargtomacro MAC. 8733% 8734\def\braceorline#1{\let\macnamexxx=#1\futurelet\nchar\braceorlinexxx} 8735\def\braceorlinexxx{% 8736 \ifx\nchar\bgroup 8737 \macroargctxt 8738 \expandafter\passargtomacro 8739 \else 8740 \macrolineargctxt\expandafter\parsearg 8741 \fi \macnamexxx} 8742 8743 8744% @alias. 8745% We need some trickery to remove the optional spaces around the equal 8746% sign. Make them active and then expand them all to nothing. 8747% 8748\def\alias{\parseargusing\obeyspaces\aliasxxx} 8749\def\aliasxxx #1{\aliasyyy#1\relax} 8750\def\aliasyyy #1=#2\relax{% 8751 {% 8752 \expandafter\let\obeyedspace=\empty 8753 \addtomacrolist{#1}% 8754 \xdef\next{\global\let\makecsname{#1}=\makecsname{#2}}% 8755 }% 8756 \next 8757} 8758 8759 8760\message{cross references,} 8761 8762\newwrite\auxfile 8763\newif\ifhavexrefs % True if xref values are known. 8764\newif\ifwarnedxrefs % True if we warned once that they aren't known. 8765 8766% @inforef is relatively simple. 8767\def\inforef #1{\inforefzzz #1,,,,**} 8768\def\inforefzzz #1,#2,#3,#4**{% 8769 \putwordSee{} \putwordInfo{} \putwordfile{} \file{\ignorespaces #3{}}, 8770 node \samp{\ignorespaces#1{}}} 8771 8772% @node's only job in TeX is to define \lastnode, which is used in 8773% cross-references. The @node line might or might not have commas, and 8774% might or might not have spaces before the first comma, like: 8775% @node foo , bar , ... 8776% We don't want such trailing spaces in the node name. 8777% 8778\parseargdef\node{\checkenv{}\donode #1 ,\finishnodeparse} 8779% 8780% also remove a trailing comma, in case of something like this: 8781% @node Help-Cross, , , Cross-refs 8782\def\donode#1 ,#2\finishnodeparse{\dodonode #1,\finishnodeparse} 8783\def\dodonode#1,#2\finishnodeparse{\gdef\lastnode{#1}} 8784 8785\let\nwnode=\node 8786\let\lastnode=\empty 8787 8788% Write a cross-reference definition for the current node. #1 is the 8789% type (Ynumbered, Yappendix, Ynothing). 8790% 8791\def\donoderef#1{% 8792 \ifx\lastnode\empty\else 8793 \setref{\lastnode}{#1}% 8794 \global\let\lastnode=\empty 8795 \fi 8796} 8797 8798% @anchor{NAME} -- define xref target at arbitrary point. 8799% 8800\newcount\savesfregister 8801% 8802\def\savesf{\relax \ifhmode \savesfregister=\spacefactor \fi} 8803\def\restoresf{\relax \ifhmode \spacefactor=\savesfregister \fi} 8804\def\anchor#1{\savesf \setref{#1}{Ynothing}\restoresf \ignorespaces} 8805 8806% \setref{NAME}{SNT} defines a cross-reference point NAME (a node or an 8807% anchor), which consists of three parts: 8808% 1) NAME-title - the current sectioning name taken from \lastsection, 8809% or the anchor name. 8810% 2) NAME-snt - section number and type, passed as the SNT arg, or 8811% empty for anchors. 8812% 3) NAME-pg - the page number. 8813% 8814% This is called from \donoderef, \anchor, and \dofloat. In the case of 8815% floats, there is an additional part, which is not written here: 8816% 4) NAME-lof - the text as it should appear in a @listoffloats. 8817% 8818\def\setref#1#2{% 8819 \pdfmkdest{#1}% 8820 \iflinks 8821 {% 8822 \requireauxfile 8823 \atdummies % preserve commands, but don't expand them 8824 % match definition in \xrdef, \refx, \xrefX. 8825 \def\value##1{##1}% 8826 \edef\writexrdef##1##2{% 8827 \write\auxfile{@xrdef{#1-% #1 of \setref, expanded by the \edef 8828 ##1}{##2}}% these are parameters of \writexrdef 8829 }% 8830 \toks0 = \expandafter{\lastsection}% 8831 \immediate \writexrdef{title}{\the\toks0 }% 8832 \immediate \writexrdef{snt}{\csname #2\endcsname}% \Ynumbered etc. 8833 \safewhatsit{\writexrdef{pg}{\folio}}% will be written later, at \shipout 8834 }% 8835 \fi 8836} 8837 8838% @xrefautosectiontitle on|off says whether @section(ing) names are used 8839% automatically in xrefs, if the third arg is not explicitly specified. 8840% This was provided as a "secret" @set xref-automatic-section-title 8841% variable, now it's official. 8842% 8843\parseargdef\xrefautomaticsectiontitle{% 8844 \def\temp{#1}% 8845 \ifx\temp\onword 8846 \expandafter\let\csname SETxref-automatic-section-title\endcsname 8847 = \empty 8848 \else\ifx\temp\offword 8849 \expandafter\let\csname SETxref-automatic-section-title\endcsname 8850 = \relax 8851 \else 8852 \errhelp = \EMsimple 8853 \errmessage{Unknown @xrefautomaticsectiontitle value `\temp', 8854 must be on|off}% 8855 \fi\fi 8856} 8857 8858% 8859% @xref, @pxref, and @ref generate cross-references. For \xrefX, #1 is 8860% the node name, #2 the name of the Info cross-reference, #3 the printed 8861% node name, #4 the name of the Info file, #5 the name of the printed 8862% manual. All but the node name can be omitted. 8863% 8864\def\pxref{\putwordsee{} \xrefXX} 8865\def\xref{\putwordSee{} \xrefXX} 8866\def\ref{\xrefXX} 8867 8868\def\xrefXX#1{\def\xrefXXarg{#1}\futurelet\tokenafterxref\xrefXXX} 8869\def\xrefXXX{\expandafter\xrefX\expandafter[\xrefXXarg,,,,,,,]} 8870% 8871\newbox\toprefbox 8872\newbox\printedrefnamebox 8873\newbox\infofilenamebox 8874\newbox\printedmanualbox 8875% 8876\def\xrefX[#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6]{\begingroup 8877 \unsepspaces 8878 % 8879 % Get args without leading/trailing spaces. 8880 \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #3}% 8881 \setbox\printedrefnamebox = \hbox{\printedrefname\unskip}% 8882 % 8883 \def\infofilename{\ignorespaces #4}% 8884 \setbox\infofilenamebox = \hbox{\infofilename\unskip}% 8885 % 8886 \def\printedmanual{\ignorespaces #5}% 8887 \setbox\printedmanualbox = \hbox{\printedmanual\unskip}% 8888 % 8889 % If the printed reference name (arg #3) was not explicitly given in 8890 % the @xref, figure out what we want to use. 8891 \ifdim \wd\printedrefnamebox = 0pt 8892 % No printed node name was explicitly given. 8893 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETxref-automatic-section-title\endcsname \relax 8894 % Not auto section-title: use node name inside the square brackets. 8895 \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}% 8896 \else 8897 % Auto section-title: use chapter/section title inside 8898 % the square brackets if we have it. 8899 \ifdim \wd\printedmanualbox > 0pt 8900 % It is in another manual, so we don't have it; use node name. 8901 \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}% 8902 \else 8903 \ifhavexrefs 8904 % We (should) know the real title if we have the xref values. 8905 \def\printedrefname{\refx{#1-title}{}}% 8906 \else 8907 % Otherwise just copy the Info node name. 8908 \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}% 8909 \fi% 8910 \fi 8911 \fi 8912 \fi 8913 % 8914 % Make link in pdf output. 8915 \ifpdf 8916 % For pdfTeX and LuaTeX 8917 {\indexnofonts 8918 \makevalueexpandable 8919 \turnoffactive 8920 % This expands tokens, so do it after making catcode changes, so _ 8921 % etc. don't get their TeX definitions. This ignores all spaces in 8922 % #4, including (wrongly) those in the middle of the filename. 8923 \getfilename{#4}% 8924 % 8925 % This (wrongly) does not take account of leading or trailing 8926 % spaces in #1, which should be ignored. 8927 \setpdfdestname{#1}% 8928 % 8929 \ifx\pdfdestname\empty 8930 \def\pdfdestname{Top}% no empty targets 8931 \fi 8932 % 8933 \leavevmode 8934 \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}% 8935 \ifnum\filenamelength>0 8936 goto file{\the\filename.pdf} name{\pdfdestname}% 8937 \else 8938 goto name{\pdfmkpgn{\pdfdestname}}% 8939 \fi 8940 }% 8941 \setcolor{\linkcolor}% 8942 \else 8943 \ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined 8944 \else 8945 % For XeTeX 8946 {\indexnofonts 8947 \makevalueexpandable 8948 \turnoffactive 8949 % This expands tokens, so do it after making catcode changes, so _ 8950 % etc. don't get their TeX definitions. This ignores all spaces in 8951 % #4, including (wrongly) those in the middle of the filename. 8952 \getfilename{#4}% 8953 % 8954 % This (wrongly) does not take account of leading or trailing 8955 % spaces in #1, which should be ignored. 8956 \setpdfdestname{#1}% 8957 % 8958 \ifx\pdfdestname\empty 8959 \def\pdfdestname{Top}% no empty targets 8960 \fi 8961 % 8962 \leavevmode 8963 \ifnum\filenamelength>0 8964 % With default settings, 8965 % XeTeX (xdvipdfmx) replaces link destination names with integers. 8966 % In this case, the replaced destination names of 8967 % remote PDFs are no longer known. In order to avoid a replacement, 8968 % you can use xdvipdfmx's command line option `-C 0x0010'. 8969 % If you use XeTeX 0.99996+ (TeX Live 2016+), 8970 % this command line option is no longer necessary 8971 % because we can use the `dvipdfmx:config' special. 8972 \special{pdf:bann << /Border [0 0 0] /Type /Annot /Subtype /Link /A 8973 << /S /GoToR /F (\the\filename.pdf) /D (\pdfdestname) >> >>}% 8974 \else 8975 \special{pdf:bann << /Border [0 0 0] /Type /Annot /Subtype /Link /A 8976 << /S /GoTo /D (\pdfdestname) >> >>}% 8977 \fi 8978 }% 8979 \setcolor{\linkcolor}% 8980 \fi 8981 \fi 8982 {% 8983 % Have to otherify everything special to allow the \csname to 8984 % include an _ in the xref name, etc. 8985 \indexnofonts 8986 \turnoffactive 8987 \def\value##1{##1}% 8988 \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\expandafter\Xthisreftitle 8989 \csname XR#1-title\endcsname 8990 }% 8991 % 8992 % Float references are printed completely differently: "Figure 1.2" 8993 % instead of "[somenode], p.3". \iffloat distinguishes them by 8994 % \Xthisreftitle being set to a magic string. 8995 \iffloat\Xthisreftitle 8996 % If the user specified the print name (third arg) to the ref, 8997 % print it instead of our usual "Figure 1.2". 8998 \ifdim\wd\printedrefnamebox = 0pt 8999 \refx{#1-snt}{}% 9000 \else 9001 \printedrefname 9002 \fi 9003 % 9004 % If the user also gave the printed manual name (fifth arg), append 9005 % "in MANUALNAME". 9006 \ifdim \wd\printedmanualbox > 0pt 9007 \space \putwordin{} \cite{\printedmanual}% 9008 \fi 9009 \else 9010 % node/anchor (non-float) references. 9011 % 9012 % If we use \unhbox to print the node names, TeX does not insert 9013 % empty discretionaries after hyphens, which means that it will not 9014 % find a line break at a hyphen in a node names. Since some manuals 9015 % are best written with fairly long node names, containing hyphens, 9016 % this is a loss. Therefore, we give the text of the node name 9017 % again, so it is as if TeX is seeing it for the first time. 9018 % 9019 \ifdim \wd\printedmanualbox > 0pt 9020 % Cross-manual reference with a printed manual name. 9021 % 9022 \crossmanualxref{\cite{\printedmanual\unskip}}% 9023 % 9024 \else\ifdim \wd\infofilenamebox > 0pt 9025 % Cross-manual reference with only an info filename (arg 4), no 9026 % printed manual name (arg 5). This is essentially the same as 9027 % the case above; we output the filename, since we have nothing else. 9028 % 9029 \crossmanualxref{\code{\infofilename\unskip}}% 9030 % 9031 \else 9032 % Reference within this manual. 9033 % 9034 % _ (for example) has to be the character _ for the purposes of the 9035 % control sequence corresponding to the node, but it has to expand 9036 % into the usual \leavevmode...\vrule stuff for purposes of 9037 % printing. So we \turnoffactive for the \refx-snt, back on for the 9038 % printing, back off for the \refx-pg. 9039 {\turnoffactive 9040 % Only output a following space if the -snt ref is nonempty; for 9041 % @unnumbered and @anchor, it won't be. 9042 \setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces \refx{#1-snt}{}}% 9043 \ifdim \wd2 > 0pt \refx{#1-snt}\space\fi 9044 }% 9045 % output the `[mynode]' via the macro below so it can be overridden. 9046 \xrefprintnodename\printedrefname 9047 % 9048 % But we always want a comma and a space: 9049 ,\space 9050 % 9051 % output the `page 3'. 9052 \turnoffactive \putwordpage\tie\refx{#1-pg}{}% 9053 % Add a , if xref followed by a space 9054 \if\space\noexpand\tokenafterxref ,% 9055 \else\ifx\ \tokenafterxref ,% @TAB 9056 \else\ifx\*\tokenafterxref ,% @* 9057 \else\ifx\ \tokenafterxref ,% @SPACE 9058 \else\ifx\ 9059 \tokenafterxref ,% @NL 9060 \else\ifx\tie\tokenafterxref ,% @tie 9061 \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi 9062 \fi\fi 9063 \fi 9064 \endlink 9065\endgroup} 9066 9067% Output a cross-manual xref to #1. Used just above (twice). 9068% 9069% Only include the text "Section ``foo'' in" if the foo is neither 9070% missing or Top. Thus, @xref{,,,foo,The Foo Manual} outputs simply 9071% "see The Foo Manual", the idea being to refer to the whole manual. 9072% 9073% But, this being TeX, we can't easily compare our node name against the 9074% string "Top" while ignoring the possible spaces before and after in 9075% the input. By adding the arbitrary 7sp below, we make it much less 9076% likely that a real node name would have the same width as "Top" (e.g., 9077% in a monospaced font). Hopefully it will never happen in practice. 9078% 9079% For the same basic reason, we retypeset the "Top" at every 9080% reference, since the current font is indeterminate. 9081% 9082\def\crossmanualxref#1{% 9083 \setbox\toprefbox = \hbox{Top\kern7sp}% 9084 \setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces \printedrefname \unskip \kern7sp}% 9085 \ifdim \wd2 > 7sp % nonempty? 9086 \ifdim \wd2 = \wd\toprefbox \else % same as Top? 9087 \putwordSection{} ``\printedrefname'' \putwordin{}\space 9088 \fi 9089 \fi 9090 #1% 9091} 9092 9093% This macro is called from \xrefX for the `[nodename]' part of xref 9094% output. It's a separate macro only so it can be changed more easily, 9095% since square brackets don't work well in some documents. Particularly 9096% one that Bob is working on :). 9097% 9098\def\xrefprintnodename#1{[#1]} 9099 9100% Things referred to by \setref. 9101% 9102\def\Ynothing{} 9103\def\Yomitfromtoc{} 9104\def\Ynumbered{% 9105 \ifnum\secno=0 9106 \putwordChapter@tie \the\chapno 9107 \else \ifnum\subsecno=0 9108 \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno 9109 \else \ifnum\subsubsecno=0 9110 \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno 9111 \else 9112 \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno 9113 \fi\fi\fi 9114} 9115\def\Yappendix{% 9116 \ifnum\secno=0 9117 \putwordAppendix@tie @char\the\appendixno{}% 9118 \else \ifnum\subsecno=0 9119 \putwordSection@tie @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno 9120 \else \ifnum\subsubsecno=0 9121 \putwordSection@tie @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno 9122 \else 9123 \putwordSection@tie 9124 @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno 9125 \fi\fi\fi 9126} 9127 9128% \refx{NAME}{SUFFIX} - reference a cross-reference string named NAME. SUFFIX 9129% is output afterwards if non-empty. 9130\def\refx#1#2{% 9131 \requireauxfile 9132 {% 9133 \indexnofonts 9134 \otherbackslash 9135 \def\value##1{##1}% 9136 \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\expandafter\thisrefX 9137 \csname XR#1\endcsname 9138 }% 9139 \ifx\thisrefX\relax 9140 % If not defined, say something at least. 9141 \angleleft un\-de\-fined\angleright 9142 \iflinks 9143 \ifhavexrefs 9144 {\toks0 = {#1}% avoid expansion of possibly-complex value 9145 \message{\linenumber Undefined cross reference `\the\toks0'.}}% 9146 \else 9147 \ifwarnedxrefs\else 9148 \global\warnedxrefstrue 9149 \message{Cross reference values unknown; you must run TeX again.}% 9150 \fi 9151 \fi 9152 \fi 9153 \else 9154 % It's defined, so just use it. 9155 \thisrefX 9156 \fi 9157 #2% Output the suffix in any case. 9158} 9159 9160% This is the macro invoked by entries in the aux file. Define a control 9161% sequence for a cross-reference target (we prepend XR to the control sequence 9162% name to avoid collisions). The value is the page number. If this is a float 9163% type, we have more work to do. 9164% 9165\def\xrdef#1#2{% 9166 {% Expand the node or anchor name to remove control sequences. 9167 % \turnoffactive stops 8-bit characters being changed to commands 9168 % like @'e. \refx does the same to retrieve the value in the definition. 9169 \indexnofonts 9170 \turnoffactive 9171 \def\value##1{##1}% 9172 \xdef\safexrefname{#1}% 9173 }% 9174 % 9175 \bgroup 9176 \expandafter\gdef\csname XR\safexrefname\endcsname{#2}% 9177 \egroup 9178 % We put the \gdef inside a group to avoid the definitions building up on 9179 % TeX's save stack, which can cause it to run out of space for aux files with 9180 % thousands of lines. \gdef doesn't use the save stack, but \csname does 9181 % when it defines an unknown control sequence as \relax. 9182 % 9183 % Was that xref control sequence that we just defined for a float? 9184 \expandafter\iffloat\csname XR\safexrefname\endcsname 9185 % it was a float, and we have the (safe) float type in \iffloattype. 9186 \expandafter\let\expandafter\floatlist 9187 \csname floatlist\iffloattype\endcsname 9188 % 9189 % Is this the first time we've seen this float type? 9190 \expandafter\ifx\floatlist\relax 9191 \toks0 = {\do}% yes, so just \do 9192 \else 9193 % had it before, so preserve previous elements in list. 9194 \toks0 = \expandafter{\floatlist\do}% 9195 \fi 9196 % 9197 % Remember this xref in the control sequence \floatlistFLOATTYPE, 9198 % for later use in \listoffloats. 9199 \expandafter\xdef\csname floatlist\iffloattype\endcsname{\the\toks0 9200 {\safexrefname}}% 9201 \fi 9202} 9203 9204% If working on a large document in chapters, it is convenient to 9205% be able to disable indexing, cross-referencing, and contents, for test runs. 9206% This is done with @novalidate at the beginning of the file. 9207% 9208\newif\iflinks \linkstrue % by default we want the aux files. 9209\let\novalidate = \linksfalse 9210 9211% Used when writing to the aux file, or when using data from it. 9212\def\requireauxfile{% 9213 \iflinks 9214 \tryauxfile 9215 % Open the new aux file. TeX will close it automatically at exit. 9216 \immediate\openout\auxfile=\jobname.aux 9217 \fi 9218 \global\let\requireauxfile=\relax % Only do this once. 9219} 9220 9221% Read the last existing aux file, if any. No error if none exists. 9222% 9223\def\tryauxfile{% 9224 \openin 1 \jobname.aux 9225 \ifeof 1 \else 9226 \readdatafile{aux}% 9227 \global\havexrefstrue 9228 \fi 9229 \closein 1 9230} 9231 9232\def\setupdatafile{% 9233 \catcode`\^^@=\other 9234 \catcode`\^^A=\other 9235 \catcode`\^^B=\other 9236 \catcode`\^^C=\other 9237 \catcode`\^^D=\other 9238 \catcode`\^^E=\other 9239 \catcode`\^^F=\other 9240 \catcode`\^^G=\other 9241 \catcode`\^^H=\other 9242 \catcode`\^^K=\other 9243 \catcode`\^^L=\other 9244 \catcode`\^^N=\other 9245 \catcode`\^^P=\other 9246 \catcode`\^^Q=\other 9247 \catcode`\^^R=\other 9248 \catcode`\^^S=\other 9249 \catcode`\^^T=\other 9250 \catcode`\^^U=\other 9251 \catcode`\^^V=\other 9252 \catcode`\^^W=\other 9253 \catcode`\^^X=\other 9254 \catcode`\^^Z=\other 9255 \catcode`\^^[=\other 9256 \catcode`\^^\=\other 9257 \catcode`\^^]=\other 9258 \catcode`\^^^=\other 9259 \catcode`\^^_=\other 9260 % It was suggested to set the catcode of ^ to 7, which would allow ^^e4 etc. 9261 % in xref tags, i.e., node names. But since ^^e4 notation isn't 9262 % supported in the main text, it doesn't seem desirable. Furthermore, 9263 % that is not enough: for node names that actually contain a ^ 9264 % character, we would end up writing a line like this: 'xrdef {'hat 9265 % b-title}{'hat b} and \xrdef does a \csname...\endcsname on the first 9266 % argument, and \hat is not an expandable control sequence. It could 9267 % all be worked out, but why? Either we support ^^ or we don't. 9268 % 9269 % The other change necessary for this was to define \auxhat: 9270 % \def\auxhat{\def^{'hat }}% extra space so ok if followed by letter 9271 % and then to call \auxhat in \setq. 9272 % 9273 \catcode`\^=\other 9274 % 9275 % Special characters. Should be turned off anyway, but... 9276 \catcode`\~=\other 9277 \catcode`\[=\other 9278 \catcode`\]=\other 9279 \catcode`\"=\other 9280 \catcode`\_=\other 9281 \catcode`\|=\other 9282 \catcode`\<=\other 9283 \catcode`\>=\other 9284 \catcode`\$=\other 9285 \catcode`\#=\other 9286 \catcode`\&=\other 9287 \catcode`\%=\other 9288 \catcode`+=\other % avoid \+ for paranoia even though we've turned it off 9289 % 9290 % This is to support \ in node names and titles, since the \ 9291 % characters end up in a \csname. It's easier than 9292 % leaving it active and making its active definition an actual \ 9293 % character. What I don't understand is why it works in the *value* 9294 % of the xrdef. Seems like it should be a catcode12 \, and that 9295 % should not typeset properly. But it works, so I'm moving on for 9296 % now. --karl, 15jan04. 9297 \catcode`\\=\other 9298 % 9299 % @ is our escape character in .aux files, and we need braces. 9300 \catcode`\{=1 9301 \catcode`\}=2 9302 \catcode`\@=0 9303} 9304 9305\def\readdatafile#1{% 9306\begingroup 9307 \setupdatafile 9308 \input\jobname.#1 9309\endgroup} 9310 9311 9312\message{insertions,} 9313% including footnotes. 9314 9315\newcount \footnoteno 9316 9317% The trailing space in the following definition for supereject is 9318% vital for proper filling; pages come out unaligned when you do a 9319% pagealignmacro call if that space before the closing brace is 9320% removed. (Generally, numeric constants should always be followed by a 9321% space to prevent strange expansion errors.) 9322\def\supereject{\par\penalty -20000\footnoteno =0 } 9323 9324% @footnotestyle is meaningful for Info output only. 9325\let\footnotestyle=\comment 9326 9327{\catcode `\@=11 9328% 9329% Auto-number footnotes. Otherwise like plain. 9330\gdef\footnote{% 9331 \global\advance\footnoteno by \@ne 9332 \edef\thisfootno{$^{\the\footnoteno}$}% 9333 % 9334 % In case the footnote comes at the end of a sentence, preserve the 9335 % extra spacing after we do the footnote number. 9336 \let\@sf\empty 9337 \ifhmode\edef\@sf{\spacefactor\the\spacefactor}\ptexslash\fi 9338 % 9339 % Remove inadvertent blank space before typesetting the footnote number. 9340 \unskip 9341 \thisfootno\@sf 9342 \dofootnote 9343}% 9344 9345% Don't bother with the trickery in plain.tex to not require the 9346% footnote text as a parameter. Our footnotes don't need to be so general. 9347% 9348% Oh yes, they do; otherwise, @ifset (and anything else that uses 9349% \parseargline) fails inside footnotes because the tokens are fixed when 9350% the footnote is read. --karl, 16nov96. 9351% 9352\gdef\dofootnote{% 9353 \insert\footins\bgroup 9354 % 9355 % Nested footnotes are not supported in TeX, that would take a lot 9356 % more work. (\startsavinginserts does not suffice.) 9357 \let\footnote=\errfootnotenest 9358 % 9359 % We want to typeset this text as a normal paragraph, even if the 9360 % footnote reference occurs in (for example) a display environment. 9361 % So reset some parameters. 9362 \hsize=\txipagewidth 9363 \interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty 9364 \splittopskip\ht\strutbox % top baseline for broken footnotes 9365 \splitmaxdepth\dp\strutbox 9366 \floatingpenalty\@MM 9367 \leftskip\z@skip 9368 \rightskip\z@skip 9369 \spaceskip\z@skip 9370 \xspaceskip\z@skip 9371 \parindent\defaultparindent 9372 % 9373 \smallfonts \rm 9374 % 9375 % Because we use hanging indentation in footnotes, a @noindent appears 9376 % to exdent this text, so make it be a no-op. makeinfo does not use 9377 % hanging indentation so @noindent can still be needed within footnote 9378 % text after an @example or the like (not that this is good style). 9379 \let\noindent = \relax 9380 % 9381 % Hang the footnote text off the number. Use \everypar in case the 9382 % footnote extends for more than one paragraph. 9383 \everypar = {\hang}% 9384 \textindent{\thisfootno}% 9385 % 9386 % Don't crash into the line above the footnote text. Since this 9387 % expands into a box, it must come within the paragraph, lest it 9388 % provide a place where TeX can split the footnote. 9389 \footstrut 9390 % 9391 % Invoke rest of plain TeX footnote routine. 9392 \futurelet\next\fo@t 9393} 9394}%end \catcode `\@=11 9395 9396\def\errfootnotenest{% 9397 \errhelp=\EMsimple 9398 \errmessage{Nested footnotes not supported in texinfo.tex, 9399 even though they work in makeinfo; sorry} 9400} 9401 9402\def\errfootnoteheading{% 9403 \errhelp=\EMsimple 9404 \errmessage{Footnotes in chapters, sections, etc., are not supported} 9405} 9406 9407% In case a @footnote appears in a vbox, save the footnote text and create 9408% the real \insert just after the vbox finished. Otherwise, the insertion 9409% would be lost. 9410% Similarly, if a @footnote appears inside an alignment, save the footnote 9411% text to a box and make the \insert when a row of the table is finished. 9412% And the same can be done for other insert classes. --kasal, 16nov03. 9413% 9414% Replace the \insert primitive by a cheating macro. 9415% Deeper inside, just make sure that the saved insertions are not spilled 9416% out prematurely. 9417% 9418\def\startsavinginserts{% 9419 \ifx \insert\ptexinsert 9420 \let\insert\saveinsert 9421 \else 9422 \let\checkinserts\relax 9423 \fi 9424} 9425 9426% This \insert replacement works for both \insert\footins{foo} and 9427% \insert\footins\bgroup foo\egroup, but it doesn't work for \insert27{foo}. 9428% 9429\def\saveinsert#1{% 9430 \edef\next{\noexpand\savetobox \makeSAVEname#1}% 9431 \afterassignment\next 9432 % swallow the left brace 9433 \let\temp = 9434} 9435\def\makeSAVEname#1{\makecsname{SAVE\expandafter\gobble\string#1}} 9436\def\savetobox#1{\global\setbox#1 = \vbox\bgroup \unvbox#1} 9437 9438\def\checksaveins#1{\ifvoid#1\else \placesaveins#1\fi} 9439 9440\def\placesaveins#1{% 9441 \ptexinsert \csname\expandafter\gobblesave\string#1\endcsname 9442 {\box#1}% 9443} 9444 9445% eat @SAVE -- beware, all of them have catcode \other: 9446{ 9447 \def\dospecials{\do S\do A\do V\do E} \uncatcodespecials % ;-) 9448 \gdef\gobblesave @SAVE{} 9449} 9450 9451% initialization: 9452\def\newsaveins #1{% 9453 \edef\next{\noexpand\newsaveinsX \makeSAVEname#1}% 9454 \next 9455} 9456\def\newsaveinsX #1{% 9457 \csname newbox\endcsname #1% 9458 \expandafter\def\expandafter\checkinserts\expandafter{\checkinserts 9459 \checksaveins #1}% 9460} 9461 9462% initialize: 9463\let\checkinserts\empty 9464\newsaveins\footins 9465\newsaveins\margin 9466 9467 9468% @image. We use the macros from epsf.tex to support this. 9469% If epsf.tex is not installed and @image is used, we complain. 9470% 9471% Check for and read epsf.tex up front. If we read it only at @image 9472% time, we might be inside a group, and then its definitions would get 9473% undone and the next image would fail. 9474\openin 1 = epsf.tex 9475\ifeof 1 \else 9476 % Do not bother showing banner with epsf.tex v2.7k (available in 9477 % doc/epsf.tex and on ctan). 9478 \def\epsfannounce{\toks0 = }% 9479 \input epsf.tex 9480\fi 9481\closein 1 9482% 9483% We will only complain once about lack of epsf.tex. 9484\newif\ifwarnednoepsf 9485\newhelp\noepsfhelp{epsf.tex must be installed for images to 9486 work. It is also included in the Texinfo distribution, or you can get 9487 it from https://ctan.org/texarchive/macros/texinfo/texinfo/doc/epsf.tex.} 9488% 9489\def\image#1{% 9490 \ifx\epsfbox\thisisundefined 9491 \ifwarnednoepsf \else 9492 \errhelp = \noepsfhelp 9493 \errmessage{epsf.tex not found, images will be ignored}% 9494 \global\warnednoepsftrue 9495 \fi 9496 \else 9497 \imagexxx #1,,,,,\finish 9498 \fi 9499} 9500% 9501% Arguments to @image: 9502% #1 is (mandatory) image filename; we tack on .eps extension. 9503% #2 is (optional) width, #3 is (optional) height. 9504% #4 is (ignored optional) html alt text. 9505% #5 is (ignored optional) extension. 9506% #6 is just the usual extra ignored arg for parsing stuff. 9507\newif\ifimagevmode 9508\def\imagexxx#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6\finish{\begingroup 9509 \catcode`\^^M = 5 % in case we're inside an example 9510 \normalturnoffactive % allow _ et al. in names 9511 \def\xprocessmacroarg{\eatspaces}% in case we are being used via a macro 9512 % If the image is by itself, center it. 9513 \ifvmode 9514 \imagevmodetrue 9515 \else \ifx\centersub\centerV 9516 % for @center @image, we need a vbox so we can have our vertical space 9517 \imagevmodetrue 9518 \vbox\bgroup % vbox has better behavior than vtop herev 9519 \fi\fi 9520 % 9521 \ifimagevmode 9522 \nobreak\medskip 9523 % Usually we'll have text after the image which will insert 9524 % \parskip glue, so insert it here too to equalize the space 9525 % above and below. 9526 \nobreak\vskip\parskip 9527 \nobreak 9528 \fi 9529 % 9530 % Leave vertical mode so that indentation from an enclosing 9531 % environment such as @quotation is respected. 9532 % However, if we're at the top level, we don't want the 9533 % normal paragraph indentation. 9534 % On the other hand, if we are in the case of @center @image, we don't 9535 % want to start a paragraph, which will create a hsize-width box and 9536 % eradicate the centering. 9537 \ifx\centersub\centerV\else \noindent \fi 9538 % 9539 % Output the image. 9540 \ifpdf 9541 % For pdfTeX and LuaTeX <= 0.80 9542 \dopdfimage{#1}{#2}{#3}% 9543 \else 9544 \ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined 9545 % For epsf.tex 9546 % \epsfbox itself resets \epsf?size at each figure. 9547 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% 9548 \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfxsize=#2\relax \fi 9549 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}% 9550 \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfysize=#3\relax \fi 9551 \epsfbox{#1.eps}% 9552 \else 9553 % For XeTeX 9554 \doxeteximage{#1}{#2}{#3}% 9555 \fi 9556 \fi 9557 % 9558 \ifimagevmode 9559 \medskip % space after a standalone image 9560 \fi 9561 \ifx\centersub\centerV \egroup \fi 9562\endgroup} 9563 9564 9565% @float FLOATTYPE,LABEL,LOC ... @end float for displayed figures, tables, 9566% etc. We don't actually implement floating yet, we always include the 9567% float "here". But it seemed the best name for the future. 9568% 9569\envparseargdef\float{\eatcommaspace\eatcommaspace\dofloat#1, , ,\finish} 9570 9571% There may be a space before second and/or third parameter; delete it. 9572\def\eatcommaspace#1, {#1,} 9573 9574% #1 is the optional FLOATTYPE, the text label for this float, typically 9575% "Figure", "Table", "Example", etc. Can't contain commas. If omitted, 9576% this float will not be numbered and cannot be referred to. 9577% 9578% #2 is the optional xref label. Also must be present for the float to 9579% be referable. 9580% 9581% #3 is the optional positioning argument; for now, it is ignored. It 9582% will somehow specify the positions allowed to float to (here, top, bottom). 9583% 9584% We keep a separate counter for each FLOATTYPE, which we reset at each 9585% chapter-level command. 9586\let\resetallfloatnos=\empty 9587% 9588\def\dofloat#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{% 9589 \let\thiscaption=\empty 9590 \let\thisshortcaption=\empty 9591 % 9592 % don't lose footnotes inside @float. 9593 % 9594 % BEWARE: when the floats start float, we have to issue warning whenever an 9595 % insert appears inside a float which could possibly float. --kasal, 26may04 9596 % 9597 \startsavinginserts 9598 % 9599 % We can't be used inside a paragraph. 9600 \par 9601 % 9602 \vtop\bgroup 9603 \def\floattype{#1}% 9604 \def\floatlabel{#2}% 9605 \def\floatloc{#3}% we do nothing with this yet. 9606 % 9607 \ifx\floattype\empty 9608 \let\safefloattype=\empty 9609 \else 9610 {% 9611 % the floattype might have accents or other special characters, 9612 % but we need to use it in a control sequence name. 9613 \indexnofonts 9614 \turnoffactive 9615 \xdef\safefloattype{\floattype}% 9616 }% 9617 \fi 9618 % 9619 % If label is given but no type, we handle that as the empty type. 9620 \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else 9621 % We want each FLOATTYPE to be numbered separately (Figure 1, 9622 % Table 1, Figure 2, ...). (And if no label, no number.) 9623 % 9624 \expandafter\getfloatno\csname\safefloattype floatno\endcsname 9625 \global\advance\floatno by 1 9626 % 9627 {% 9628 % This magic value for \lastsection is output by \setref as the 9629 % XREFLABEL-title value. \xrefX uses it to distinguish float 9630 % labels (which have a completely different output format) from 9631 % node and anchor labels. And \xrdef uses it to construct the 9632 % lists of floats. 9633 % 9634 \edef\lastsection{\floatmagic=\safefloattype}% 9635 \setref{\floatlabel}{Yfloat}% 9636 }% 9637 \fi 9638 % 9639 % start with \parskip glue, I guess. 9640 \vskip\parskip 9641 % 9642 % Don't suppress indentation if a float happens to start a section. 9643 \restorefirstparagraphindent 9644} 9645 9646% we have these possibilities: 9647% @float Foo,lbl & @caption{Cap}: Foo 1.1: Cap 9648% @float Foo,lbl & no caption: Foo 1.1 9649% @float Foo & @caption{Cap}: Foo: Cap 9650% @float Foo & no caption: Foo 9651% @float ,lbl & Caption{Cap}: 1.1: Cap 9652% @float ,lbl & no caption: 1.1 9653% @float & @caption{Cap}: Cap 9654% @float & no caption: 9655% 9656\def\Efloat{% 9657 \let\floatident = \empty 9658 % 9659 % In all cases, if we have a float type, it comes first. 9660 \ifx\floattype\empty \else \def\floatident{\floattype}\fi 9661 % 9662 % If we have an xref label, the number comes next. 9663 \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else 9664 \ifx\floattype\empty \else % if also had float type, need tie first. 9665 \appendtomacro\floatident{\tie}% 9666 \fi 9667 % the number. 9668 \appendtomacro\floatident{\chaplevelprefix\the\floatno}% 9669 \fi 9670 % 9671 % Start the printed caption with what we've constructed in 9672 % \floatident, but keep it separate; we need \floatident again. 9673 \let\captionline = \floatident 9674 % 9675 \ifx\thiscaption\empty \else 9676 \ifx\floatident\empty \else 9677 \appendtomacro\captionline{: }% had ident, so need a colon between 9678 \fi 9679 % 9680 % caption text. 9681 \appendtomacro\captionline{\scanexp\thiscaption}% 9682 \fi 9683 % 9684 % If we have anything to print, print it, with space before. 9685 % Eventually this needs to become an \insert. 9686 \ifx\captionline\empty \else 9687 \vskip.5\parskip 9688 \captionline 9689 % 9690 % Space below caption. 9691 \vskip\parskip 9692 \fi 9693 % 9694 % If have an xref label, write the list of floats info. Do this 9695 % after the caption, to avoid chance of it being a breakpoint. 9696 \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else 9697 % Write the text that goes in the lof to the aux file as 9698 % \floatlabel-lof. Besides \floatident, we include the short 9699 % caption if specified, else the full caption if specified, else nothing. 9700 {% 9701 \requireauxfile 9702 \atdummies 9703 % 9704 \ifx\thisshortcaption\empty 9705 \def\gtemp{\thiscaption}% 9706 \else 9707 \def\gtemp{\thisshortcaption}% 9708 \fi 9709 \immediate\write\auxfile{@xrdef{\floatlabel-lof}{\floatident 9710 \ifx\gtemp\empty \else : \gtemp \fi}}% 9711 }% 9712 \fi 9713 \egroup % end of \vtop 9714 % 9715 \checkinserts 9716} 9717 9718% Append the tokens #2 to the definition of macro #1, not expanding either. 9719% 9720\def\appendtomacro#1#2{% 9721 \expandafter\def\expandafter#1\expandafter{#1#2}% 9722} 9723 9724% @caption, @shortcaption 9725% 9726\def\caption{\docaption\thiscaption} 9727\def\shortcaption{\docaption\thisshortcaption} 9728\def\docaption{\checkenv\float \bgroup\scanargctxt\defcaption} 9729\def\defcaption#1#2{\egroup \def#1{#2}} 9730 9731% The parameter is the control sequence identifying the counter we are 9732% going to use. Create it if it doesn't exist and assign it to \floatno. 9733\def\getfloatno#1{% 9734 \ifx#1\relax 9735 % Haven't seen this figure type before. 9736 \csname newcount\endcsname #1% 9737 % 9738 % Remember to reset this floatno at the next chap. 9739 \expandafter\gdef\expandafter\resetallfloatnos 9740 \expandafter{\resetallfloatnos #1=0 }% 9741 \fi 9742 \let\floatno#1% 9743} 9744 9745% \setref calls this to get the XREFLABEL-snt value. We want an @xref 9746% to the FLOATLABEL to expand to "Figure 3.1". We call \setref when we 9747% first read the @float command. 9748% 9749\def\Yfloat{\floattype@tie \chaplevelprefix\the\floatno}% 9750 9751% Magic string used for the XREFLABEL-title value, so \xrefX can 9752% distinguish floats from other xref types. 9753\def\floatmagic{!!float!!} 9754 9755% #1 is the control sequence we are passed; we expand into a conditional 9756% which is true if #1 represents a float ref. That is, the magic 9757% \lastsection value which we \setref above. 9758% 9759\def\iffloat#1{\expandafter\doiffloat#1==\finish} 9760% 9761% #1 is (maybe) the \floatmagic string. If so, #2 will be the 9762% (safe) float type for this float. We set \iffloattype to #2. 9763% 9764\def\doiffloat#1=#2=#3\finish{% 9765 \def\temp{#1}% 9766 \def\iffloattype{#2}% 9767 \ifx\temp\floatmagic 9768} 9769 9770% @listoffloats FLOATTYPE - print a list of floats like a table of contents. 9771% 9772\parseargdef\listoffloats{% 9773 \def\floattype{#1}% floattype 9774 {% 9775 % the floattype might have accents or other special characters, 9776 % but we need to use it in a control sequence name. 9777 \indexnofonts 9778 \turnoffactive 9779 \xdef\safefloattype{\floattype}% 9780 }% 9781 % 9782 % \xrdef saves the floats as a \do-list in \floatlistSAFEFLOATTYPE. 9783 \expandafter\ifx\csname floatlist\safefloattype\endcsname \relax 9784 \ifhavexrefs 9785 % if the user said @listoffloats foo but never @float foo. 9786 \message{\linenumber No `\safefloattype' floats to list.}% 9787 \fi 9788 \else 9789 \begingroup 9790 \leftskip=\tocindent % indent these entries like a toc 9791 \let\do=\listoffloatsdo 9792 \csname floatlist\safefloattype\endcsname 9793 \endgroup 9794 \fi 9795} 9796 9797% This is called on each entry in a list of floats. We're passed the 9798% xref label, in the form LABEL-title, which is how we save it in the 9799% aux file. We strip off the -title and look up \XRLABEL-lof, which 9800% has the text we're supposed to typeset here. 9801% 9802% Figures without xref labels will not be included in the list (since 9803% they won't appear in the aux file). 9804% 9805\def\listoffloatsdo#1{\listoffloatsdoentry#1\finish} 9806\def\listoffloatsdoentry#1-title\finish{{% 9807 % Can't fully expand XR#1-lof because it can contain anything. Just 9808 % pass the control sequence. On the other hand, XR#1-pg is just the 9809 % page number, and we want to fully expand that so we can get a link 9810 % in pdf output. 9811 \toksA = \expandafter{\csname XR#1-lof\endcsname}% 9812 % 9813 % use the same \entry macro we use to generate the TOC and index. 9814 \edef\writeentry{\noexpand\entry{\the\toksA}{\csname XR#1-pg\endcsname}}% 9815 \writeentry 9816}} 9817 9818 9819\message{localization,} 9820 9821% For single-language documents, @documentlanguage is usually given very 9822% early, just after @documentencoding. Single argument is the language 9823% (de) or locale (de_DE) abbreviation. 9824% 9825{ 9826 \catcode`\_ = \active 9827 \globaldefs=1 9828\parseargdef\documentlanguage{% 9829 \tex % read txi-??.tex file in plain TeX. 9830 % Read the file by the name they passed if it exists. 9831 \let_ = \normalunderscore % normal _ character for filename test 9832 \openin 1 txi-#1.tex 9833 \ifeof 1 9834 \documentlanguagetrywithoutunderscore #1_\finish 9835 \else 9836 \globaldefs = 1 % everything in the txi-LL files needs to persist 9837 \input txi-#1.tex 9838 \fi 9839 \closein 1 9840 \endgroup % end raw TeX 9841} 9842% 9843% If they passed de_DE, and txi-de_DE.tex doesn't exist, 9844% try txi-de.tex. 9845% 9846\gdef\documentlanguagetrywithoutunderscore#1_#2\finish{% 9847 \openin 1 txi-#1.tex 9848 \ifeof 1 9849 \errhelp = \nolanghelp 9850 \errmessage{Cannot read language file txi-#1.tex}% 9851 \else 9852 \globaldefs = 1 % everything in the txi-LL files needs to persist 9853 \input txi-#1.tex 9854 \fi 9855 \closein 1 9856} 9857}% end of special _ catcode 9858% 9859\newhelp\nolanghelp{The given language definition file cannot be found or 9860is empty. Maybe you need to install it? Putting it in the current 9861directory should work if nowhere else does.} 9862 9863% This macro is called from txi-??.tex files; the first argument is the 9864% \language name to set (without the "\lang@" prefix), the second and 9865% third args are \{left,right}hyphenmin. 9866% 9867% The language names to pass are determined when the format is built. 9868% See the etex.log file created at that time, e.g., 9869% /usr/local/texlive/2008/texmf-var/web2c/pdftex/etex.log. 9870% 9871% With TeX Live 2008, etex now includes hyphenation patterns for all 9872% available languages. This means we can support hyphenation in 9873% Texinfo, at least to some extent. (This still doesn't solve the 9874% accented characters problem.) 9875% 9876\catcode`@=11 9877\def\txisetlanguage#1#2#3{% 9878 % do not set the language if the name is undefined in the current TeX. 9879 \expandafter\ifx\csname lang@#1\endcsname \relax 9880 \message{no patterns for #1}% 9881 \else 9882 \global\language = \csname lang@#1\endcsname 9883 \fi 9884 % but there is no harm in adjusting the hyphenmin values regardless. 9885 \global\lefthyphenmin = #2\relax 9886 \global\righthyphenmin = #3\relax 9887} 9888 9889% XeTeX and LuaTeX can handle Unicode natively. 9890% Their default I/O uses UTF-8 sequences instead of a byte-wise operation. 9891% Other TeX engines' I/O (pdfTeX, etc.) is byte-wise. 9892% 9893\newif\iftxinativeunicodecapable 9894\newif\iftxiusebytewiseio 9895 9896\ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined 9897 \ifx\luatexversion\thisisundefined 9898 \txinativeunicodecapablefalse 9899 \txiusebytewiseiotrue 9900 \else 9901 \txinativeunicodecapabletrue 9902 \txiusebytewiseiofalse 9903 \fi 9904\else 9905 \txinativeunicodecapabletrue 9906 \txiusebytewiseiofalse 9907\fi 9908 9909% Set I/O by bytes instead of UTF-8 sequence for XeTeX and LuaTex 9910% for non-UTF-8 (byte-wise) encodings. 9911% 9912\def\setbytewiseio{% 9913 \ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined 9914 \else 9915 \XeTeXdefaultencoding "bytes" % For subsequent files to be read 9916 \XeTeXinputencoding "bytes" % For document root file 9917 % Unfortunately, there seems to be no corresponding XeTeX command for 9918 % output encoding. This is a problem for auxiliary index and TOC files. 9919 % The only solution would be perhaps to write out @U{...} sequences in 9920 % place of non-ASCII characters. 9921 \fi 9922 9923 \ifx\luatexversion\thisisundefined 9924 \else 9925 \directlua{ 9926 local utf8_char, byte, gsub = unicode.utf8.char, string.byte, string.gsub 9927 local function convert_char (char) 9928 return utf8_char(byte(char)) 9929 end 9930 9931 local function convert_line (line) 9932 return gsub(line, ".", convert_char) 9933 end 9934 9935 callback.register("process_input_buffer", convert_line) 9936 9937 local function convert_line_out (line) 9938 local line_out = "" 9939 for c in string.utfvalues(line) do 9940 line_out = line_out .. string.char(c) 9941 end 9942 return line_out 9943 end 9944 9945 callback.register("process_output_buffer", convert_line_out) 9946 } 9947 \fi 9948 9949 \txiusebytewiseiotrue 9950} 9951 9952 9953% Helpers for encodings. 9954% Set the catcode of characters 128 through 255 to the specified number. 9955% 9956\def\setnonasciicharscatcode#1{% 9957 \count255=128 9958 \loop\ifnum\count255<256 9959 \global\catcode\count255=#1\relax 9960 \advance\count255 by 1 9961 \repeat 9962} 9963 9964\def\setnonasciicharscatcodenonglobal#1{% 9965 \count255=128 9966 \loop\ifnum\count255<256 9967 \catcode\count255=#1\relax 9968 \advance\count255 by 1 9969 \repeat 9970} 9971 9972% @documentencoding sets the definition of non-ASCII characters 9973% according to the specified encoding. 9974% 9975\def\documentencoding{\parseargusing\filenamecatcodes\documentencodingzzz} 9976\def\documentencodingzzz#1{% 9977 % 9978 % Encoding being declared for the document. 9979 \def\declaredencoding{\csname #1.enc\endcsname}% 9980 % 9981 % Supported encodings: names converted to tokens in order to be able 9982 % to compare them with \ifx. 9983 \def\ascii{\csname US-ASCII.enc\endcsname}% 9984 \def\latnine{\csname ISO-8859-15.enc\endcsname}% 9985 \def\latone{\csname ISO-8859-1.enc\endcsname}% 9986 \def\lattwo{\csname ISO-8859-2.enc\endcsname}% 9987 \def\utfeight{\csname UTF-8.enc\endcsname}% 9988 % 9989 \ifx \declaredencoding \ascii 9990 \asciichardefs 9991 % 9992 \else \ifx \declaredencoding \lattwo 9993 \iftxinativeunicodecapable 9994 \setbytewiseio 9995 \fi 9996 \setnonasciicharscatcode\active 9997 \lattwochardefs 9998 % 9999 \else \ifx \declaredencoding \latone 10000 \iftxinativeunicodecapable 10001 \setbytewiseio 10002 \fi 10003 \setnonasciicharscatcode\active 10004 \latonechardefs 10005 % 10006 \else \ifx \declaredencoding \latnine 10007 \iftxinativeunicodecapable 10008 \setbytewiseio 10009 \fi 10010 \setnonasciicharscatcode\active 10011 \latninechardefs 10012 % 10013 \else \ifx \declaredencoding \utfeight 10014 \iftxinativeunicodecapable 10015 % For native Unicode handling (XeTeX and LuaTeX) 10016 \nativeunicodechardefs 10017 \else 10018 % For treating UTF-8 as byte sequences (TeX, eTeX and pdfTeX) 10019 \setnonasciicharscatcode\active 10020 % since we already invoked \utfeightchardefs at the top level 10021 % (below), do not re-invoke it, otherwise our check for duplicated 10022 % definitions gets triggered. Making non-ascii chars active is 10023 % sufficient. 10024 \fi 10025 % 10026 \else 10027 \message{Ignoring unknown document encoding: #1.}% 10028 % 10029 \fi % utfeight 10030 \fi % latnine 10031 \fi % latone 10032 \fi % lattwo 10033 \fi % ascii 10034 % 10035 \ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined 10036 \else 10037 \ifx \declaredencoding \utfeight 10038 \else 10039 \ifx \declaredencoding \ascii 10040 \else 10041 \message{Warning: XeTeX with non-UTF-8 encodings cannot handle % 10042 non-ASCII characters in auxiliary files.}% 10043 \fi 10044 \fi 10045 \fi 10046} 10047 10048% emacs-page 10049% A message to be logged when using a character that isn't available 10050% the default font encoding (OT1). 10051% 10052\def\missingcharmsg#1{\message{Character missing, sorry: #1.}} 10053 10054% Take account of \c (plain) vs. \, (Texinfo) difference. 10055\def\cedilla#1{\ifx\c\ptexc\c{#1}\else\,{#1}\fi} 10056 10057% First, make active non-ASCII characters in order for them to be 10058% correctly categorized when TeX reads the replacement text of 10059% macros containing the character definitions. 10060\setnonasciicharscatcode\active 10061% 10062 10063\def\gdefchar#1#2{% 10064\gdef#1{% 10065 \ifpassthroughchars 10066 \string#1% 10067 \else 10068 #2% 10069 \fi 10070}} 10071 10072% Latin1 (ISO-8859-1) character definitions. 10073\def\latonechardefs{% 10074 \gdefchar^^a0{\tie} 10075 \gdefchar^^a1{\exclamdown} 10076 \gdefchar^^a2{{\tcfont \char162}} % cent 10077 \gdefchar^^a3{\pounds{}} 10078 \gdefchar^^a4{{\tcfont \char164}} % currency 10079 \gdefchar^^a5{{\tcfont \char165}} % yen 10080 \gdefchar^^a6{{\tcfont \char166}} % broken bar 10081 \gdefchar^^a7{\S} 10082 \gdefchar^^a8{\"{}} 10083 \gdefchar^^a9{\copyright{}} 10084 \gdefchar^^aa{\ordf} 10085 \gdefchar^^ab{\guillemetleft{}} 10086 \gdefchar^^ac{\ensuremath\lnot} 10087 \gdefchar^^ad{\-} 10088 \gdefchar^^ae{\registeredsymbol{}} 10089 \gdefchar^^af{\={}} 10090 % 10091 \gdefchar^^b0{\textdegree} 10092 \gdefchar^^b1{$\pm$} 10093 \gdefchar^^b2{$^2$} 10094 \gdefchar^^b3{$^3$} 10095 \gdefchar^^b4{\'{}} 10096 \gdefchar^^b5{$\mu$} 10097 \gdefchar^^b6{\P} 10098 \gdefchar^^b7{\ensuremath\cdot} 10099 \gdefchar^^b8{\cedilla\ } 10100 \gdefchar^^b9{$^1$} 10101 \gdefchar^^ba{\ordm} 10102 \gdefchar^^bb{\guillemetright{}} 10103 \gdefchar^^bc{$1\over4$} 10104 \gdefchar^^bd{$1\over2$} 10105 \gdefchar^^be{$3\over4$} 10106 \gdefchar^^bf{\questiondown} 10107 % 10108 \gdefchar^^c0{\`A} 10109 \gdefchar^^c1{\'A} 10110 \gdefchar^^c2{\^A} 10111 \gdefchar^^c3{\~A} 10112 \gdefchar^^c4{\"A} 10113 \gdefchar^^c5{\ringaccent A} 10114 \gdefchar^^c6{\AE} 10115 \gdefchar^^c7{\cedilla C} 10116 \gdefchar^^c8{\`E} 10117 \gdefchar^^c9{\'E} 10118 \gdefchar^^ca{\^E} 10119 \gdefchar^^cb{\"E} 10120 \gdefchar^^cc{\`I} 10121 \gdefchar^^cd{\'I} 10122 \gdefchar^^ce{\^I} 10123 \gdefchar^^cf{\"I} 10124 % 10125 \gdefchar^^d0{\DH} 10126 \gdefchar^^d1{\~N} 10127 \gdefchar^^d2{\`O} 10128 \gdefchar^^d3{\'O} 10129 \gdefchar^^d4{\^O} 10130 \gdefchar^^d5{\~O} 10131 \gdefchar^^d6{\"O} 10132 \gdefchar^^d7{$\times$} 10133 \gdefchar^^d8{\O} 10134 \gdefchar^^d9{\`U} 10135 \gdefchar^^da{\'U} 10136 \gdefchar^^db{\^U} 10137 \gdefchar^^dc{\"U} 10138 \gdefchar^^dd{\'Y} 10139 \gdefchar^^de{\TH} 10140 \gdefchar^^df{\ss} 10141 % 10142 \gdefchar^^e0{\`a} 10143 \gdefchar^^e1{\'a} 10144 \gdefchar^^e2{\^a} 10145 \gdefchar^^e3{\~a} 10146 \gdefchar^^e4{\"a} 10147 \gdefchar^^e5{\ringaccent a} 10148 \gdefchar^^e6{\ae} 10149 \gdefchar^^e7{\cedilla c} 10150 \gdefchar^^e8{\`e} 10151 \gdefchar^^e9{\'e} 10152 \gdefchar^^ea{\^e} 10153 \gdefchar^^eb{\"e} 10154 \gdefchar^^ec{\`{\dotless i}} 10155 \gdefchar^^ed{\'{\dotless i}} 10156 \gdefchar^^ee{\^{\dotless i}} 10157 \gdefchar^^ef{\"{\dotless i}} 10158 % 10159 \gdefchar^^f0{\dh} 10160 \gdefchar^^f1{\~n} 10161 \gdefchar^^f2{\`o} 10162 \gdefchar^^f3{\'o} 10163 \gdefchar^^f4{\^o} 10164 \gdefchar^^f5{\~o} 10165 \gdefchar^^f6{\"o} 10166 \gdefchar^^f7{$\div$} 10167 \gdefchar^^f8{\o} 10168 \gdefchar^^f9{\`u} 10169 \gdefchar^^fa{\'u} 10170 \gdefchar^^fb{\^u} 10171 \gdefchar^^fc{\"u} 10172 \gdefchar^^fd{\'y} 10173 \gdefchar^^fe{\th} 10174 \gdefchar^^ff{\"y} 10175} 10176 10177% Latin9 (ISO-8859-15) encoding character definitions. 10178\def\latninechardefs{% 10179 % Encoding is almost identical to Latin1. 10180 \latonechardefs 10181 % 10182 \gdefchar^^a4{\euro{}} 10183 \gdefchar^^a6{\v S} 10184 \gdefchar^^a8{\v s} 10185 \gdefchar^^b4{\v Z} 10186 \gdefchar^^b8{\v z} 10187 \gdefchar^^bc{\OE} 10188 \gdefchar^^bd{\oe} 10189 \gdefchar^^be{\"Y} 10190} 10191 10192% Latin2 (ISO-8859-2) character definitions. 10193\def\lattwochardefs{% 10194 \gdefchar^^a0{\tie} 10195 \gdefchar^^a1{\ogonek{A}} 10196 \gdefchar^^a2{\u{}} 10197 \gdefchar^^a3{\L} 10198 \gdefchar^^a4{\missingcharmsg{CURRENCY SIGN}} 10199 \gdefchar^^a5{\v L} 10200 \gdefchar^^a6{\'S} 10201 \gdefchar^^a7{\S} 10202 \gdefchar^^a8{\"{}} 10203 \gdefchar^^a9{\v S} 10204 \gdefchar^^aa{\cedilla S} 10205 \gdefchar^^ab{\v T} 10206 \gdefchar^^ac{\'Z} 10207 \gdefchar^^ad{\-} 10208 \gdefchar^^ae{\v Z} 10209 \gdefchar^^af{\dotaccent Z} 10210 % 10211 \gdefchar^^b0{\textdegree{}} 10212 \gdefchar^^b1{\ogonek{a}} 10213 \gdefchar^^b2{\ogonek{ }} 10214 \gdefchar^^b3{\l} 10215 \gdefchar^^b4{\'{}} 10216 \gdefchar^^b5{\v l} 10217 \gdefchar^^b6{\'s} 10218 \gdefchar^^b7{\v{}} 10219 \gdefchar^^b8{\cedilla\ } 10220 \gdefchar^^b9{\v s} 10221 \gdefchar^^ba{\cedilla s} 10222 \gdefchar^^bb{\v t} 10223 \gdefchar^^bc{\'z} 10224 \gdefchar^^bd{\H{}} 10225 \gdefchar^^be{\v z} 10226 \gdefchar^^bf{\dotaccent z} 10227 % 10228 \gdefchar^^c0{\'R} 10229 \gdefchar^^c1{\'A} 10230 \gdefchar^^c2{\^A} 10231 \gdefchar^^c3{\u A} 10232 \gdefchar^^c4{\"A} 10233 \gdefchar^^c5{\'L} 10234 \gdefchar^^c6{\'C} 10235 \gdefchar^^c7{\cedilla C} 10236 \gdefchar^^c8{\v C} 10237 \gdefchar^^c9{\'E} 10238 \gdefchar^^ca{\ogonek{E}} 10239 \gdefchar^^cb{\"E} 10240 \gdefchar^^cc{\v E} 10241 \gdefchar^^cd{\'I} 10242 \gdefchar^^ce{\^I} 10243 \gdefchar^^cf{\v D} 10244 % 10245 \gdefchar^^d0{\DH} 10246 \gdefchar^^d1{\'N} 10247 \gdefchar^^d2{\v N} 10248 \gdefchar^^d3{\'O} 10249 \gdefchar^^d4{\^O} 10250 \gdefchar^^d5{\H O} 10251 \gdefchar^^d6{\"O} 10252 \gdefchar^^d7{$\times$} 10253 \gdefchar^^d8{\v R} 10254 \gdefchar^^d9{\ringaccent U} 10255 \gdefchar^^da{\'U} 10256 \gdefchar^^db{\H U} 10257 \gdefchar^^dc{\"U} 10258 \gdefchar^^dd{\'Y} 10259 \gdefchar^^de{\cedilla T} 10260 \gdefchar^^df{\ss} 10261 % 10262 \gdefchar^^e0{\'r} 10263 \gdefchar^^e1{\'a} 10264 \gdefchar^^e2{\^a} 10265 \gdefchar^^e3{\u a} 10266 \gdefchar^^e4{\"a} 10267 \gdefchar^^e5{\'l} 10268 \gdefchar^^e6{\'c} 10269 \gdefchar^^e7{\cedilla c} 10270 \gdefchar^^e8{\v c} 10271 \gdefchar^^e9{\'e} 10272 \gdefchar^^ea{\ogonek{e}} 10273 \gdefchar^^eb{\"e} 10274 \gdefchar^^ec{\v e} 10275 \gdefchar^^ed{\'{\dotless{i}}} 10276 \gdefchar^^ee{\^{\dotless{i}}} 10277 \gdefchar^^ef{\v d} 10278 % 10279 \gdefchar^^f0{\dh} 10280 \gdefchar^^f1{\'n} 10281 \gdefchar^^f2{\v n} 10282 \gdefchar^^f3{\'o} 10283 \gdefchar^^f4{\^o} 10284 \gdefchar^^f5{\H o} 10285 \gdefchar^^f6{\"o} 10286 \gdefchar^^f7{$\div$} 10287 \gdefchar^^f8{\v r} 10288 \gdefchar^^f9{\ringaccent u} 10289 \gdefchar^^fa{\'u} 10290 \gdefchar^^fb{\H u} 10291 \gdefchar^^fc{\"u} 10292 \gdefchar^^fd{\'y} 10293 \gdefchar^^fe{\cedilla t} 10294 \gdefchar^^ff{\dotaccent{}} 10295} 10296 10297% UTF-8 character definitions. 10298% 10299% This code to support UTF-8 is based on LaTeX's utf8.def, with some 10300% changes for Texinfo conventions. It is included here under the GPL by 10301% permission from Frank Mittelbach and the LaTeX team. 10302% 10303\newcount\countUTFx 10304\newcount\countUTFy 10305\newcount\countUTFz 10306 10307\gdef\UTFviiiTwoOctets#1#2{\expandafter 10308 \UTFviiiDefined\csname u8:#1\string #2\endcsname} 10309% 10310\gdef\UTFviiiThreeOctets#1#2#3{\expandafter 10311 \UTFviiiDefined\csname u8:#1\string #2\string #3\endcsname} 10312% 10313\gdef\UTFviiiFourOctets#1#2#3#4{\expandafter 10314 \UTFviiiDefined\csname u8:#1\string #2\string #3\string #4\endcsname} 10315 10316\gdef\UTFviiiDefined#1{% 10317 \ifx #1\relax 10318 \message{\linenumber Unicode char \string #1 not defined for Texinfo}% 10319 \else 10320 \expandafter #1% 10321 \fi 10322} 10323 10324% Give non-ASCII bytes the active definitions for processing UTF-8 sequences 10325\begingroup 10326 \catcode`\~13 10327 \catcode`\$12 10328 \catcode`\"12 10329 10330 % Loop from \countUTFx to \countUTFy, performing \UTFviiiTmp 10331 % substituting ~ and $ with a character token of that value. 10332 \def\UTFviiiLoop{% 10333 \global\catcode\countUTFx\active 10334 \uccode`\~\countUTFx 10335 \uccode`\$\countUTFx 10336 \uppercase\expandafter{\UTFviiiTmp}% 10337 \advance\countUTFx by 1 10338 \ifnum\countUTFx < \countUTFy 10339 \expandafter\UTFviiiLoop 10340 \fi} 10341 10342 % For bytes other than the first in a UTF-8 sequence. Not expected to 10343 % be expanded except when writing to auxiliary files. 10344 \countUTFx = "80 10345 \countUTFy = "C2 10346 \def\UTFviiiTmp{% 10347 \gdef~{% 10348 \ifpassthroughchars $\fi}}% 10349 \UTFviiiLoop 10350 10351 \countUTFx = "C2 10352 \countUTFy = "E0 10353 \def\UTFviiiTmp{% 10354 \gdef~{% 10355 \ifpassthroughchars $% 10356 \else\expandafter\UTFviiiTwoOctets\expandafter$\fi}}% 10357 \UTFviiiLoop 10358 10359 \countUTFx = "E0 10360 \countUTFy = "F0 10361 \def\UTFviiiTmp{% 10362 \gdef~{% 10363 \ifpassthroughchars $% 10364 \else\expandafter\UTFviiiThreeOctets\expandafter$\fi}}% 10365 \UTFviiiLoop 10366 10367 \countUTFx = "F0 10368 \countUTFy = "F4 10369 \def\UTFviiiTmp{% 10370 \gdef~{% 10371 \ifpassthroughchars $% 10372 \else\expandafter\UTFviiiFourOctets\expandafter$\fi 10373 }}% 10374 \UTFviiiLoop 10375\endgroup 10376 10377\def\globallet{\global\let} % save some \expandafter's below 10378 10379% @U{xxxx} to produce U+xxxx, if we support it. 10380\def\U#1{% 10381 \expandafter\ifx\csname uni:#1\endcsname \relax 10382 \iftxinativeunicodecapable 10383 % All Unicode characters can be used if native Unicode handling is 10384 % active. However, if the font does not have the glyph, 10385 % letters are missing. 10386 \begingroup 10387 \uccode`\.="#1\relax 10388 \uppercase{.} 10389 \endgroup 10390 \else 10391 \errhelp = \EMsimple 10392 \errmessage{Unicode character U+#1 not supported, sorry}% 10393 \fi 10394 \else 10395 \csname uni:#1\endcsname 10396 \fi 10397} 10398 10399% These macros are used here to construct the name of a control 10400% sequence to be defined. 10401\def\UTFviiiTwoOctetsName#1#2{% 10402 \csname u8:#1\string #2\endcsname}% 10403\def\UTFviiiThreeOctetsName#1#2#3{% 10404 \csname u8:#1\string #2\string #3\endcsname}% 10405\def\UTFviiiFourOctetsName#1#2#3#4{% 10406 \csname u8:#1\string #2\string #3\string #4\endcsname}% 10407 10408% For UTF-8 byte sequences (TeX, e-TeX and pdfTeX), 10409% provide a definition macro to replace a Unicode character; 10410% this gets used by the @U command 10411% 10412\begingroup 10413 \catcode`\"=12 10414 \catcode`\<=12 10415 \catcode`\.=12 10416 \catcode`\,=12 10417 \catcode`\;=12 10418 \catcode`\!=12 10419 \catcode`\~=13 10420 \gdef\DeclareUnicodeCharacterUTFviii#1#2{% 10421 \countUTFz = "#1\relax 10422 \begingroup 10423 \parseXMLCharref 10424 10425 % Give \u8:... its definition. The sequence of seven \expandafter's 10426 % expands after the \gdef three times, e.g. 10427 % 10428 % 1. \UTFviiTwoOctetsName B1 B2 10429 % 2. \csname u8:B1 \string B2 \endcsname 10430 % 3. \u8: B1 B2 (a single control sequence token) 10431 % 10432 \expandafter\expandafter 10433 \expandafter\expandafter 10434 \expandafter\expandafter 10435 \expandafter\gdef \UTFviiiTmp{#2}% 10436 % 10437 \expandafter\ifx\csname uni:#1\endcsname \relax \else 10438 \message{Internal error, already defined: #1}% 10439 \fi 10440 % 10441 % define an additional control sequence for this code point. 10442 \expandafter\globallet\csname uni:#1\endcsname \UTFviiiTmp 10443 \endgroup} 10444 % 10445 % Given the value in \countUTFz as a Unicode code point, set \UTFviiiTmp 10446 % to the corresponding UTF-8 sequence. 10447 \gdef\parseXMLCharref{% 10448 \ifnum\countUTFz < "A0\relax 10449 \errhelp = \EMsimple 10450 \errmessage{Cannot define Unicode char value < 00A0}% 10451 \else\ifnum\countUTFz < "800\relax 10452 \parseUTFviiiA,% 10453 \parseUTFviiiB C\UTFviiiTwoOctetsName.,% 10454 \else\ifnum\countUTFz < "10000\relax 10455 \parseUTFviiiA;% 10456 \parseUTFviiiA,% 10457 \parseUTFviiiB E\UTFviiiThreeOctetsName.{,;}% 10458 \else 10459 \parseUTFviiiA;% 10460 \parseUTFviiiA,% 10461 \parseUTFviiiA!% 10462 \parseUTFviiiB F\UTFviiiFourOctetsName.{!,;}% 10463 \fi\fi\fi 10464 } 10465 10466 % Extract a byte from the end of the UTF-8 representation of \countUTFx. 10467 % It must be a non-initial byte in the sequence. 10468 % Change \uccode of #1 for it to be used in \parseUTFviiiB as one 10469 % of the bytes. 10470 \gdef\parseUTFviiiA#1{% 10471 \countUTFx = \countUTFz 10472 \divide\countUTFz by 64 10473 \countUTFy = \countUTFz % Save to be the future value of \countUTFz. 10474 \multiply\countUTFz by 64 10475 10476 % \countUTFz is now \countUTFx with the last 5 bits cleared. Subtract 10477 % in order to get the last five bits. 10478 \advance\countUTFx by -\countUTFz 10479 10480 % Convert this to the byte in the UTF-8 sequence. 10481 \advance\countUTFx by 128 10482 \uccode `#1\countUTFx 10483 \countUTFz = \countUTFy} 10484 10485 % Used to put a UTF-8 byte sequence into \UTFviiiTmp 10486 % #1 is the increment for \countUTFz to yield a the first byte of the UTF-8 10487 % sequence. 10488 % #2 is one of the \UTFviii*OctetsName macros. 10489 % #3 is always a full stop (.) 10490 % #4 is a template for the other bytes in the sequence. The values for these 10491 % bytes is substituted in here with \uppercase using the \uccode's. 10492 \gdef\parseUTFviiiB#1#2#3#4{% 10493 \advance\countUTFz by "#10\relax 10494 \uccode `#3\countUTFz 10495 \uppercase{\gdef\UTFviiiTmp{#2#3#4}}} 10496\endgroup 10497 10498% For native Unicode handling (XeTeX and LuaTeX), 10499% provide a definition macro that sets a catcode to `other' non-globally 10500% 10501\def\DeclareUnicodeCharacterNativeOther#1#2{% 10502 \catcode"#1=\other 10503} 10504 10505% https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Plane_(Unicode)#Basic_M 10506% U+0000..U+007F = https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Basic_Latin_(Unicode_block) 10507% U+0080..U+00FF = https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Latin-1_Supplement_(Unicode_block) 10508% U+0100..U+017F = https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Latin_Extended-A 10509% U+0180..U+024F = https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Latin_Extended-B 10510% 10511% Many of our renditions are less than wonderful, and all the missing 10512% characters are available somewhere. Loading the necessary fonts 10513% awaits user request. We can't truly support Unicode without 10514% reimplementing everything that's been done in LaTeX for many years, 10515% plus probably using luatex or xetex, and who knows what else. 10516% We won't be doing that here in this simple file. But we can try to at 10517% least make most of the characters not bomb out. 10518% 10519\def\unicodechardefs{% 10520 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A0}{\tie}% 10521 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A1}{\exclamdown}% 10522 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A2}{{\tcfont \char162}}% 0242=cent 10523 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A3}{\pounds{}}% 10524 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A4}{{\tcfont \char164}}% 0244=currency 10525 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A5}{{\tcfont \char165}}% 0245=yen 10526 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A6}{{\tcfont \char166}}% 0246=brokenbar 10527 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A7}{\S}% 10528 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A8}{\"{ }}% 10529 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A9}{\copyright{}}% 10530 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AA}{\ordf}% 10531 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AB}{\guillemetleft{}}% 10532 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AC}{\ensuremath\lnot}% 10533 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AD}{\-}% 10534 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AE}{\registeredsymbol{}}% 10535 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AF}{\={ }}% 10536 % 10537 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B0}{\ringaccent{ }}% 10538 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B1}{\ensuremath\pm}% 10539 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B2}{$^2$}% 10540 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B3}{$^3$}% 10541 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B4}{\'{ }}% 10542 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B5}{$\mu$}% 10543 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B6}{\P}% 10544 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B7}{\ensuremath\cdot}% 10545 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B8}{\cedilla{ }}% 10546 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B9}{$^1$}% 10547 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BA}{\ordm}% 10548 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BB}{\guillemetright{}}% 10549 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BC}{$1\over4$}% 10550 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BD}{$1\over2$}% 10551 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BE}{$3\over4$}% 10552 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BF}{\questiondown}% 10553 % 10554 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C0}{\`A}% 10555 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C1}{\'A}% 10556 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C2}{\^A}% 10557 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C3}{\~A}% 10558 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C4}{\"A}% 10559 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C5}{\AA}% 10560 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C6}{\AE}% 10561 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C7}{\cedilla{C}}% 10562 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C8}{\`E}% 10563 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C9}{\'E}% 10564 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CA}{\^E}% 10565 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CB}{\"E}% 10566 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CC}{\`I}% 10567 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CD}{\'I}% 10568 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CE}{\^I}% 10569 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CF}{\"I}% 10570 % 10571 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D0}{\DH}% 10572 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D1}{\~N}% 10573 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D2}{\`O}% 10574 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D3}{\'O}% 10575 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D4}{\^O}% 10576 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D5}{\~O}% 10577 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D6}{\"O}% 10578 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D7}{\ensuremath\times}% 10579 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D8}{\O}% 10580 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D9}{\`U}% 10581 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DA}{\'U}% 10582 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DB}{\^U}% 10583 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DC}{\"U}% 10584 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DD}{\'Y}% 10585 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DE}{\TH}% 10586 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DF}{\ss}% 10587 % 10588 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E0}{\`a}% 10589 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E1}{\'a}% 10590 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E2}{\^a}% 10591 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E3}{\~a}% 10592 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E4}{\"a}% 10593 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E5}{\aa}% 10594 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E6}{\ae}% 10595 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E7}{\cedilla{c}}% 10596 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E8}{\`e}% 10597 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E9}{\'e}% 10598 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EA}{\^e}% 10599 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EB}{\"e}% 10600 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EC}{\`{\dotless{i}}}% 10601 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00ED}{\'{\dotless{i}}}% 10602 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EE}{\^{\dotless{i}}}% 10603 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EF}{\"{\dotless{i}}}% 10604 % 10605 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F0}{\dh}% 10606 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F1}{\~n}% 10607 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F2}{\`o}% 10608 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F3}{\'o}% 10609 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F4}{\^o}% 10610 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F5}{\~o}% 10611 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F6}{\"o}% 10612 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F7}{\ensuremath\div}% 10613 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F8}{\o}% 10614 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F9}{\`u}% 10615 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FA}{\'u}% 10616 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FB}{\^u}% 10617 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FC}{\"u}% 10618 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FD}{\'y}% 10619 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FE}{\th}% 10620 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FF}{\"y}% 10621 % 10622 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0100}{\=A}% 10623 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0101}{\=a}% 10624 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0102}{\u{A}}% 10625 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0103}{\u{a}}% 10626 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0104}{\ogonek{A}}% 10627 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0105}{\ogonek{a}}% 10628 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0106}{\'C}% 10629 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0107}{\'c}% 10630 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0108}{\^C}% 10631 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0109}{\^c}% 10632 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010A}{\dotaccent{C}}% 10633 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010B}{\dotaccent{c}}% 10634 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010C}{\v{C}}% 10635 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010D}{\v{c}}% 10636 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010E}{\v{D}}% 10637 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010F}{d'}% 10638 % 10639 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0110}{\DH}% 10640 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0111}{\dh}% 10641 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0112}{\=E}% 10642 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0113}{\=e}% 10643 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0114}{\u{E}}% 10644 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0115}{\u{e}}% 10645 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0116}{\dotaccent{E}}% 10646 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0117}{\dotaccent{e}}% 10647 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0118}{\ogonek{E}}% 10648 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0119}{\ogonek{e}}% 10649 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011A}{\v{E}}% 10650 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011B}{\v{e}}% 10651 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011C}{\^G}% 10652 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011D}{\^g}% 10653 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011E}{\u{G}}% 10654 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011F}{\u{g}}% 10655 % 10656 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0120}{\dotaccent{G}}% 10657 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0121}{\dotaccent{g}}% 10658 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0122}{\cedilla{G}}% 10659 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0123}{\cedilla{g}}% 10660 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0124}{\^H}% 10661 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0125}{\^h}% 10662 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0126}{\missingcharmsg{H WITH STROKE}}% 10663 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0127}{\missingcharmsg{h WITH STROKE}}% 10664 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0128}{\~I}% 10665 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0129}{\~{\dotless{i}}}% 10666 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012A}{\=I}% 10667 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012B}{\={\dotless{i}}}% 10668 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012C}{\u{I}}% 10669 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012D}{\u{\dotless{i}}}% 10670 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012E}{\ogonek{I}}% 10671 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012F}{\ogonek{i}}% 10672 % 10673 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0130}{\dotaccent{I}}% 10674 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0131}{\dotless{i}}% 10675 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0132}{IJ}% 10676 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0133}{ij}% 10677 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0134}{\^J}% 10678 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0135}{\^{\dotless{j}}}% 10679 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0136}{\cedilla{K}}% 10680 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0137}{\cedilla{k}}% 10681 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0138}{\ensuremath\kappa}% 10682 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0139}{\'L}% 10683 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{013A}{\'l}% 10684 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{013B}{\cedilla{L}}% 10685 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{013C}{\cedilla{l}}% 10686 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{013D}{L'}% should kern 10687 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{013E}{l'}% should kern 10688 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{013F}{L\U{00B7}}% 10689 % 10690 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0140}{l\U{00B7}}% 10691 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0141}{\L}% 10692 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0142}{\l}% 10693 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0143}{\'N}% 10694 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0144}{\'n}% 10695 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0145}{\cedilla{N}}% 10696 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0146}{\cedilla{n}}% 10697 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0147}{\v{N}}% 10698 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0148}{\v{n}}% 10699 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0149}{'n}% 10700 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014A}{\missingcharmsg{ENG}}% 10701 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014B}{\missingcharmsg{eng}}% 10702 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014C}{\=O}% 10703 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014D}{\=o}% 10704 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014E}{\u{O}}% 10705 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014F}{\u{o}}% 10706 % 10707 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0150}{\H{O}}% 10708 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0151}{\H{o}}% 10709 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0152}{\OE}% 10710 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0153}{\oe}% 10711 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0154}{\'R}% 10712 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0155}{\'r}% 10713 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0156}{\cedilla{R}}% 10714 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0157}{\cedilla{r}}% 10715 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0158}{\v{R}}% 10716 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0159}{\v{r}}% 10717 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015A}{\'S}% 10718 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015B}{\'s}% 10719 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015C}{\^S}% 10720 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015D}{\^s}% 10721 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015E}{\cedilla{S}}% 10722 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015F}{\cedilla{s}}% 10723 % 10724 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0160}{\v{S}}% 10725 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0161}{\v{s}}% 10726 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0162}{\cedilla{T}}% 10727 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0163}{\cedilla{t}}% 10728 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0164}{\v{T}}% 10729 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0165}{\v{t}}% 10730 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0166}{\missingcharmsg{H WITH STROKE}}% 10731 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0167}{\missingcharmsg{h WITH STROKE}}% 10732 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0168}{\~U}% 10733 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0169}{\~u}% 10734 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016A}{\=U}% 10735 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016B}{\=u}% 10736 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016C}{\u{U}}% 10737 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016D}{\u{u}}% 10738 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016E}{\ringaccent{U}}% 10739 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016F}{\ringaccent{u}}% 10740 % 10741 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0170}{\H{U}}% 10742 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0171}{\H{u}}% 10743 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0172}{\ogonek{U}}% 10744 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0173}{\ogonek{u}}% 10745 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0174}{\^W}% 10746 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0175}{\^w}% 10747 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0176}{\^Y}% 10748 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0177}{\^y}% 10749 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0178}{\"Y}% 10750 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0179}{\'Z}% 10751 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017A}{\'z}% 10752 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017B}{\dotaccent{Z}}% 10753 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017C}{\dotaccent{z}}% 10754 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017D}{\v{Z}}% 10755 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017E}{\v{z}}% 10756 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017F}{\missingcharmsg{LONG S}}% 10757 % 10758 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C4}{D\v{Z}}% 10759 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C5}{D\v{z}}% 10760 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C6}{d\v{z}}% 10761 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C7}{LJ}% 10762 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C8}{Lj}% 10763 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C9}{lj}% 10764 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CA}{NJ}% 10765 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CB}{Nj}% 10766 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CC}{nj}% 10767 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CD}{\v{A}}% 10768 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CE}{\v{a}}% 10769 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CF}{\v{I}}% 10770 % 10771 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D0}{\v{\dotless{i}}}% 10772 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D1}{\v{O}}% 10773 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D2}{\v{o}}% 10774 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D3}{\v{U}}% 10775 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D4}{\v{u}}% 10776 % 10777 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E2}{\={\AE}}% 10778 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E3}{\={\ae}}% 10779 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E6}{\v{G}}% 10780 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E7}{\v{g}}% 10781 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E8}{\v{K}}% 10782 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E9}{\v{k}}% 10783 % 10784 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F0}{\v{\dotless{j}}}% 10785 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F1}{DZ}% 10786 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F2}{Dz}% 10787 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F3}{dz}% 10788 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F4}{\'G}% 10789 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F5}{\'g}% 10790 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F8}{\`N}% 10791 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F9}{\`n}% 10792 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FC}{\'{\AE}}% 10793 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FD}{\'{\ae}}% 10794 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FE}{\'{\O}}% 10795 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FF}{\'{\o}}% 10796 % 10797 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{021E}{\v{H}}% 10798 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{021F}{\v{h}}% 10799 % 10800 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0226}{\dotaccent{A}}% 10801 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0227}{\dotaccent{a}}% 10802 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0228}{\cedilla{E}}% 10803 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0229}{\cedilla{e}}% 10804 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{022E}{\dotaccent{O}}% 10805 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{022F}{\dotaccent{o}}% 10806 % 10807 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0232}{\=Y}% 10808 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0233}{\=y}% 10809 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0237}{\dotless{j}}% 10810 % 10811 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{02DB}{\ogonek{ }}% 10812 % 10813 % Greek letters upper case 10814 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0391}{{\it A}}% 10815 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0392}{{\it B}}% 10816 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0393}{\ensuremath{\mit\Gamma}}% 10817 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0394}{\ensuremath{\mit\Delta}}% 10818 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0395}{{\it E}}% 10819 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0396}{{\it Z}}% 10820 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0397}{{\it H}}% 10821 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0398}{\ensuremath{\mit\Theta}}% 10822 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0399}{{\it I}}% 10823 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{039A}{{\it K}}% 10824 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{039B}{\ensuremath{\mit\Lambda}}% 10825 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{039C}{{\it M}}% 10826 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{039D}{{\it N}}% 10827 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{039E}{\ensuremath{\mit\Xi}}% 10828 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{039F}{{\it O}}% 10829 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A0}{\ensuremath{\mit\Pi}}% 10830 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A1}{{\it P}}% 10831 %\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A2}{} % none - corresponds to final sigma 10832 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A3}{\ensuremath{\mit\Sigma}}% 10833 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A4}{{\it T}}% 10834 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A5}{\ensuremath{\mit\Upsilon}}% 10835 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A6}{\ensuremath{\mit\Phi}}% 10836 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A7}{{\it X}}% 10837 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A8}{\ensuremath{\mit\Psi}}% 10838 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A9}{\ensuremath{\mit\Omega}}% 10839 % 10840 % Vowels with accents 10841 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0390}{\ensuremath{\ddot{\acute\iota}}}% 10842 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03AC}{\ensuremath{\acute\alpha}}% 10843 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03AD}{\ensuremath{\acute\epsilon}}% 10844 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03AE}{\ensuremath{\acute\eta}}% 10845 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03AF}{\ensuremath{\acute\iota}}% 10846 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B0}{\ensuremath{\acute{\ddot\upsilon}}}% 10847 % 10848 % Standalone accent 10849 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0384}{\ensuremath{\acute{\ }}}% 10850 % 10851 % Greek letters lower case 10852 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B1}{\ensuremath\alpha}% 10853 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B2}{\ensuremath\beta}% 10854 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B3}{\ensuremath\gamma}% 10855 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B4}{\ensuremath\delta}% 10856 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B5}{\ensuremath\epsilon}% 10857 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B6}{\ensuremath\zeta}% 10858 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B7}{\ensuremath\eta}% 10859 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B8}{\ensuremath\theta}% 10860 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B9}{\ensuremath\iota}% 10861 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03BA}{\ensuremath\kappa}% 10862 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03BB}{\ensuremath\lambda}% 10863 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03BC}{\ensuremath\mu}% 10864 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03BD}{\ensuremath\nu}% 10865 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03BE}{\ensuremath\xi}% 10866 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03BF}{{\it o}}% omicron 10867 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C0}{\ensuremath\pi}% 10868 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C1}{\ensuremath\rho}% 10869 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C2}{\ensuremath\varsigma}% 10870 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C3}{\ensuremath\sigma}% 10871 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C4}{\ensuremath\tau}% 10872 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C5}{\ensuremath\upsilon}% 10873 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C6}{\ensuremath\phi}% 10874 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C7}{\ensuremath\chi}% 10875 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C8}{\ensuremath\psi}% 10876 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C9}{\ensuremath\omega}% 10877 % 10878 % More Greek vowels with accents 10879 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03CA}{\ensuremath{\ddot\iota}}% 10880 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03CB}{\ensuremath{\ddot\upsilon}}% 10881 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03CC}{\ensuremath{\acute o}}% 10882 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03CD}{\ensuremath{\acute\upsilon}}% 10883 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03CE}{\ensuremath{\acute\omega}}% 10884 % 10885 % Variant Greek letters 10886 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03D1}{\ensuremath\vartheta}% 10887 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03D6}{\ensuremath\varpi}% 10888 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03F1}{\ensuremath\varrho}% 10889 % 10890 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E02}{\dotaccent{B}}% 10891 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E03}{\dotaccent{b}}% 10892 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E04}{\udotaccent{B}}% 10893 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E05}{\udotaccent{b}}% 10894 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E06}{\ubaraccent{B}}% 10895 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E07}{\ubaraccent{b}}% 10896 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0A}{\dotaccent{D}}% 10897 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0B}{\dotaccent{d}}% 10898 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0C}{\udotaccent{D}}% 10899 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0D}{\udotaccent{d}}% 10900 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0E}{\ubaraccent{D}}% 10901 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0F}{\ubaraccent{d}}% 10902 % 10903 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E1E}{\dotaccent{F}}% 10904 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E1F}{\dotaccent{f}}% 10905 % 10906 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E20}{\=G}% 10907 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E21}{\=g}% 10908 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E22}{\dotaccent{H}}% 10909 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E23}{\dotaccent{h}}% 10910 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E24}{\udotaccent{H}}% 10911 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E25}{\udotaccent{h}}% 10912 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E26}{\"H}% 10913 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E27}{\"h}% 10914 % 10915 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E30}{\'K}% 10916 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E31}{\'k}% 10917 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E32}{\udotaccent{K}}% 10918 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E33}{\udotaccent{k}}% 10919 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E34}{\ubaraccent{K}}% 10920 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E35}{\ubaraccent{k}}% 10921 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E36}{\udotaccent{L}}% 10922 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E37}{\udotaccent{l}}% 10923 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3A}{\ubaraccent{L}}% 10924 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3B}{\ubaraccent{l}}% 10925 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3E}{\'M}% 10926 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3F}{\'m}% 10927 % 10928 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E40}{\dotaccent{M}}% 10929 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E41}{\dotaccent{m}}% 10930 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E42}{\udotaccent{M}}% 10931 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E43}{\udotaccent{m}}% 10932 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E44}{\dotaccent{N}}% 10933 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E45}{\dotaccent{n}}% 10934 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E46}{\udotaccent{N}}% 10935 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E47}{\udotaccent{n}}% 10936 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E48}{\ubaraccent{N}}% 10937 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E49}{\ubaraccent{n}}% 10938 % 10939 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E54}{\'P}% 10940 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E55}{\'p}% 10941 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E56}{\dotaccent{P}}% 10942 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E57}{\dotaccent{p}}% 10943 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E58}{\dotaccent{R}}% 10944 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E59}{\dotaccent{r}}% 10945 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5A}{\udotaccent{R}}% 10946 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5B}{\udotaccent{r}}% 10947 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5E}{\ubaraccent{R}}% 10948 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5F}{\ubaraccent{r}}% 10949 % 10950 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E60}{\dotaccent{S}}% 10951 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E61}{\dotaccent{s}}% 10952 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E62}{\udotaccent{S}}% 10953 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E63}{\udotaccent{s}}% 10954 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6A}{\dotaccent{T}}% 10955 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6B}{\dotaccent{t}}% 10956 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6C}{\udotaccent{T}}% 10957 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6D}{\udotaccent{t}}% 10958 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6E}{\ubaraccent{T}}% 10959 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6F}{\ubaraccent{t}}% 10960 % 10961 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7C}{\~V}% 10962 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7D}{\~v}% 10963 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7E}{\udotaccent{V}}% 10964 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7F}{\udotaccent{v}}% 10965 % 10966 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E80}{\`W}% 10967 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E81}{\`w}% 10968 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E82}{\'W}% 10969 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E83}{\'w}% 10970 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E84}{\"W}% 10971 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E85}{\"w}% 10972 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E86}{\dotaccent{W}}% 10973 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E87}{\dotaccent{w}}% 10974 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E88}{\udotaccent{W}}% 10975 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E89}{\udotaccent{w}}% 10976 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8A}{\dotaccent{X}}% 10977 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8B}{\dotaccent{x}}% 10978 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8C}{\"X}% 10979 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8D}{\"x}% 10980 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8E}{\dotaccent{Y}}% 10981 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8F}{\dotaccent{y}}% 10982 % 10983 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E90}{\^Z}% 10984 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E91}{\^z}% 10985 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E92}{\udotaccent{Z}}% 10986 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E93}{\udotaccent{z}}% 10987 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E94}{\ubaraccent{Z}}% 10988 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E95}{\ubaraccent{z}}% 10989 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E96}{\ubaraccent{h}}% 10990 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E97}{\"t}% 10991 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E98}{\ringaccent{w}}% 10992 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E99}{\ringaccent{y}}% 10993 % 10994 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EA0}{\udotaccent{A}}% 10995 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EA1}{\udotaccent{a}}% 10996 % 10997 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EB8}{\udotaccent{E}}% 10998 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EB9}{\udotaccent{e}}% 10999 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EBC}{\~E}% 11000 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EBD}{\~e}% 11001 % 11002 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECA}{\udotaccent{I}}% 11003 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECB}{\udotaccent{i}}% 11004 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECC}{\udotaccent{O}}% 11005 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECD}{\udotaccent{o}}% 11006 % 11007 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EE4}{\udotaccent{U}}% 11008 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EE5}{\udotaccent{u}}% 11009 % 11010 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF2}{\`Y}% 11011 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF3}{\`y}% 11012 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF4}{\udotaccent{Y}}% 11013 % 11014 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF8}{\~Y}% 11015 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF9}{\~y}% 11016 % 11017 % Punctuation 11018 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2013}{--}% 11019 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2014}{---}% 11020 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2018}{\quoteleft{}}% 11021 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2019}{\quoteright{}}% 11022 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201A}{\quotesinglbase{}}% 11023 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201C}{\quotedblleft{}}% 11024 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201D}{\quotedblright{}}% 11025 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201E}{\quotedblbase{}}% 11026 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2020}{\ensuremath\dagger}% 11027 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2021}{\ensuremath\ddagger}% 11028 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2022}{\bullet{}}% 11029 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{202F}{\thinspace}% 11030 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2026}{\dots{}}% 11031 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2039}{\guilsinglleft{}}% 11032 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{203A}{\guilsinglright{}}% 11033 % 11034 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{20AC}{\euro{}}% 11035 % 11036 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2192}{\expansion{}}% 11037 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21D2}{\result{}}% 11038 % 11039 % Mathematical symbols 11040 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2200}{\ensuremath\forall}% 11041 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2203}{\ensuremath\exists}% 11042 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2208}{\ensuremath\in}% 11043 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2212}{\minus{}}% 11044 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2217}{\ast}% 11045 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{221E}{\ensuremath\infty}% 11046 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2225}{\ensuremath\parallel}% 11047 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2227}{\ensuremath\wedge}% 11048 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2229}{\ensuremath\cap}% 11049 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2261}{\equiv{}}% 11050 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2264}{\ensuremath\leq}% 11051 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2265}{\ensuremath\geq}% 11052 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2282}{\ensuremath\subset}% 11053 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2287}{\ensuremath\supseteq}% 11054 % 11055 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2016}{\ensuremath\Vert}% 11056 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2032}{\ensuremath\prime}% 11057 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{210F}{\ensuremath\hbar}% 11058 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2111}{\ensuremath\Im}% 11059 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2113}{\ensuremath\ell}% 11060 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2118}{\ensuremath\wp}% 11061 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{211C}{\ensuremath\Re}% 11062 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2135}{\ensuremath\aleph}% 11063 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2190}{\ensuremath\leftarrow}% 11064 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2191}{\ensuremath\uparrow}% 11065 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2193}{\ensuremath\downarrow}% 11066 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2194}{\ensuremath\leftrightarrow}% 11067 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2195}{\ensuremath\updownarrow}% 11068 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2196}{\ensuremath\nwarrow}% 11069 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2197}{\ensuremath\nearrow}% 11070 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2198}{\ensuremath\searrow}% 11071 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2199}{\ensuremath\swarrow}% 11072 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21A6}{\ensuremath\mapsto}% 11073 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21A9}{\ensuremath\hookleftarrow}% 11074 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21AA}{\ensuremath\hookrightarrow}% 11075 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21BC}{\ensuremath\leftharpoonup}% 11076 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21BD}{\ensuremath\leftharpoondown}% 11077 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21C0}{\ensuremath\rightharpoonup}% 11078 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21C1}{\ensuremath\rightharpoondown}% 11079 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21CC}{\ensuremath\rightleftharpoons}% 11080 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21D0}{\ensuremath\Leftarrow}% 11081 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21D1}{\ensuremath\Uparrow}% 11082 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21D3}{\ensuremath\Downarrow}% 11083 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21D4}{\ensuremath\Leftrightarrow}% 11084 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21D5}{\ensuremath\Updownarrow}% 11085 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2202}{\ensuremath\partial}% 11086 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2205}{\ensuremath\emptyset}% 11087 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2207}{\ensuremath\nabla}% 11088 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2209}{\ensuremath\notin}% 11089 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{220B}{\ensuremath\owns}% 11090 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{220F}{\ensuremath\prod}% 11091 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2210}{\ensuremath\coprod}% 11092 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2211}{\ensuremath\sum}% 11093 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2213}{\ensuremath\mp}% 11094 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2218}{\ensuremath\circ}% 11095 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{221A}{\ensuremath\surd}% 11096 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{221D}{\ensuremath\propto}% 11097 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2220}{\ensuremath\angle}% 11098 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2223}{\ensuremath\mid}% 11099 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2228}{\ensuremath\vee}% 11100 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{222A}{\ensuremath\cup}% 11101 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{222B}{\ensuremath\smallint}% 11102 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{222E}{\ensuremath\oint}% 11103 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{223C}{\ensuremath\sim}% 11104 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2240}{\ensuremath\wr}% 11105 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2243}{\ensuremath\simeq}% 11106 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2245}{\ensuremath\cong}% 11107 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2248}{\ensuremath\approx}% 11108 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{224D}{\ensuremath\asymp}% 11109 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2250}{\ensuremath\doteq}% 11110 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2260}{\ensuremath\neq}% 11111 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{226A}{\ensuremath\ll}% 11112 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{226B}{\ensuremath\gg}% 11113 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{227A}{\ensuremath\prec}% 11114 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{227B}{\ensuremath\succ}% 11115 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2283}{\ensuremath\supset}% 11116 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2286}{\ensuremath\subseteq}% 11117 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{228E}{\ensuremath\uplus}% 11118 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2291}{\ensuremath\sqsubseteq}% 11119 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2292}{\ensuremath\sqsupseteq}% 11120 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2293}{\ensuremath\sqcap}% 11121 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2294}{\ensuremath\sqcup}% 11122 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2295}{\ensuremath\oplus}% 11123 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2296}{\ensuremath\ominus}% 11124 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2297}{\ensuremath\otimes}% 11125 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2298}{\ensuremath\oslash}% 11126 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2299}{\ensuremath\odot}% 11127 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22A2}{\ensuremath\vdash}% 11128 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22A3}{\ensuremath\dashv}% 11129 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22A4}{\ensuremath\ptextop}% 11130 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22A5}{\ensuremath\bot}% 11131 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22A8}{\ensuremath\models}% 11132 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22C0}{\ensuremath\bigwedge}% 11133 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22C1}{\ensuremath\bigvee}% 11134 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22C2}{\ensuremath\bigcap}% 11135 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22C3}{\ensuremath\bigcup}% 11136 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22C4}{\ensuremath\diamond}% 11137 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22C5}{\ensuremath\cdot}% 11138 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22C6}{\ensuremath\star}% 11139 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22C8}{\ensuremath\bowtie}% 11140 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2308}{\ensuremath\lceil}% 11141 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2309}{\ensuremath\rceil}% 11142 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{230A}{\ensuremath\lfloor}% 11143 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{230B}{\ensuremath\rfloor}% 11144 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2322}{\ensuremath\frown}% 11145 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2323}{\ensuremath\smile}% 11146 % 11147 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{25B3}{\ensuremath\triangle}% 11148 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{25B7}{\ensuremath\triangleright}% 11149 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{25BD}{\ensuremath\bigtriangledown}% 11150 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{25C1}{\ensuremath\triangleleft}% 11151 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{25C7}{\ensuremath\diamond}% 11152 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2660}{\ensuremath\spadesuit}% 11153 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2661}{\ensuremath\heartsuit}% 11154 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2662}{\ensuremath\diamondsuit}% 11155 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2663}{\ensuremath\clubsuit}% 11156 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{266D}{\ensuremath\flat}% 11157 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{266E}{\ensuremath\natural}% 11158 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{266F}{\ensuremath\sharp}% 11159 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{26AA}{\ensuremath\bigcirc}% 11160 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{27B9}{\ensuremath\rangle}% 11161 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{27C2}{\ensuremath\perp}% 11162 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{27E8}{\ensuremath\langle}% 11163 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{27F5}{\ensuremath\longleftarrow}% 11164 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{27F6}{\ensuremath\longrightarrow}% 11165 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{27F7}{\ensuremath\longleftrightarrow}% 11166 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{27FC}{\ensuremath\longmapsto}% 11167 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{29F5}{\ensuremath\setminus}% 11168 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2A00}{\ensuremath\bigodot}% 11169 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2A01}{\ensuremath\bigoplus}% 11170 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2A02}{\ensuremath\bigotimes}% 11171 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2A04}{\ensuremath\biguplus}% 11172 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2A06}{\ensuremath\bigsqcup}% 11173 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2A3F}{\ensuremath\amalg}% 11174 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2AAF}{\ensuremath\preceq}% 11175 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2AB0}{\ensuremath\succeq}% 11176 % 11177 \global\mathchardef\checkmark="1370% actually the square root sign 11178 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2713}{\ensuremath\checkmark}% 11179}% end of \unicodechardefs 11180 11181% UTF-8 byte sequence (pdfTeX) definitions (replacing and @U command) 11182% It makes the setting that replace UTF-8 byte sequence. 11183\def\utfeightchardefs{% 11184 \let\DeclareUnicodeCharacter\DeclareUnicodeCharacterUTFviii 11185 \unicodechardefs 11186} 11187 11188% Whether the active definitions of non-ASCII characters expand to 11189% non-active tokens with the same character code. This is used to 11190% write characters literally, instead of using active definitions for 11191% printing the correct glyphs. 11192\newif\ifpassthroughchars 11193\passthroughcharsfalse 11194 11195% For native Unicode handling (XeTeX and LuaTeX), 11196% provide a definition macro to replace/pass-through a Unicode character 11197% 11198\def\DeclareUnicodeCharacterNative#1#2{% 11199 \catcode"#1=\active 11200 \def\dodeclareunicodecharacternative##1##2##3{% 11201 \begingroup 11202 \uccode`\~="##2\relax 11203 \uppercase{\gdef~}{% 11204 \ifpassthroughchars 11205 ##1% 11206 \else 11207 ##3% 11208 \fi 11209 } 11210 \endgroup 11211 } 11212 \begingroup 11213 \uccode`\.="#1\relax 11214 \uppercase{\def\UTFNativeTmp{.}}% 11215 \expandafter\dodeclareunicodecharacternative\UTFNativeTmp{#1}{#2}% 11216 \endgroup 11217} 11218 11219% Native Unicode handling (XeTeX and LuaTeX) character replacing definition. 11220% It activates the setting that replaces Unicode characters. 11221\def\nativeunicodechardefs{% 11222 \let\DeclareUnicodeCharacter\DeclareUnicodeCharacterNative 11223 \unicodechardefs 11224} 11225 11226% For native Unicode handling (XeTeX and LuaTeX), 11227% make the character token expand 11228% to the sequences given in \unicodechardefs for printing. 11229\def\DeclareUnicodeCharacterNativeAtU#1#2{% 11230 \def\UTFAtUTmp{#2} 11231 \expandafter\globallet\csname uni:#1\endcsname \UTFAtUTmp 11232} 11233 11234% @U command definitions for native Unicode handling (XeTeX and LuaTeX). 11235\def\nativeunicodechardefsatu{% 11236 \let\DeclareUnicodeCharacter\DeclareUnicodeCharacterNativeAtU 11237 \unicodechardefs 11238} 11239 11240% US-ASCII character definitions. 11241\def\asciichardefs{% nothing need be done 11242 \relax 11243} 11244 11245% define all Unicode characters we know about, for the sake of @U. 11246\iftxinativeunicodecapable 11247 \nativeunicodechardefsatu 11248\else 11249 \utfeightchardefs 11250\fi 11251 11252 11253% Make non-ASCII characters printable again for compatibility with 11254% existing Texinfo documents that may use them, even without declaring a 11255% document encoding. 11256% 11257\setnonasciicharscatcode \other 11258 11259 11260\message{formatting,} 11261 11262\newdimen\defaultparindent \defaultparindent = 15pt 11263 11264\chapheadingskip = 15pt plus 4pt minus 2pt 11265\secheadingskip = 12pt plus 3pt minus 2pt 11266\subsecheadingskip = 9pt plus 2pt minus 2pt 11267 11268% Prevent underfull vbox error messages. 11269\vbadness = 10000 11270 11271% Don't be very finicky about underfull hboxes, either. 11272\hbadness = 6666 11273 11274% Following George Bush, get rid of widows and orphans. 11275\widowpenalty=10000 11276\clubpenalty=10000 11277 11278% Use TeX 3.0's \emergencystretch to help line breaking, but if we're 11279% using an old version of TeX, don't do anything. We want the amount of 11280% stretch added to depend on the line length, hence the dependence on 11281% \hsize. We call this whenever the paper size is set. 11282% 11283\def\setemergencystretch{% 11284 \ifx\emergencystretch\thisisundefined 11285 % Allow us to assign to \emergencystretch anyway. 11286 \def\emergencystretch{\dimen0}% 11287 \else 11288 \emergencystretch = .15\hsize 11289 \fi 11290} 11291 11292% Parameters in order: 1) textheight; 2) textwidth; 11293% 3) voffset; 4) hoffset; 5) binding offset; 6) topskip; 11294% 7) physical page height; 8) physical page width. 11295% 11296% We also call \setleading{\textleading}, so the caller should define 11297% \textleading. The caller should also set \parskip. 11298% 11299\def\internalpagesizes#1#2#3#4#5#6#7#8{% 11300 \voffset = #3\relax 11301 \topskip = #6\relax 11302 \splittopskip = \topskip 11303 % 11304 \vsize = #1\relax 11305 \advance\vsize by \topskip 11306 \outervsize = \vsize 11307 \advance\outervsize by 2\topandbottommargin 11308 \txipageheight = \vsize 11309 % 11310 \hsize = #2\relax 11311 \outerhsize = \hsize 11312 \advance\outerhsize by 0.5in 11313 \txipagewidth = \hsize 11314 % 11315 \normaloffset = #4\relax 11316 \bindingoffset = #5\relax 11317 % 11318 \ifpdf 11319 \pdfpageheight #7\relax 11320 \pdfpagewidth #8\relax 11321 % if we don't reset these, they will remain at "1 true in" of 11322 % whatever layout pdftex was dumped with. 11323 \pdfhorigin = 1 true in 11324 \pdfvorigin = 1 true in 11325 \else 11326 \ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined 11327 \special{papersize=#8,#7}% 11328 \else 11329 \pdfpageheight #7\relax 11330 \pdfpagewidth #8\relax 11331 % XeTeX does not have \pdfhorigin and \pdfvorigin. 11332 \fi 11333 \fi 11334 % 11335 \setleading{\textleading} 11336 % 11337 \parindent = \defaultparindent 11338 \setemergencystretch 11339} 11340 11341% @letterpaper (the default). 11342\def\letterpaper{{\globaldefs = 1 11343 \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt 11344 \textleading = 13.2pt 11345 % 11346 % If page is nothing but text, make it come out even. 11347 \internalpagesizes{607.2pt}{6in}% that's 46 lines 11348 {\voffset}{.25in}% 11349 {\bindingoffset}{36pt}% 11350 {11in}{8.5in}% 11351}} 11352 11353% Use @smallbook to reset parameters for 7x9.25 trim size. 11354\def\smallbook{{\globaldefs = 1 11355 \parskip = 2pt plus 1pt 11356 \textleading = 12pt 11357 % 11358 \internalpagesizes{7.5in}{5in}% 11359 {-.2in}{0in}% 11360 {\bindingoffset}{16pt}% 11361 {9.25in}{7in}% 11362 % 11363 \lispnarrowing = 0.3in 11364 \tolerance = 700 11365 \contentsrightmargin = 0pt 11366 \defbodyindent = .5cm 11367}} 11368 11369% Use @smallerbook to reset parameters for 6x9 trim size. 11370% (Just testing, parameters still in flux.) 11371\def\smallerbook{{\globaldefs = 1 11372 \parskip = 1.5pt plus 1pt 11373 \textleading = 12pt 11374 % 11375 \internalpagesizes{7.4in}{4.8in}% 11376 {-.2in}{-.4in}% 11377 {0pt}{14pt}% 11378 {9in}{6in}% 11379 % 11380 \lispnarrowing = 0.25in 11381 \tolerance = 700 11382 \contentsrightmargin = 0pt 11383 \defbodyindent = .4cm 11384}} 11385 11386% Use @afourpaper to print on European A4 paper. 11387\def\afourpaper{{\globaldefs = 1 11388 \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt 11389 \textleading = 13.2pt 11390 % 11391 % Double-side printing via postscript on Laserjet 4050 11392 % prints double-sided nicely when \bindingoffset=10mm and \hoffset=-6mm. 11393 % To change the settings for a different printer or situation, adjust 11394 % \normaloffset until the front-side and back-side texts align. Then 11395 % do the same for \bindingoffset. You can set these for testing in 11396 % your texinfo source file like this: 11397 % @tex 11398 % \global\normaloffset = -6mm 11399 % \global\bindingoffset = 10mm 11400 % @end tex 11401 \internalpagesizes{673.2pt}{160mm}% that's 51 lines 11402 {\voffset}{\hoffset}% 11403 {\bindingoffset}{44pt}% 11404 {297mm}{210mm}% 11405 % 11406 \tolerance = 700 11407 \contentsrightmargin = 0pt 11408 \defbodyindent = 5mm 11409}} 11410 11411% Use @afivepaper to print on European A5 paper. 11412% From romildo@urano.iceb.ufop.br, 2 July 2000. 11413% He also recommends making @example and @lisp be small. 11414\def\afivepaper{{\globaldefs = 1 11415 \parskip = 2pt plus 1pt minus 0.1pt 11416 \textleading = 12.5pt 11417 % 11418 \internalpagesizes{160mm}{120mm}% 11419 {\voffset}{\hoffset}% 11420 {\bindingoffset}{8pt}% 11421 {210mm}{148mm}% 11422 % 11423 \lispnarrowing = 0.2in 11424 \tolerance = 800 11425 \contentsrightmargin = 0pt 11426 \defbodyindent = 2mm 11427 \tableindent = 12mm 11428}} 11429 11430% A specific text layout, 24x15cm overall, intended for A4 paper. 11431\def\afourlatex{{\globaldefs = 1 11432 \afourpaper 11433 \internalpagesizes{237mm}{150mm}% 11434 {\voffset}{4.6mm}% 11435 {\bindingoffset}{7mm}% 11436 {297mm}{210mm}% 11437 % 11438 % Must explicitly reset to 0 because we call \afourpaper. 11439 \globaldefs = 0 11440}} 11441 11442% Use @afourwide to print on A4 paper in landscape format. 11443\def\afourwide{{\globaldefs = 1 11444 \afourpaper 11445 \internalpagesizes{241mm}{165mm}% 11446 {\voffset}{-2.95mm}% 11447 {\bindingoffset}{7mm}% 11448 {297mm}{210mm}% 11449 \globaldefs = 0 11450}} 11451 11452% @pagesizes TEXTHEIGHT[,TEXTWIDTH] 11453% Perhaps we should allow setting the margins, \topskip, \parskip, 11454% and/or leading, also. Or perhaps we should compute them somehow. 11455% 11456\parseargdef\pagesizes{\pagesizesyyy #1,,\finish} 11457\def\pagesizesyyy#1,#2,#3\finish{{% 11458 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \hsize=#2\relax \fi 11459 \globaldefs = 1 11460 % 11461 \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt 11462 \setleading{\textleading}% 11463 % 11464 \dimen0 = #1\relax 11465 \advance\dimen0 by \voffset 11466 \advance\dimen0 by 1in % reference point for DVI is 1 inch from top of page 11467 % 11468 \dimen2 = \hsize 11469 \advance\dimen2 by \normaloffset 11470 \advance\dimen2 by 1in % reference point is 1 inch from left edge of page 11471 % 11472 \internalpagesizes{#1}{\hsize}% 11473 {\voffset}{\normaloffset}% 11474 {\bindingoffset}{44pt}% 11475 {\dimen0}{\dimen2}% 11476}} 11477 11478% Set default to letter. 11479% 11480\letterpaper 11481 11482% Default value of \hfuzz, for suppressing warnings about overfull hboxes. 11483\hfuzz = 1pt 11484 11485 11486\message{and turning on texinfo input format.} 11487 11488\def^^L{\par} % remove \outer, so ^L can appear in an @comment 11489 11490% DEL is a comment character, in case @c does not suffice. 11491\catcode`\^^? = 14 11492 11493% Define macros to output various characters with catcode for normal text. 11494\catcode`\"=\other \def\normaldoublequote{"} 11495\catcode`\$=\other \def\normaldollar{$}%$ font-lock fix 11496\catcode`\+=\other \def\normalplus{+} 11497\catcode`\<=\other \def\normalless{<} 11498\catcode`\>=\other \def\normalgreater{>} 11499\catcode`\^=\other \def\normalcaret{^} 11500\catcode`\_=\other \def\normalunderscore{_} 11501\catcode`\|=\other \def\normalverticalbar{|} 11502\catcode`\~=\other \def\normaltilde{~} 11503 11504% This macro is used to make a character print one way in \tt 11505% (where it can probably be output as-is), and another way in other fonts, 11506% where something hairier probably needs to be done. 11507% 11508% #1 is what to print if we are indeed using \tt; #2 is what to print 11509% otherwise. Since all the Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero 11510% interword stretch (and shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all 11511% typewriter fonts to have this, we can check that font parameter. 11512% 11513\def\ifusingtt#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen3\font=0pt #1\else #2\fi} 11514 11515% Same as above, but check for italic font. Actually this also catches 11516% non-italic slanted fonts since it is impossible to distinguish them from 11517% italic fonts. But since this is only used by $ and it uses \sl anyway 11518% this is not a problem. 11519\def\ifusingit#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen1\font>0pt #1\else #2\fi} 11520 11521% Set catcodes for Texinfo file 11522 11523% Active characters for printing the wanted glyph. 11524% Most of these we simply print from the \tt font, but for some, we can 11525% use math or other variants that look better in normal text. 11526% 11527\catcode`\"=\active 11528\def\activedoublequote{{\tt\char34}} 11529\let"=\activedoublequote 11530\catcode`\~=\active \def\activetilde{{\tt\char126}} \let~ = \activetilde 11531\chardef\hatchar=`\^ 11532\catcode`\^=\active \def\activehat{{\tt \hatchar}} \let^ = \activehat 11533 11534\catcode`\_=\active 11535\def_{\ifusingtt\normalunderscore\_} 11536\def\_{\leavevmode \kern.07em \vbox{\hrule width.3em height.1ex}\kern .07em } 11537\let\realunder=_ 11538 11539\catcode`\|=\active \def|{{\tt\char124}} 11540 11541\chardef \less=`\< 11542\catcode`\<=\active \def\activeless{{\tt \less}}\let< = \activeless 11543\chardef \gtr=`\> 11544\catcode`\>=\active \def\activegtr{{\tt \gtr}}\let> = \activegtr 11545\catcode`\+=\active \def+{{\tt \char 43}} 11546\catcode`\$=\active \def${\ifusingit{{\sl\$}}\normaldollar}%$ font-lock fix 11547\catcode`\-=\active \let-=\normaldash 11548 11549 11550% used for headline/footline in the output routine, in case the page 11551% breaks in the middle of an @tex block. 11552\def\texinfochars{% 11553 \let< = \activeless 11554 \let> = \activegtr 11555 \let~ = \activetilde 11556 \let^ = \activehat 11557 \markupsetuplqdefault \markupsetuprqdefault 11558 \let\b = \strong 11559 \let\i = \smartitalic 11560 % in principle, all other definitions in \tex have to be undone too. 11561} 11562 11563% Used sometimes to turn off (effectively) the active characters even after 11564% parsing them. 11565\def\turnoffactive{% 11566 \normalturnoffactive 11567 \otherbackslash 11568} 11569 11570\catcode`\@=0 11571 11572% \backslashcurfont outputs one backslash character in current font, 11573% as in \char`\\. 11574\global\chardef\backslashcurfont=`\\ 11575\global\let\rawbackslashxx=\backslashcurfont % let existing .??s files work 11576 11577% \realbackslash is an actual character `\' with catcode other, and 11578% \doublebackslash is two of them (for the pdf outlines). 11579{\catcode`\\=\other @gdef@realbackslash{\} @gdef@doublebackslash{\\}} 11580 11581% In Texinfo, backslash is an active character; it prints the backslash 11582% in fixed width font. 11583\catcode`\\=\active % @ for escape char from now on. 11584 11585% Print a typewriter backslash. For math mode, we can't simply use 11586% \backslashcurfont: the story here is that in math mode, the \char 11587% of \backslashcurfont ends up printing the roman \ from the math symbol 11588% font (because \char in math mode uses the \mathcode, and plain.tex 11589% sets \mathcode`\\="026E). Hence we use an explicit \mathchar, 11590% which is the decimal equivalent of "715c (class 7, e.g., use \fam; 11591% ignored family value; char position "5C). We can't use " for the 11592% usual hex value because it has already been made active. 11593 11594@def@ttbackslash{{@tt @ifmmode @mathchar29020 @else @backslashcurfont @fi}} 11595@let@backslashchar = @ttbackslash % @backslashchar{} is for user documents. 11596 11597% \rawbackslash defines an active \ to do \backslashcurfont. 11598% \otherbackslash defines an active \ to be a literal `\' character with 11599% catcode other. We switch back and forth between these. 11600@gdef@rawbackslash{@let\=@backslashcurfont} 11601@gdef@otherbackslash{@let\=@realbackslash} 11602 11603% Same as @turnoffactive except outputs \ as {\tt\char`\\} instead of 11604% the literal character `\'. 11605% 11606{@catcode`- = @active 11607 @gdef@normalturnoffactive{% 11608 @passthroughcharstrue 11609 @let-=@normaldash 11610 @let"=@normaldoublequote 11611 @let$=@normaldollar %$ font-lock fix 11612 @let+=@normalplus 11613 @let<=@normalless 11614 @let>=@normalgreater 11615 @let^=@normalcaret 11616 @let_=@normalunderscore 11617 @let|=@normalverticalbar 11618 @let~=@normaltilde 11619 @let\=@ttbackslash 11620 @markupsetuplqdefault 11621 @markupsetuprqdefault 11622 @unsepspaces 11623 } 11624} 11625 11626% If a .fmt file is being used, characters that might appear in a file 11627% name cannot be active until we have parsed the command line. 11628% So turn them off again, and have @fixbackslash turn them back on. 11629@catcode`+=@other @catcode`@_=@other 11630 11631% \enablebackslashhack - allow file to begin `\input texinfo' 11632% 11633% If a .fmt file is being used, we don't want the `\input texinfo' to show up. 11634% That is what \eatinput is for; after that, the `\' should revert to printing 11635% a backslash. 11636% If the file did not have a `\input texinfo', then it is turned off after 11637% the first line; otherwise the first `\' in the file would cause an error. 11638% This is used on the very last line of this file, texinfo.tex. 11639% We also use @c to call @fixbackslash, in case ends of lines are hidden. 11640{ 11641@catcode`@^=7 11642@catcode`@^^M=13@gdef@enablebackslashhack{% 11643 @global@let\ = @eatinput% 11644 @catcode`@^^M=13% 11645 @def@c{@fixbackslash@c}% 11646 % Definition for the newline at the end of this file. 11647 @def ^^M{@let^^M@secondlinenl}% 11648 % Definition for a newline in the main Texinfo file. 11649 @gdef @secondlinenl{@fixbackslash}% 11650 % In case the first line has a whole-line command on it 11651 @let@originalparsearg@parsearg 11652 @def@parsearg{@fixbackslash@originalparsearg} 11653}} 11654 11655{@catcode`@^=7 @catcode`@^^M=13% 11656@gdef@eatinput input texinfo#1^^M{@fixbackslash}} 11657 11658% Emergency active definition of newline, in case an active newline token 11659% appears by mistake. 11660{@catcode`@^=7 @catcode13=13% 11661@gdef@enableemergencynewline{% 11662 @gdef^^M{% 11663 @par% 11664 %<warning: active newline>@par% 11665}}} 11666 11667 11668@gdef@fixbackslash{% 11669 @ifx\@eatinput @let\ = @ttbackslash @fi 11670 @catcode13=5 % regular end of line 11671 @enableemergencynewline 11672 @let@c=@texinfoc 11673 @let@parsearg@originalparsearg 11674 % Also turn back on active characters that might appear in the input 11675 % file name, in case not using a pre-dumped format. 11676 @catcode`+=@active 11677 @catcode`@_=@active 11678 % 11679 % If texinfo.cnf is present on the system, read it. 11680 % Useful for site-wide @afourpaper, etc. This macro, @fixbackslash, gets 11681 % called at the beginning of every Texinfo file. Not opening texinfo.cnf 11682 % directly in this file, texinfo.tex, makes it possible to make a format 11683 % file for Texinfo. 11684 % 11685 @openin 1 texinfo.cnf 11686 @ifeof 1 @else @input texinfo.cnf @fi 11687 @closein 1 11688} 11689 11690 11691% Say @foo, not \foo, in error messages. 11692@escapechar = `@@ 11693 11694% These (along with & and #) are made active for url-breaking, so need 11695% active definitions as the normal characters. 11696@def@normaldot{.} 11697@def@normalquest{?} 11698@def@normalslash{/} 11699 11700% These look ok in all fonts, so just make them not special. 11701% @hashchar{} gets its own user-level command, because of #line. 11702@catcode`@& = @other @def@normalamp{&} 11703@catcode`@# = @other @def@normalhash{#} 11704@catcode`@% = @other @def@normalpercent{%} 11705 11706@let @hashchar = @normalhash 11707 11708@c Finally, make ` and ' active, so that txicodequoteundirected and 11709@c txicodequotebacktick work right in, e.g., @w{@code{`foo'}}. If we 11710@c don't make ` and ' active, @code will not get them as active chars. 11711@c Do this last of all since we use ` in the previous @catcode assignments. 11712@catcode`@'=@active 11713@catcode`@`=@active 11714@markupsetuplqdefault 11715@markupsetuprqdefault 11716 11717@c Local variables: 11718@c eval: (add-hook 'write-file-hooks 'time-stamp) 11719@c page-delimiter: "^\\\\message\\|emacs-page" 11720@c time-stamp-start: "def\\\\texinfoversion{" 11721@c time-stamp-format: "%:y-%02m-%02d.%02H" 11722@c time-stamp-end: "}" 11723@c End: 11724 11725@c vim:sw=2: 11726 11727@enablebackslashhack 11728
